Home

TopSURV Reference Manual

1. al FAcelect Job gt 06 2274 Default Created 10 15 2007 23 35 Modified LOf24 2007 00 19 1 TPS TopSuUR Jobs Figure 4 2 Select Job 4 9 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting To a Job Export To the Job On the To lt Job name gt screen Figure 4 3 select the data that you want to have exported along with the point data Eae core Points fall Points Code Library Localization Point Lists Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments Roads Figure 4 3 Export To Job e Points select the points to import from the drop down list either All Points By Type By Range and Code By Type Range and Code or None e Check mark the data to be imported along with the points either Code Library Localization Point Lists Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets or Roads e Back returns to the previous screen e Next depending on data selections opens an appropriate screen to select either Point Types Point Point List Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets or Roads to export e Finish starts the export process only if Code Library and or Localization items are chosen and All Points is selected Otherwise the option becomes available after all data are selected by the Next button e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 4 3 Exporting Data Select Point Types To Export The Pt List To Export sc
2. ccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 Coordinate System messinese 2 5 LO esaeer meee ee ere ter et rte ne Cerner tir temrate nr ryan ether rer re terra 2 6 Display seii a 2 8 PVATIIS EEA A E E A TA 2 9 Opening JOB aua ene aaa cae 2 10 DCIS TI aA JOD Santas taaaetinnaeneuns uate 2 11 Viewing Job Information seirinin nea 2 12 P N 7010 0492 Table of Contents Chapter 3 Configuring a JOD ccceceeessseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneesees 3 1 CONTISUMNG MeS CY xaiccises shee S 3 2 GPS COnmeuraUOn esisi e 3 3 Configuring the Survey ccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Base RECEI CP oreen 3 7 Base PP SSUP steric ainetace ea 3 10 Base RadiO srecen aa a A i 3 11 Base Radio Configuration cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 Base Radio Parameters cccccsseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeees 3 14 R ver RECEIVE er sists oe Aieoiee 3 21 Rover EPSE eE 3 25 Moden Connec Uon 325 sauce te a 3 27 Kaser CONG scatterers tac celta tgltateks a delete teats 3 27 R ya Radi e SE 3 29 Rover Radio DIPU cucini a ea icadceice tee 3 30 Rover Radio Parameters cccsseessseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 RE S1 PH9 I3 Repeater crisisen a i 3 31 Output Radi rasoio aaa EEEE 3 33 Config Output NMEA oesssssssssseesssssssssssseseressss 3 33 Confie Beacons eie 3 34 Comte BRI cssc ea RN 3 35 SBAS SCUD ree wicca neneclousccedhtsete eee 3 37 CDGPS Radio saron E 3 38 Confie OMS VARS i 3 38 mmGPS Parameters csacisesiiawnanceeaietion 3 39 Initialization Occupation
3. toggles on off the keyboard arrow keys that duplicate the arrows on the screen deletes the highlighted point from the list P N 7010 0492 6 35 Editing Job Data M closes the plot of the point list Only the list of points table is available e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing two items Edit Points displays the Points screen For details see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files The Properties tab shows the name of the point list selected on the Point List screen Figure 6 41 AS Sina OK Point List Properties Figure 6 41 Edit Point List Properties Raw Data To edit raw data tap the Raw Data icon 6 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data The Raw Data screen has the following columns and buttons Type Topo Topo Topo Topo Auto TD Auto TD Tea TE E Find Code Find Point Find Next Figure 6 42 Raw Data GPS Name point name and the icon displaying the type of point Type the type of measurement Codes codes for the point HI for TS mode the height of the instrument for a Level survey the elevation of the line of sight of the levelled instrument above the datum Ant Ht for GPS mode the antenna height S stands for the slope measurement of the antenna height Coordinates the coordinates of the point TS and GPS modes Mid Wire the reading
4. Code code for the offset point to be stored which can be entered manually or selected from the drop down list the Attributes List icon lists available attributes see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon and in the upper left corner of the screen displays the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen HR sets the target height Rod Height Prism stores horizontal distance and horizontal angle measurements to prism HA VA combines horizontal angle and zenith angle measurements with horizontal distance logged in Prism step to determine point location Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode P N 7010 0492 11 13 Total Station Survey See the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement for other tabs Distance Offset The Measurement tab Figure 11 14 on the Dist Ofst screen contains the parameters for definition of a point You can add or subtract distances horizontally and vertically FEE on ti Meas Data Map Offsets Point 5 occpt4 E Code pm v hens fi HR 2 000 m HA 230 0600 A 90 1053 5D 800 005 dms m Measure Foresight Direct Figure 11 14 Distance Offset Measurement Tab e Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note a icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code code for the offset point to be stored enter eith
5. Intersect Ht the height of the intersection point Store Point the name of the intersection point Ant Ht for GPS mode the height of the antenna HR for TS mode the height of the rod target Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen See Stake Parameters on page 3 44 GPS Stakeout The Stake screen Figure 13 27 on page 13 26 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current point name in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the direction and the distance to the targets P N 7010 0492 13 25 Staking out Close E H VY gt gt 103 2 201 3 200 0 10 000 k Hz Dist 57 8795 M Right Back Fill 0 498 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 016 m Azimuth 178 5842 dms Figure 13 27 Stakeout e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit point screen e Close returns to the 2Line amp Ofst screen Figure 13 26 on page 13 25 TS Stakeout The Stake screen Figure 13 28 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current station in the upper left corner of the screen the necessary direction and the value of the distance to the targets eat Point 104 EDM j Dsan HA 16 2209 dms Left 0 191 m Away From TS 100 144 m Fill 2 000 m Turn Left 0 0051 dms Figure 13 28 Stakeout 13 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets
6. Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Prefix Suffix when selected sets the prefix or suffix to be added to the generated point name Save points to Point List enable if necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list When check marked a field appears where the name for the list can be set Offsets set the offset of the point from the center line along two dimensions horizontal the Right field and vertical the Up Down field relative to the surface Surface Offset type or to the horizontal line Flat Offset type Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Left Offset Points Params screen Figure 7 34 on page 7 37 7 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Calculate Road Points Left Offset Point Parameters The Left Offset Points Params screen Figure 7 34 is similar to the Right Offset Points Params screen except for the direction of the offset Ar Ge Offset ay Calc First faoi goe p vE Prefix Suffix None F Save Points To Point List Offset Type Surface Offset v Left UAE amp up fo 000 m Figure 7 34 Left Offset Points Parameters The Calc button calculates the points and stores them to the data set P N 7010 0492 7 37 Editing Roads Notes 7 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 8 Setting Up GPS To set up a GPS survey tap the Setup GPS icon in the main menu The Setup GPS menu Figure 8 1
7. Point List the Point List name either enter manually or select from the Point Lists drop down box List of Points the list of currently selected vertices for the polygon Up and down arrows move the highlighted point up and down in the order of the points E gt For the correct operation of the application the sides of the polygon should not cross each other switches the keyboard arrow keys on off duplicates the operation of the arrows on the screen m closes the plot of the polygon Only the list of points is available Calc calculates the area of the polygon and displays it on the Results tab The Results tab Figure 14 38 shows the results of the calculation D Area Results Map Area i m 2 740323 7 Acres 184 4206 Perimeter 3613 599 Point List Figure 14 38 Area Results Tab 14 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Area The Map tab Figure 14 39 shows a view of the polygon 200 m JJJ J Figure 14 39 Area Map Tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two options Edit Points see Points on page 6 2 and Help to access the help files The Hinge Method The Hinge method generates a polygon of the desired area by rotating a ray from a fixed rotation point This method calculates the coordinates of a point of intersection of the ray with the boundary formed by selected points in a list For
8. TS Point enter a Tangent to the Spiral point the starting point of the spiral Tangent Azi the azimuth of the tangent to the spiral at the point TS Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the radius parameter of the spiral at the ending point Length Sp Const the length of the spiral at the ending point or the Spiral Constant the constant of the spiral 13 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets 2 For any spiral point R x Length SpiralConst where R is the Radius and Length is the length of the spiral both at the same specified point SS the starting station chainage of the line Turn specifies whether the spiral turns right or left Dir the direction of moving TS gt SC Tangent Spiral gt Spiral Circle The incoming spiral to the internal circle CS gt ST Circle Spiral gt Spiral Tangent The outgoing spiral from the circle to the Tangent Next opens the Station amp Offsets screen see Station amp Offsets on page 13 19 Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 Close closes the screen without any settings being made The Help Icon in the upper left hand corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Line amp Ofst screen see Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 GPS and TS stakeouts are performed in the same way as described in Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 P N 701
9. The Results tab Figure 14 34 displays the results of the calculation Ar ete amp Points Radius Point Results EJ Save RP North East Eley Radius Length chord Degree Degree 10017 1562 683 m 722 3995 M 87 783 m 1127 881 m 1522 936 m 1409 851 m 5 0448 dms 5 0454 dms 77 2152 dms nn NGF m Gave Figure 14 34 Radius amp Points Results Tab For a description of curve parameters see Calculating the Parameters of a Curve on page 14 19 e Save press to store the point being found The Map tab Figure 14 35 displays the results of the calculation graphically Radius amp Points Radius Point Results 200 m JJJ Figure 14 35 Radius amp Points Map Tab 14 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Area Area Tap the Area icon to access the Area menu to calculate the area of a polygon formed by any points or the coordinates of a point points that forms a polygon of the desired area 33 A IN rdr Camy gt B Area Figure 14 36 Area Menu By Points To calculate the area of a polygon formed by any points tap the By Points icon The Comp Area screen displays Figure 14 37 eax D Area Results Map Point List PointList1 List of Poir y lt 4 1 3 bo 1 lt Figure 14 37 Area by Points P N 7010 0492 14 29 COGO Calculations The Area tab contains the list of points vertices of the polygon and the plot of the polygon
10. e The List icon opens the Layers screen to edit layers For details on editing layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 Area Area is bound with a closed line Line nodes points have the same code of area type to form an area boundary To edit an area tap the Area icon The Area screen Figure 6 36 on page 6 31 contains a list of existing areas on the left side of the screen and the two windows on the right side that represent the view of the selected area in the horizontal and vertical planes 6 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Area List of Areas oo v RR Area 1 wes bd ime eses ebd fm amp Are Figure 6 36 Area Screen e Delete press to delete the highlighted Area from the list e Edit opens the applicable Edit Area screen Figure 6 37 on page 6 32 e Add opens a blank Add Area screen to create a new area The Area can be created in five ways by selecting the points with the desired codes or code strings by selecting the points from the list or from a line by tapping the points on the map To view the current selected area in a larger map tap one of the map plots The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points displays the Points screen For details see Points on page 6 2 e Help accesses the Help files Edit Area On the Edit Area screen Figure 6 37 on page 6 32 you can edit the name the points and the layer of
11. e Transmit Delay a signal transmission delay for the current Base e Use Multi Base when check marked enables multi base mode for surveying On the Status screen on the Rover side the Multi Base tab appears to select the Base AS a Base oK Cancel Base Station ID E Transmit Delay 30 wt Use Multi Base Figure 8 4 Multi Base Grid to Ground The Grid to Ground Params screen Figure 8 5 displays the Grid to Ground GG system in the defined coordinate system for the P N 7010 0492 8 5 Setting up GPS Origin Point option This screen available on the Start Base screen provides a faster method for setting the calculated value of the Scale Factor that will be applied to the job Ao to Ground OK Cancel Apply GG Origin Point Direction Grid to Ground Combined SF 0 99993552 Az Rotation 0 0000 dms Orig Pt IP1 Ground Pt m North 1500 000 East 1500 000 Figure 8 5 Grid to Ground from Start Base For details see From Grid to Ground Ground to Grid Transformation on page 3 78 Starting Static Occupation To start a Static Occupation tap the Static Occupation icon The Static Occupation screen contains information about the point occupied for static observations and starts logging data in PP Static survey Figure 8 6 on page 8 7 e Point selects the name of the point of the Base receiver location from a map or list icon or entered manually The photo note icon
12. sets the Automatic Repetition of the measurements to active mode the survey automatically advances to the next set Enabled only for motorized surveys and only if a Meas Method of Angle Dist Sets Dir Rev is selected P N 7010 0492 9 63 Configuring a Job Auto Accept Meas activates the review of automatic repetition needed to accept each measurement Enabled only for Robotic non RC2 surveys and only when a Meas Method of Angle Dist Sets Dir Rev is selected Distance Averaging defines if the distance used is measured using one signal or the average of several signals if enabled Measure Reverse Dist reverse distance measurements if enabled These are used for the reduction of the distance measurement errors Next opens the second additional Survey Parameters screen Figure 3 64 on page 3 65 Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen The second additional Survey Parameters screen contains the following survey parameters Figure 3 64 on page 3 65 Meas Type sets the order and the type of the measurements in one set There are five types HA horizontal angle HD horizontal distance VA vertical angle VD vertical distance SD slope distance EDM Mode sets distance measuring mode either coarse or fine that determines the sensitivity of the distance measurements Select Fine for a normal mode or Coarse mode to measure in a shorter time Backsight
13. Auto Topo Points points collected during a kinematic survey Data Points a Format Topcon Fl 4 tc4 Point Type Design Points Figure 5 15 Import From File e Next opens the From lt name of Format gt screen 5 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings The options available on the To File screen depend on the format selected Refer to the following sections for details Topcon Text Custom If the Text Custom format is selected the From File screen Figure 5 16 has an ASCII File Properties field P From File Cancel Data Points ka Format Topcon Text Custom txt Point Type Design Points E ASCII File Properties Use Type for Attributes Use Quotes for Text Values Figure 5 16 Import From Text File e ASCII File Properties defines the condition of the imported file interpretation Check and enable Use Type for Attributes and Use Quotes for Text Values one or both These conditions use the same type for the attributes and quotes for the text values Figure 5 16 The ASCI FIle Properties field appears for txt imported files e Next opens the From Text screen Figure 5 17 on page 5 16 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings The From Text screen browses directories from which to select the file to import data Figure 5 17 on page 5 16 e Type specifies the txt extension for
14. BS End Sta 7 00 000 Figure 7 17 Edit Vertical Alignment Elements The element list has the following columns for the vertical alignment elements P N 7010 0492 7 19 Editing Roads Element the icon and name of the element either vertical grade parabola or arc Length Arc Radius depending upon the selection either the length of the element or the radius of the circular arc Start Grade End Grade the grades of the element in percentage at the starting and ending points For a Vertical grade element values are the same Insert inserts elements selected from a floating menu Vertical Grade and Curve at the selected location in the list Add displays a menu of two elements select to add either Vertical Grade or Curve The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing two items Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit points see Edit X Section Template on page 7 27 Help accesses the Help files Select a vertical alignment element then tap the Station information under the element list to briefly display information Figure 7 18 on the start and end stations or chainages for the selected alignment element Peo ve ane E Start Pt Vert Figure 7 18 Alignment Element Information 7 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Vertical Alignments The graphical interface also displays the start and final positions of the selected ele
15. Figure 14 2 Inverse Menu Point to Point To calculate the Point to Point Inverse tap the Pt To Pt icon Figure 14 2 The Two Point Inverse screen displays Figure 14 3 on page 14 4 P N 7010 0492 14 3 COGO Calculations On the Two Point Inverse screen compute the inverse between two known points Inverse is comprised of the azimuth from one point to the other and the distance between these points P jT w0 Point Inverse Close i P Inverse Results Map From Point f To Point 4 Figure 14 3 Two Point Inverse The nverse tab contains initial data for the following parameters e From Point the first point name either enter manually or select from the map or from the list e To Point the second point name either enter manually or select from the map or from the list e Calc calculates the inverse The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files Tap the icon to the left of the tabs to open a larger map of the task being performed Figure 14 4 on page 14 5 Tap the large image to hide it 14 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Inverse EA Figure 14 4 Large Image of COGO Task The Results tab shows the initial data From Point To Point and the results of the calculation Figure 14 5 The results can vary based on whether a
16. Figure 2 13 Job Info OAF 9 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 3 Configuring a Job To set up a job tap the Configure icon in the main menu The icon reflects the instrument used in survey The Configure menu Figure 3 1 includes options to l H o a eS Create or edit a survey configuration Set a coordinate system for a job Log job history to a file and set global parameters Set default units to be used in a job Customize the interface to display data in a job Set alarm parameters Show hide functions in the menus F Coord System Global ay z Display Alarms Figure 3 1 Configure Menu The Help Icon g opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 3 1 Configuring a Job Configuring the Survey To configure a survey tap the Survey icon or use the New Job Wizard see Creating a New Job on page 2 2 The Survey Style screen displays Figure 3 2 e GPS Config shows the GPS configuration for the current job The following configurations for GPS mode are available from the drop down list My RTK My Network RTK My Network DGPS My RT DGPS My PP Static My PP Kinematic and My PP DGPS TS Config shows the total station configuration for the current job The following configu
17. Figure 3 84 Global Screen immediately become available for selection from When using a Global Data Dictionary file the codes the Code drop down list The layers from the Global Data Dictionary file display in the Layer list of the current job only as points are saved with the file s codes selected 2 88 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Units Setting Units Tap the Units icon to set default units for a job The Units screen Figure 3 85 displays For details see Units on page 2 6 ww p gt nits Angle DMS Temperature Celsius iC aa Pressure mmHg v Figure 3 85 Units Screen Customizing Data Display The Display icon opens the Display screen Figure 3 86 to customize the software interface For details on this screen see Display on page 2 8 ok cancer Coord Type Coord Order Northing Easting Elevation na Azimuth Origin Morth Disp Dir As Azimuth Disp CL Pos As Station Full Station 100 000 m Figure 3 86 Display P N 7010 0492 3 89 Configuring a Job In the Contractor Module the Display screen does not contain the Coordinate Type field because this module works only with ground coordinates Setting Alarms The Alarms icon opens the Alarms screen Figure 3 87 For details see Setting Alarms on page 3 90 Eae ere Audible Alarm Instrument Controller GPS TS Power Alarm Memory Alarm d Radio Link F Fix
18. Flip and Rotate the Total station by 180 degrees to get the reverse measurement This measurement method is known as Multiple in which case the Set tab appears in the SS Dir Rey screen One set consists of one direct and one reverse measurement These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical and Horizontal circle centering errors e Ang Dist Sets Dir Rev during the measurement defines the instrument that uses the specified Angle sequence to perform repeated measurements In this case the S Dir Rev screen also has the Set tab The sequence of four measurements constitutes one set One measurement is the backsight in Direct face or the P N 7010 0492 10 9 Setting up TS Survey Foresight in Reverse face in two positions of the Total Station These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical and Horizontal circle centering errors Ar ode Cancel Meas Method Sideshot Direct na Angle Sequence psf FS Plunge FS BS Num Sets Tolerances E Hz 5 0 sec Dist 0 006 m 3 0 ec VA 5 Auto Advance Set Auto Accept Meas Distance Averaging Measure Reverse Dist Defaults Figure 10 9 Mode Measurement Method e Next opens the next Mode screen to set the order and the type of the measurements in one set Figure 10 10 Ar rode Cancel Meas Type HA VA SD na EDM Mode Fe E Prism Constant mm Point Guide Prism Figure 10 10 Mode Type of Measurements For a description of other parameters o
19. Name Separator selects a delimiter to use for point names Use for Range Separator shows the delimiter being used as a range separator Back returns to the previous screen Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 5 5 Importing Data FApoints to Mate Finish Cancel y Filter by Codes y Filter by Range 29 Mame gists for Range m Figure 5 5 Points to Import e Next if available opens the next screen to select objects once the button becomes grayed out tap the Finish button to start the export process Code The Code screen contains a list of available codes All points with codes selected here are imported Figure 5 6 on page 5 7 e Uncheck deselects the highlighted code e Check check marks the highlighted entries e Select and OK returns to the Points to Import screen with the selected codes e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 5 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From Job Select Codes PLAT SUMITER4AL SUMTER 42 IRF6819 wt Be Figure 5 6 Code Select Point List to Import The Pt List To Imp screen see Figure 5 7 on page 5 8 selects the point list to import Place a check mark next to the point list you want to import from the list of Point Lists e Point Lists the list of available point lists in
20. Text Format Point Clouds Scanning Data Header SFILE_VERO1 point name X Y Z Wide Image name Tele Image Name Layer Name Point Attribute Binary Format Fix Point Clouds Scanning Data point name X Y Z Layer Name CSV Format Job History Job history can be exported to the CSV file or text report CSV All job history data are represented in text format with comma separated values Report In the current version only resection data are output The completed resection measurements prints out or writes to a file in the order of measuring Also all changes made when editing raw data are visible in the report file Example TopSURV Version 5 04 Date Time Job Job Name Occ point name PPPPPPPPPP E EEEEEEE EEEE m N NNNNNNN NNNN m Z ZZZZ ZZZZ m Instr height 11 1111 m A 48 TopSURV Reference Manual Job History Surveyor name Temperature TT T C Pressure Xxx mmHg Date Time JJJJ MM DD HH MM SS Dim Type 2D or 3D Orientation ggg gggg gon Standarddev dg gggg mgon OCC Std deviation dE dE mm dN dN mm dZ dZ mm Scale fix calculated 1 00000000 Backbearing Name Hz gon V gon SD m dHz mgon dV mgon dS m tH m East m North m Height m dE m dN m dZ m USE HVSD BKB Ipppppppppppp HHH HHHH VVV VVVV DDDD DDDD dH HHHH dV VVVV dS SSS t ttt EEEEEEF EEEE NNNNNNN NNNN ZZZZ ZZZZ dE EEE dN NNN dZ ZZZ HVSD BKB2pppppppppppp HHH HHHH VVV VVVV DDD
21. dwg or LandXML xml When importing from an AutoCAD DXF or Drawing file tap the Settings button to select desired drawing styles to represent points and lines for detail see On the Settings on page 5 20 The OK button on the From lt Format gt screen opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process to save results into TN3 P N 7010 0492 5 25 Importing Data files The TN3 files will have the same name of the file imported and will be saved in the DTM directory Layers For Layers data you can import the following formats Autodesk Layer States las Topcon 3D Linework n3 Multiple Data For Multiple data you can import the following formats Topcon Text Custom txt AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp LandXML xml KOF kof Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation V8 dgn SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo TopSURV only imports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG files TopSURV imports layers to DWG DXF files along with the appropriate data types For Land XML file as an example select the file from which you want to import data on the From lt Format gt screen and tap the OK button The Import Status screen first opens to retrieve information on the file contents Figure 5 28 on page 5 27 5 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Ar import Status Import Preparation Cancel Figure 5 28 Import Preparation The
22. e Back returns to the previous screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings FFAriscellaneous Finish Cancel Prompt for Rod Height Prompt for BS Check Prompt for Feature Codes Stakeout Sound Manual Stakeout Update Rc Beep on Storing Points YA Zero at Level Use Horizontal Angle Left Automatically display BS Seti Hold Offset Measurement BS Is Always Required 4 Figure 3 68 Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Level Survey For the Level survey type the Miscellaneous screen contains the following specific user interface parameters Figure 3 69 on page 3 71 e Display Coordinates after Measurement if enabled automatically displays computed coordinates after a total station measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database e Apply Earth Curvature and Refraction if enabled corrects the computed heights for the Earth s Curvature Vertical Distance and slope distances and vertical angles for atmospheric refraction 3 70 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Prompt for Feature Codes if enabled the Code Attributes screen displays to specify the code and attributes before a surveyed point is stored Stakeout Sound if enabled makes a sound each time a
23. e Logging displays the number of GPS epochs used in the resection calculation during the measurement Data tab Figure 8 45 is used to view the results of resection measurements Data displays only after three or more points have been measured 0 539 O 012 37 4 gt Figure 8 45 Resection Data Tab e Re Meas clears all data measurements and restarts the resection process e Accept opens the Add Point screen Figure 8 46 on page 8 41 to view the point information for the transmitter The Add Point screen Figure 8 46 on page 8 41 is used to view and save the transmitter location 8 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Initialize mmGPS COT OK Cancel Point Info i Point Transmitter21 E Code 3 Gee fy Note Transmitter WG564 m Lat 37 4105 13599 Lon 121 533006595 Ell ht 80 463 Control Point Figure 8 46 Add Point Sensor The Sensor tab of the Init mmGPS screen Figure 8 47 uploads transmitter calibration information to the sensor and sets up the sensor for receiving the transmitter s laser beam Data Pos Sensor Receiver Port D w Transmitter ID ANY ka Sensor Gain Figure 8 47 Initialize mmGPS Sensor Tab e Receiver Port connects the receiver and sensor e Transmitter ID the transmitter s channel The ANY selection allows the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate P N 7010
24. gts6 Topcon FC 6 GTS 7 gts7 TDS Raw Data RAW MOSS Survey txt Field Book fbk KOF kof Topcon Vector Format tvf TVF with Code Style tvf Berlin GNSS Messprotocoll txt or Berlin GNSS Mittelwerte txt When choosing LandXML TDS Raw Data Field Book or KOF file select the type of raw data to export Export TS Raw Data and or Export GPS Raw Data In addition to being exported to a TDS Raw Data file raw data can be saved in a format compatible with the FBK format Selection of the FBK Compatible option is available if control codes are saved as notes When selected the FBK Compatible option demands points have only numerical names The screen displays a number at which TopSURV will start renaming points with alphanumeric names Ea ri cancel Data Raw Data v Format TDs Raw Data RA aa Export TS Raw Data Export GPS Raw Data Control Codes as Notes Alphanumeric Points will be Renumbered Starting at poos zode Style Figure 4 31 Export Raw Data To TDS Raw Data P N 7010 0492 4 27 Exporting Data Horizontal Alignments For Horizontal Alignments data you can export the following formats SSS H Alignment hal TopSURV H Alignment thl CLIP H Alignment PLT or ISPOL H Alignment ALI Figure 4 32 from the Format drop down list Format sss H Alignment hal aa Figure 4 32 Horizontal Alignments e Next opens the H Alignments to Exp screen t
25. returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Survey Parameters screen 2 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Satellite EA SAT Lon 25E AM_SAT AP SAT Lon 97 LOBE OPTUS Lon 160E Figure 3 39 Config OmniSTAR mmGPS Parameters For mmGPS aided RTK survey types see Figure 3 5 on page 3 6 the configuration screens are the same as for the standard RTK survey types A mmGPS survey RTK or Network RTK uses the usual RTK GPS survey system but with a wireless PZS 1 sensor at the Rover to pick up the Lazer Zone signal from the PZL 1 transmitter for accurate millimeter elevations Fas The mmGPS Parameters screen adds a millimeter GPS selection to the RTK survey Figure 3 40 on page 3 40 When measuring the height of the Rover antenna include the height of the PZS 1 sensor with 5 8 inch plug e Receiver port selects the port used for communication between the receiver and PZS 1 sensor typically port D e Sensor Gain select Auto to automatically control the mmGPS receiver s detection level of the transmitter s signal e Height Difference Limit sets the threshold for the difference between GPS and mmGPS height measurements P N 7010 0492 3 39 Configuring a Job e Back returns to the previous screen e Next proceed
26. 10 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Resection Point Info LayerStyle Photd Point pA Code o M Note Local m North 1000 000 East 999 999 Eley 101 003 Figure 10 15 Store Point This is a standard screen adding a new point For details on this screen see Editing a Point on page 6 6 Resection Options The Resection Options screen Figure 10 16 sets the resection type whether to calculate the height 3 D or just the horizontal coordinates 2 D Resection Options OK Cancel Resection Type ae Figure 10 16 Resection Options P N 7010 0492 10 15 Setting up TS Survey The 2D 3D option is retained between sessions When doing a resection the next time the resection will start up with the previous used setting Remote Benchmarks The method of Remote Benchmarks computes the elevation of an occupation point where the instrument is set up using measurements to two or more points with known elevations To access the Remote BM option tap the Remote BM icon Figure 10 2 The Occupation Pt screen displays first to set the occupation point Figure 10 11 on page 10 11 To perform Remote BM for the occupation point selected in the BS Survey screen press the menu icon next to the Map icon in the Occ Point field of this screen and select the Elevation option Figure 10 2 on page 10 2 Computation or estimation of elevation vertical coordinate typically uses measurements from two o
27. As etc OK Multi Code Attrs photo Note gt Attributes lt B Figure 6 9 Multiple Code Attributes e Delete deletes the code from the list P N 7010 0492 6 9 Editing Job Data e Edit opens the Codes Attributes screen to edit the selected code e Add creates a new code through the Code Attributes screen e OK saves the settings and returns to the Edit Point screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings On the Select Layer screen Figure 6 10 select the layer in which to locate the point ArH Layer oK Cancel el ayer lt By Code gt a Figure 6 10 Select Layer e The List button opens the Layers screen to edit layers For details on editing layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 e OK saves the settings and returns to the Edit Point screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 6 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Layer and Style On the Edit Point screen you can change the layer and graphic properties of the point Figure 6 11 on page 6 11 Point Info Layer Style Check Poir E Fi Layer lt By Code gt aa Point Style Silled Circle Figure 6 11 Add Edit Point Layer Style Tab Tap the Layer Style tab to change the layer and graphic properties of the point e Layer selects the layer to locate the point e The List _ button opens the Layers screen to edit layers For det
28. CE operating system such as Topcon s FC 2000 FC 200 FC 2200 FC2500 and the integrated controller of GMS 2 and GMS 2 Pro TopSURV is used for e Field data collection with Topcon GPS receivers Topcon Sokkia Nikon and Leica total stations and Topcon digital levels e Stakeout and control work e Data conversions e Advanced COGO Also TopSURV 7 2 for Windows PC is available cx from the Topcon website It will operate in demo mode allowing 25 points to be added to a job To fully activate a separate license must be purchased Security Upon initial startup a Security screen displays Figure 1 1 on page 1 2 TopSURV requires an access code to start Contact a Topcon representative to acquire the necessary codes e Key Value the device s number given to a Topcon representative to receive activation IDs e Activation IDs the fields in which to enter the security codes received from a Topcon representative to activate purchased modes TS Contractor Robotic GPS GIS RT DGPS and PP DGPS Roads and mmGPS P N 7010 0492 1 1 Introduction Key Value 3220602745 Activation IDs TS Contractor Robotic GPS GIS Roads rimniGPS Figure 1 1 Security If upgrading existing TopSURV to TopSURV 7 2 a gt the updated security key is required to complete the installation of this upgrade For help in acquiring this security key contact topsurv_updates topcon com To run a demo
29. Forward Backward the distance from Point 2 to the projection of the target point along the Line of Sight Right Left the distance from the target point to the line of sight either to the Right or to the Left of the line Up Down the height difference from the target point either Up or Down e Store calculates the coordinates of the offset point and saves the point to the database e The Help Icon on the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey Help accesses the Help files e Settings opens the Survey Parameters screen See Survey Parameters on page 3 62 P N 7010 0492 9 11 GPS Survey Azimuth Distance Height The Azimuth Distance Height screen Figure 9 11 defines an offset point using the current point as a reference AA tere Settings Close p H vV gg 2201 3 200 10 3 Point 104 EG Code A iF 60 0000 dms Zenith Angle 90 0000 dms Horizontal Dist A ILT m Figure 9 11 Azimuth Distance Height Start Pt the starting point of the offset measurement e Point the name of the new point e Code the code of the new point either enter manually or select from the drop down list The icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen
30. The Measurement tab takes the measurements to known points Point the known point name select from either the map or from the list Code the known point code HR the height of the rod target Saves settings from the Occupation Pt screen Meas takes the sideshot to the point and displays the measurements of the point below the HR data Settings opens the Mode screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the following pop up menu items Edit Points opens the Points list see Points on page 6 2 Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen see Inverse on page 14 3 10 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Resection Notes opens the Note screen for to add notes to the measurement session if preferred PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes to Points PTL For details see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Remote Settings for Robotic mode only opens the Search Track Parameters screen see Staked Point Icon on page 3 47 Config Link only for the Robotic mode opens the Configure Link screen see Configure Link on page 13 7 Options opens the Resection Options screen see Resection Options on page 10 15 Help accesses the Help files The Data tab shows the current measurement data The Map tab shows all points in a graphic mode and allows selection
31. available if the Store As Check Point radio button is selected The OK button opens the Weighted Average screen see Weighted Average on page 6 14 e Correct Base if enabled the existing coordinates of the observed point are not replaced by the coordinates of the observed point Instead the known coordinates of this point are used to correct the Base coordinates After either closing the Topo screen or moving to another tab recomputations are performed and the coordinates of all points are updated using the new Base coordinates For the Correct Base option to work properly the coordinate type selected in Display see Customizing Data Display on page 3 89 must be the same as for the known coordinates of the observed Topo point 9 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Starting the Base Multi Base The Multi Base function in TopSURV is implemented using Time Division Multiple Access TDMA mode of transmission This means that one Base can transmit at the beginning of the second and another Base can transmit a half second later on the same frequency The Rover can recognize the two separate data streams All transmitters Base receivers must be configured am to transmit at the same frequency and must transmit CMR format corrections The Rover receiver must be configured to receive only CMR messages The Multi Base screen Figure 8 4 sets parameters for Base Stations e Base Station ID the ID of the current Base Station
32. e Curve Type selects the type of curve to add either Circular Arc or Parabola The plot in the bottom of the screen shows the element appearance Length Arc Radius the radius of the arc or the length of the parabola element depending on the type of curve selected End Grade Start Grade the percentage of the starting and ending grades of the element If the grade is falling use a negative value e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Vertical Alignment screen P N 7010 0492 7 23 Editing Roads Long Sections For Long Sections vertical alignment types Figure 7 22 the Start Pt tab displays only the vertical alignment name Start Pt Vert Alnt Name F Figure 7 22 Edit Vertical Alignment Name The Vert tab on the Edit Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 23 displays the list of vertical long sections the vertical alignment plot and the ending station or chainage at each element Peo van E Start pt ert LongSection 5 Long Sec O Long Sec O ae aia Figure 7 23 Edit Vertical Alignment ing Sections 7 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Vertical Alignments The long section list has the following columns Figure 7 23 on page 7 24 for vertical long sections e Long Section the name of the element e Station the station distance e Elevation the elevation value on the station e VC Length the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near th
33. e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking e Store opens the Store Point screen to store the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 e Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen e Close saves the changes and closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the same option as for the Line Offsets Three Point Curve amp Offsets To stakeout a Three Point Curve and Offset select the 3Pt Curve icon Figure 13 29 The 3 Pt Curve screen Figure 13 29 creates a curve by selecting three points PC point PT point and either any curve point or the RP point ASE Pt Curve Settings Close PC Point 10006 PT Point 10007 m PT Point 10003 me Num Subs lo Curve Small w _ Num Subs o 55 m o 00 000 SS m f 100 Loan Figure 13 29 Three Point Curve The screen displays changes depending on the first point chosen Enter either manually or select from the list or map the following sets of points P N 7010 0492 13 27 Staking out PC Point PT Point Curve Point the starting PC Point of Curvature and ending PT Point of Tangency points on the circle and a third point on the curve PC Point PT Point RP Point the starting PC Point of Curvature and ending PT Point of Tangency points on the circle and the center point also called as Radi
34. the azimuth from the PI point to the starting curve point e Az PI to PT the azimuth from the PI point to the ending curve point Radius Deg Curve Deg Chord Tangent the radius parameters of the curve e PC Point the name and the code for the calculated starting curve point e PT Point the name and the code for the calculated ending curve point e RP Point the name and the code for the calculated radius point e Calc calculates the parameters of the curve and the coordinates of the PC PT and RP points The Results tab Figure 14 31 on page 14 26 shows the results of the calculation P N 7010 0492 14 25 COGO Calculations kol PI amp Tangents Results mae Map EJ Save PC North East Eley EJ Save PT North East Eley EJ Save RP North Cart 10014 992 599 m 2123 882 m 0 000 m 10015 1299 851 m 1999 744 m 0 000 m 10016 1172 572 m J197 NIF m Save Figure 14 31 PI amp Tangents Results Tab lt Put a check mark next to the points you want to save then press the Save button The Map tab shows graphically the results of the calculation Kt PI Tangents Results Map Figure 14 32 PI amp Tangents Map Tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two options Edit Points see Points on page 6 2 and Help to access the help files 14 26 TopSURV Referenc
35. 23100 000 23200 000 23320 000 23600 000 23786 000 23982 080 24258 306 1005 121C 9250 000R P N 7010 0492 699 021C 0 000T 749 296C 10000 000R 785 687C 15000 000R 807 105C 25000 000R 815 960C 25000 000R 829 250C 22500 000R 878 500C 12750 000R 888 160C 14500 000R 894 966C 0 000R 906 790C 0 000T 911 900C 25000 000R 918 790C 10000 000R 4 975P 50000 000R 932 525C 20000 000R 947 100C 50000 000R 955 547C 25000 000R 961 800C 10000 000R 966 370C 22500 000R 972 200C 45000 000R 986 660C 100000 000R 5 OOOP 10000 000R 1002 100C 8250 000R A 28 File Formats 24693 967 991 888C 15000 000R 25903 863 985 839C 9894 424R 27440 115 997 484C 0 968F 28690 632 991 237C 1 995F ISPOL The ISPOL file format is a europe road format Example FIchero EJEI1 RAS FOrmato ispol V 7 04 29 Abr 2001 22 39 773 PRoyecto PRUEBAS PARA EJEMPLOS EJe 1 Eje con todas las clotoides Al final una de vert COmentario COmentario N Le ee EEA ER EA EOE SEES LORIE HERON YY ETOCS VERTICE TG ENTRADA TG SALIDA Pk Cota Pk Cota Pk Cota Pendiente K V 1 REISA EA EREE E AAN TEEI NA E E E E E EAE 19 4700 1070 9622 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 000000 0 0000 236 4537 1085 3733 146 4537 1080 3054 326 4537 1083 2497 5 631030 2252 6586 504 7339 1079 0432 452 9464 1080 2651 556 5214 1081 3971 2 359528 1500 0000 649 1019 1085 6054 649 1019 1085 6054 649 1019
36. Chord 2 000 m Tangent 752 849 m Degree 10 5447 dms External 392 821 m Degree 10 5547 dms Mid Ord 224 699 m 399 4634 T Segment 135793 1 1 NNN m 297 Coo Save Figure 14 28 Three Pt Curve Results Tab P N 7010 0492 14 23 COGO Calculations For a description of curve parameters see Calculating the Parameters of a Curve on page 14 19 e Save press to store the point being found The Map tab Figure 14 29 displays the results of the calculation graphically Ar three Pt Curve Ar three Pt Curve Close Results Map gt Results Map BE QNAN AJA INAN A e Figure 14 29 Three Pt Curve Map Tab PI amp Tangents To compute the the PC point the PT point and the center Radius Point of a Curve given the Point of Intersection PI the radius and the azimuths from the PI point to the PC and PT points respectively tap the PI amp Tangents icon The PI amp Tangents screen displays Figure 14 30 on page 14 25 The PI amp Tangents tab contains the initial data 14 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve Solutions KC PI amp Tangents Results Map PI Point f EAA Az PI To PC 91 000 dms Az PI To PT 45 00 dms amp aus T m E pc Point 10014 i va PT Point 10015 ES fii E RP Point 10016 am E Figure 14 30 PI amp Tangents e PI Point the Point of Intersection Can be manually entered or chosen from the map or from the list e Az PI to PC
37. Degree Not available Delta 57 1745 dms Tangent 10 926 m External 2 790 m Mid Ord 2 446 m Segment 31 706 m 2 n nnyrosace Figure 14 25 Curve Solution Results Tab The first three parameters display the radius and the length of the curve and the length of the chord connecting the PC and PT points Chord PC PT length If the Chord is defined then taking into account that Delta _ Chord se oe 5 R the Length can be calculated as Length R x Delta note that delta is the angle subtended at the center The Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length of 100 units DegreeCurvex nm _ 100 180 R where R 1s Radius 14 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve Solutions The Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve whose chord is 100 units long So 2 1 x ein Degree Chord XT 2 xR 180 where R is Radius Delta internal angle from center to tangent points PC RP PT Tangent the PI PT length where PI is the Point of Intersection If the Tangent is defined then taking into account that Delta _ Tangent an 2 2 R t where R is the Radius the Length is Length R x Delta Mid Ord mid ordinate the piece of PI RP section from the curve to the chord If the Mid Ord is known then assuming that Delta _ R MidOrd os _ _ 2 R
38. East the local coordinates of the intersection point cannot be changed for an existing point Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the radius of the corresponding curve or the parameter unambiguously defining the radius degree of chord or degree of curve See Add a Curve on page 7 12 LengthI Sp Const 1 Length2 Sp Const 2 the length of the corresponding spiral elements or the spirals constants The spiral constants are defined See Add a Spiral on page 7 13 e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Horizontal Alignment screen P N 7010 0492 7 15 Editing Roads Vertical Alignments To edit a vertical alignment tap the Vertical icon The Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 14 displays a list of the created vertical alignments and the map area to show the plot of the highlighted vertical alignment Figure 7 14 Vertical Alignment e Delete deletes the vertical alignment from the job e Edit opens the Edit Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 16 on page 7 18 to edit a vertical alignment highlighted in the list e Add opens the Add Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 15 on page 7 17 to add a new vertical alignment The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu of the Help item 7 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Vertical Alignments Add Vertical Alignments Tap the Add button on the Vertical Alignment screen Figure 7 15 The Add Vt Alnt screen selects a method of creating t
39. End slope 3f End of SE flag oc O End station number and End station offset are in fields 3 and 4 1 length of SE interval is in field 4 Hinge on center or edge c of road O center l edge Parabolic transition length 3f at start of SE Parabolic transition length 3f at end of SE Widening Right or Left Widening RW d 3f d 3f 3f 3f c or LW d 3f d 3f 3f 3f oc Start Station number d A 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats Start Station offset tf End Station number od End Station offset 3f Width at start of widening 3f Width at end of widening 3f End of widening flag oc O End station number and End station offset are in fields 3 and 4 1 length of widening interval is in field 4 MC Road MC road file has a file extension of RD3 and 1s a binary file LandXML Road LandXML is a standard data exchange format Refer to LandXML website for details http www landxml org schema landxml 1 0 Documentation LandXMLDoc htm TopSURV Road format v 2 0 TopSURV road format consists of three files 1 thl contains a horizontal alignment and must start with the START definition which includes the starting chainage and coordinates The elements are PT STRAIGHT ARC or SPIRAL The general format for each record is KEYWORD nnnn nnna nnnn where START chainage easting northing STRAIGHT bearing distance P N 7010 0492 A 27 File Formats ARC radius le
40. NEZ 1003 10288 979 9594 926 1192 965 SSB A 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data Formats NEZ 1004 9998 380 9593 835 1193 349 1 2 NEZ 1005 7698 778 12840 197 1209 085 5 8 NEZ 1 10029 789 10076 702 1199 442 TP NEZ 2 9756 259 10244 498 1199 587 TP Example for TS data INOTE Start Survey Date Time DT08 23 2005 TM02 40 28 INOTE End Survey Date Time DT08 24 2005 TM20 11 01 UNIT FOOT DMS HORIZ ANGLE RIGHT PRISM CONSTANT 0 PRISM OFFSET 0 EDM OFFSET 0 CR OFF TEMP 68 F PRESSURE 760 037 MM COLLIMATION OFF JOB OFFICE VERT ANGLE ZENITH NEZ 107 0 000 0 000 100 000 STN 107 0 000 NEZ 108 0 000 0 000 100 000 AZ 107 108 0 000000 BS 108 PRISM 0 000000 END AD VA 108 359 594000 00 000 51 580000 AZMK END Fl VA 102 61 310500 10 740 60 5 15000 F1 VA 103 35 332500 7 800 65 022000 F1 VA 104 359 583000 8 440 51 573500 AZ 107 102 61 312500 BS 102 PRISM 0 000000 END AD VA 102 61 323500 00 000 51 582000 AZMK END AZ 107 104 359 585000 BS 104 P N 7010 0492 A 45 File Formats PRISM 0 000000 END BS Circle Check angular err 0 000 BS Circle Check angular err 0 000 AD VA 104 61 323500 00 000 51 582000 AZMK END AZ 107 10001 359 585000 BS 10001 PRISM 0 000000 END AD VA 103 93 430000 00 000 77 232500 AZMK END F1 VA 106 86 192000 12 240 86 512500 Berlin GNSS This format is a German format that consists of two separate files of quality report GNSS Messprotokoll and GNSS Mittelwerte Scanning Data Fo
41. Note on page 9 4 Edit Points opens the Points screen See Points on page 6 2 Show Auto Topo Point option is selected in the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner of the Points screen To display points in the list of points ensure that the PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes its appearance to Auto Topo PTL For details see PTL Point on page 6 12 Auto Topo The Auto Topo tab contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey Figure 9 18 The upper right corner of the screen displays the status of information on the Status screen For details see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 e Point displays the current point name The icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code displays the current point code enter either manually or select from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears P N 7010 0492 9 19 GPS Survey Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point See On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see Note on page 9
42. Roads X Sect Templates Localization Scanning Data TINs Layers or Multiple e Format select the type of file being imported e Next opens the From lt name of Format gt screen to navigate to the directory where the file is located e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Follow up the export process with the help of the export wizard P N 7010 0492 5 13 Importing Data Points and Point Lists On the From File screen Figure 5 15 for Points and Point Lists data you can import the following formats Topcon Text Custom txt Topcon FC 4 fc4 Topcon FC 5 fc5 Topcon GTS 6 gts6 Topcon FC 6 GTS 7 pnt Topcon GTS 7 with strings txt Topcon GT pnt Topcon GT Finland gt MOSS GENIO mgn AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp TDS Coordinates cr5 LandXML xml NEZ txt NEZ with strings txt CMM cor MMH360 360 KOF kof MMH360_Z000 360 Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation V8 dgn SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo For Points or Point Lists data the From File screen has an additional option Point Type e Point Type selects a type of the imported points from the drop down list Design Points points used as targets for stakeout Control Points points with coordinates known from the catalog used for localization Topo Points points collected during a stationary survey
43. Survey Parameters e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used awe eA Pocu times EAE Occupation times in minutes Initialization time in minutes Num Sws Single Freg Dual Freq Num Sws Single Freg Dual Freg 4 4 3 T B G Figure 3 41 Initialization Occupation Times Survey Parameters The Survey Parameters screen Figure 3 42 on page 3 43 sets the parameters used by default during the survey These parameters can be changed with the help of the Settings button from any Survey screen in GPS mode Solution Type sets the solution type for each epoch Depending on the survey type chosen select either Fix mmGPS Fix Only Fix and Float mmGPS Fix and Float Fix Float DGPS DGPS DGPS Auto or All Fix mmGPS positions are computed by the RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from the Base receiver and mmGPS aided Rover receiver Integer ambiguities are fixed Fix positions are computed by the RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from Base and Rover receivers Integer ambiguities are fixed P N 7010 0492 3 41 Configuring a Job Float positions are computed by the RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from Base and Rover receivers Integer ambiguities however are NOT fixed use float estimates instead DGPS positions
44. TPS TopSURV EFiles Figure 4 29 Select Directory P N 7010 0492 4 25 Exporting Data TDS Coordinates If the TDS Coordinates format is selected the To File screen has the following additional option to export points TOS Coordinates crS Select Types Of The Points Use Filters Alphanumeric Points will be Bos 5005 Renumbered Starting at Figure 4 30 To TDS Coordinates e When selected the TDS Coordinate format demands points have only numerical names The screen displays a number at which TopSURV will start renaming points with alphanumeric names e Next with the help of the export wizard follow next screens to export points Lines For Lines data the export is allowed for the formats Topcon Text Custom txt AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp LandXML xml KOF kof Topcon 3D Linework n3 Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation V8 dgn MX GENIO txt SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo Code Library For Code Library data the export is allowed for the formats Topcon XML xml or DBF dbf Code Library is a set of codes with attributes used in the job Once created it can be saved as a file with xml or dbf file extensions 4 96 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Raw Data For Raw Data the following formats are available on the To File screen Figure 4 31 LandXML xml Topcon FC 5 fc5 Topcon GTS 6
45. e Station the station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the Rover 9 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Beacon Corrections from BR 1 check mark this box to enable the BR 1 receiver as a source of differential corrections for the rover If selected makes the Automatic Scan Mode available Figure 3 34 e Automatic Scan Mode when set to Automatic Scan mode a manual selection of the beacon station becomes not available The BR 1 automatically scans broadcasting frequencies to get the Beacon Signal and output RTCM corrections from the best signal e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Config BR 1 screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen All settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Ar ee EEM Finish FA confia EEM Finish Conty a v Station ACUSHNET MA _ Beacon Corrections from BRL Figure 3 34 Config Beacon Config BR1 The Config BRI screen Figure 3 35 on page 3 36 contains settings for the connection with the BR 1 e Connected to selects the device to which the BR1 is connected either Receiver or Controller e Port connected to BRI sets the parameters of the connection port e Back returns to the previous screen P N 7010 0492 9 95 Configuring a Job e Next opens the Survey Parameters screen In case of Controller connection the Config BR
46. lt icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code code for the offset point to be stored Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens a list of available attributes e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon and the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen display the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen HR sets the target height above the mark rod height P N 7010 0492 11 19 Total Station Survey e Line Pti obtains measurements to first point on a line e Line Pt2 obtains measurements to second point on a line e Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode After the lines are measured the Enter Distance Offsets screen displays to enter offsets see Figure 11 15 on page 11 15 e Forward Backward sets the distance between the current point and the projection of the offset point on the line of sight e Up Down sets the height of the point relatively to the current position e Right Left sets the distance between the offset point and its projection taking into consideration its location relative to the line of sight The Data Map and Offsets tabs are similar to that of the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement Plane and Corner The Measurement tab Figure 11 20 on the Pln amp Corner screen helps determine a point Corner using a plane defined with thr
47. spiral or at the beginning of the exiting spiral the radius of the intersection point is the radius of the corresponding curve Delete deletes the element from the road Edit opens a screen with properties of the selected element Insert inserts elements selected from a floating menu Line Curve Spiral or Intersection Point at the selected location in the list Add adds elements selected from the floating menu to the end of the list Line for more information see Add a Line on page 7 11 Curve for more information see Add a Curve on page 7 12 7 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment Spiral for more information see Add a Spiral on page 7 13 Intersection Point for more information see Intersection Point on page 7 14 Select a horizontal alignment element then tap the Station information under the element list to display the start and end stations or chainages information for the selected alignment element Figure 7 7 AS Ea OK Cancel Figure 7 7 Alignment Element Information Also the graphics interface can display information on the start and final positions of the selected element Double click in the plot area to open the greater Map screen for horizontal alignments Figure 7 8 on page 7 10 P N 7010 0492 7 9 Editing Roads AAAS Figure 7 8 Alignment Map Select the alignment element you want to display o
48. 0492 9 41 Setting up GPS e Sensor Gain sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitter s laser beam Init Time Improvement check mark this box to improve the RTK fix time for the receiver e Init Sensor starts the initialization process Field Calibration The Calibration screen Figure 8 48 selects the transmitter for field calibration Fa Calibration Set Transmitter to Field Calibration mode Transmitter Name 030021 v Figure 8 48 Calibration e Transmitter Name the name of the transmitter to calibrate e Next starts the process of auto leveling Figure 8 49 on page 8 43 8 42 TopSURV Reference Manual Initialize mmGPS Adjust the height of the Adjust the height of the Sensor if required Sensor if required t Move UP w Angle is OK 2 3847 dms 0 0651 dms Figure 8 49 Check Angle of Sensor e Next opens the Calibrate screen with instructions to follow Ta Calibration Close Face front of Transmitter towards Sensor and wait for auto leveling to complete Calibrate Figure 8 50 Calibrate e Calibrate press to collect calibration data after the auto leveling process completes Figure 8 50 P N 7010 0492 8 43 Setting up GPS Notes 9 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 9 GPS Survey To perform a survey with GPS receivers tap the Survey icon in the main menu The GPS Survey menu Figure 9 1 includes options to set up th
49. 1 8 H 2 201 Y 3 200 m Base Dist 23001 31 m Figure 8 12 Status Position Tab e Total number of available satellites The lock icon signifies the number of the satellites tracked the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination For mmGPS the Position tab displays a mmGPS icon This icon displays when the receiver calculates mmGPS heights e UTC the current UTC time The type of the position calculation method Autonomous Fixed Float Code Differential e WGSS4 the coordinates of the antenna Local m in the selected coordinate system this field changes its name based on the chosen value in the Coordinate System screen see Coordinate System on page 2 5 Display screen see Display on page 2 8 and the selected distance units see Units on page 2 6 e PDOP the PDOP value A factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates depends on the measurement errors PDOP is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty P N 7010 0492 9 13 Setting up GPS e H HRMS and V VRMS the RMS values of the horizontal and vertical coordinates for the last epoch of observation respectively e Base Dist slope distance to base antenna The field is empty if no differential corrections are received e Settings opens the Elevation Mask screen Figure 8 13 e Close closes the screen Elevation Mas
50. 1 Receiver Info displays first Figure 3 36 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen All settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Connected to Tontroller Port Connected to BR1 Port COM 1 Baud 28400 Data g Parity Mone Stop 1 Defaults Figure 3 35 Config BR 1 Virtual Radio Port sets the receiver port on which the receiver receives the RTCM messages from the controller This port on the receiver is used in addition to the receiver port that is connected to the controller Figure 3 36 Receiver Info Virtual Radio Port E_E Figure 3 36 BR 1 Virtual Radio Port 2 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey SBAS Setup The SBAS Setup screen Figure 3 37 selects satellites of a satellite based augmentation system WAAS EGNOS MSAS to use to improve accuracy of DGPS solutions To select satellites check the boxes near the PRN numbers of the satellites All satellites can be selected The most available satellite from the selected ones will be used in Code DGPS solution e PRN and Name the SBAS satellite s PRN number and name e GPS the GPS satellite s PRN number which is associated with the SBAS PRN number e Jono corr enable disable the use of ionospheric corrections from the SBAS satellite when computing positions None ionospheric corrections are not used Apply if avail use ionospheric correction
51. 10 2 Backsight Survey e Occ Point the name of the point where the total station is located opens the map for choosing the occupation point map icon The menu icon next to the Occ Point field 2 opens a pop up menu containing five items From List opens the list to choose the occupation point Station Offset opens the Station and Offset screen to add an arbitrary occupation point near a road Properties opens the Add Edit Point screen that displays the properties of the current point or you can create a new point if no point is selected yet Resection opens the Resection screen to determine the occupation point coordinates by solving the resection task 10 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Backsight Survey using the known point s coordinates for details see Resection on page 10 11 Elevation opens the Remote BM screen for details see Remote Benchmarks on page 10 16 shows battery status for the total station e shows the status of communication between the controller and the total station e ga shows battery and memory status for the controller kit HT sets the height of the instrument above or below the mark the HR value can be negative so points above the prism such as those on a bridge can be measured from below HR sets the height of the target above the mark BS Point BS Azimuth sets the backsight poin
52. 1085 6054 4 545471 0 0000 705 1867 1082 4506 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 5 625043 0 0000 F nde TIC HELO misih A 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats MX GENIO MX GENIO format is a GENeralized Input Output format that is used to import and export model information to and from Infrasoft s MX Professional MX is a roadway design CADD application that uses a string based modeling concept rather than a template based approach used by civil design applications developed by other vendors MX GENIO format can be used to import a wide variety of string types into MX including master alignment strings and geometry strings created from horizontal and vertical alignment definitions This is an example of a GENIO file that will create a 3D feature string in MX MOSS GENIO DESIGN 017 NORM 001FORMAT 3D23 17 003 ORDR 4 1 1 2 3 080 CECI 7 3 0 86278740486024506D 060 23557974062420847D 060 5 1777335 135235114D 03 0 86278725732131349D 060 23558072925923 1 13D 060 5 177803 10703 19832D 03 0 86278720921827410D 060 23558 17276845 1227D 060 5 1778404785966 120D 03 0 86278726103 175664D 060 2355827259241 1647D 060 5 1778561243843410D 03 0 86278741224405798D 060 2355837 1400396363D 060 5 1778605405621181D 03 0 8627876613443 1469D 060 23558468205 148648D 060 5 1778642232968866D 03 0 86279182182447857D 060 23559013383718926D 060 5 17875 11440594790D 03 0 86281114482140180D 060 2355965305 1477592D 060 5205 1708265943284D 03 0 8628113168449
53. 2 01 949 m 1 060 L m 150 014 m 6161615 301 m Figure 13 48 Stakeout TS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 49 reflects the relative position of CL and target The screen displays the current point name in the upper left corner of the screen and the parameters of the target FAstakeout Close heer Point 107 2 01 949 m 1 060 L m 95 637 M 10 097 m Figure 13 49 Stakeout Real Time Road e Store stores the current position as a point e Cur Pos measures the target 13 48 TopSURV Reference Manual Road Road To start the Road stakeout select the Road icon Figure 13 50 The Stakeout Road screen displays The Stk Road screen Figure 13 50 selects the road for stakeout and displays the plan of the chosen road The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the same pop up menu as the Line amp Offsets screen see Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 Road H Alnt HV Alnt the road horizontal alignment and horizontal vertical alignments to be staked out Can be entered manually or chosen from the list SS Start Stn the starting point of the stakeout the distance from the beginning of the road Antenna for GPS the antenna height AR for TS the rod target height Include Trans Point check mark and enable if the transition point should be included in spite of the station distance Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Param
54. 2 12 Job Info Job name SITE_1 Created by surveyor Number of 5 Points Points Order by Point Name Name First 100 Last 104 Figure 2 12 Job Information 2 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Viewing Job Information Job name the name of the job Created by the name or some other identifier of the surveyor Number of Points the amount of points stored in the job Points the names of the first point and the last point from the list of the points ordered by name Job size on disk the space that the job takes up on the disk Job created the time and date of job creation Job modified the time and date of job modification Survey Configurations the GPS and TS configurations set for the job Coordinate Systems Datum Geoid Model the coordinate system datum and geoid model defined for the job Units of Measurements the units set for the job Display Settings the customized interface settings for the job OAF expire on the date of OAF expiration for a given GPS receiver Tap Clk to expand under the date to display the Current Purchased and Leased status for all OAF options Figure 2 13 on page 2 14 P N 7010 0492 9 13 Working with a Job e Firmware version lists the number and build date of the firmware loaded into the GPS receiver 190206 190206 190206 190206 190206 190206 190206 ood 190206 190206 190206 ee ee PeePM he RPP Peo
55. 4 e Ant Ht sets the antenna height and its type slant or vertical i e Log Now immediately stores the current position of the receiver antenna When using mmGPS 4 the height of the rover antenna includes the height of the PZS 1 sensor with a 5 8 inch plug e Pause Resume interrupts the survey After pressing Pause the button changes to Resume Press again to resume the survey e Start Stop starts the survey process After pressing Start the button changes to Stop the Pause button activates Arme Studie Settings A Auto Topo Data Map il H v ge 100 2201 3 200 1043 Point 5114 E Code e w Ant Ht 2 000 Logging Pt Vertical Figure 9 19 Auto Topo Start A mmGPS icon displays on the status bar of the Auto Topo screen to calculate mmGPS heights for the receiver e Settings opens the Survey Parameters screen See Survey Parameters on page 3 41 9 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Auto Topo Survey Data The Data tab Figure 9 20 shows the properties of the last stored point the Point name and its coordinates Arme iE Settings t Auto Topo Data Map 7 DEMO _BASE 1 3116 G 3484 680 12777 919 87 892 Figure 9 20 Auto Topo Data Map The Map tab Figure 9 21 shows the stored points graphically All survey processes can be done through this page and the Auto Topo tab as all the controls are duplicated Faso roo ES Ke t Auto To
56. 6 31 Edit Layer Objects Edit Multiple Layers To turn on off the visibility of multiple layers at a time select the layers you want using the Ctrl or Shift buttons on the controller s keyboard and tap on the Layer Name column Figure 6 32 i Detault Has Objects Has Objects Empty Ctl ET a ESE Figure 6 32 Edit Multiple Layers The Status column shows the status of the layer 6 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Linework Linework Linework is a group of points connected with a line Points defined by the same code string combination automatically form a linework To edit a linework tap the Linework icon The Linework screen Figure 6 33 contains a list of existing Lineworks on the left side of the screen and the two windows on the right side that represent the view of the selected linework in the horizontal and vertical planes Figure 6 33 e Delete press to delete the Linework from the list e Edit opens the applicable Edit Line screen Figure 6 34 on page 6 28 e Add opens a blank Add Line screen to create a new linework The Linework can be created in four ways by either selecting the points with the desired codes and strings by tapping the points on the map or by selecting the points from the list Linework Figure 6 33 Linework e Close closes the screen without saving the settings To view the current selected linework in a larger map double tap one of the map plots The Help Ico
57. 7010 0492 14 57 COGO Calculations The Results tab Figure 14 69 shows the initial data and results of the calculation The Map tab shows the results graphically AS ce Calc Close Vs Traverse Calc Results Map F Save Tra 10007 North 496 379 m East 397 774 m Eley 98 173 m From Point 4 To Point 10007 Azimuth 45 0000 dms Bearing H45 0000 Hz Dista 15 000 m Vert Dis 0 500 m Save Figure 14 69 Traverse Calc Results Tab BS Point The BS Point screen Figure 14 70 enters the parameters for the Backsight Point or Backsight Azimuth Tap the BS Point BS Azimuth button to determine which parameters will display ASS Point oK Cancel s E Code an s Figure 14 70 BS Point 14 58 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 15 Viewing Map The Map Icon in the main menu opens a map on the main screen for the current job Ver Arg res a z A ENNIS Map Figure 15 1 Job Map The Map screen displays the plot of the current job the toolbar and the scale bar The Map maintains the scale after changing the status of the main map The Help Icon e opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 15 1 Viewing Map Toolbar The Toolbar of the Map screen contains icons of the viewing opt
58. 97 Sweden Denmark Dutch2004 Files or Norwegian Files P N 7010 0492 9 95 Configuring a Job displays the directory where the geoid file is stored in the controller Usually the geoid files are stored in the Geoids folder in the directory where the application was installed e Browse navigates to the geoid file previously downloaded to the controller Geoid forma Geoid 99 2003 wv Geoid Boundary T Lat 4 00 0 0 N Lon 95 59 59 0 W Lat 24 00 0 0 N Lon 77 00 0 0 w Figure 3 83 Geoid Parameters e Geoid Boundary displays the boundary of the geoid application after pressing the OK button Lat Lon the longitude and latitude of the point that sets the north west boundary of the geoid _ Lat Lon the longitude and latitude of the point that sets the south east boundary of the geoid e OK returns to the Geoid List screen Figure 3 82 on page 3 85 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 2 86 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Global Parameters for Job Setting Global Parameters for Job To set global parameters in TopSURY tap the Global icon The Global Settings screen Figure 3 84 on page 3 88 sets the mode for collecting data Use Bold Font if enabled creates bold fonts on the controller display Enable Job History 1f enabled saves the job history of every surveyor s operation on the job Data Entry select either codes or notes to
59. Age sec how much delay is seen between the marker of the last RTK message received from the Base and the epoch being solved at the Rover Receiver Memory the remaining memory of the receiver Receiver Power the current receiver power value Controller Memory the available memory in the controller Controller Power the current controller power value P N 7010 0492 9 15 Setting up GPS Log History For PP enabled RTK PP Kinematic and PP DGPS when file logging starts the Status screen Figure 8 15 also displays the Log History tab Settings Pos Sys Log Hist plots svs 12 49 44 13 19 44 hy Figure 8 15 Status Log History The Log History tab graphically displays the usage of satellites over time The field is divided into 5 minute portions along dotted lines with the starting time and each new hour marked Multi Base If the Rover receives CMR corrections from more than one Base an additional tab called Multi Base appears in the Status screen on the Rover side Muti Base mode is set in the Start Base screen Figure 8 4 on page 8 5 The Multi Base tab Figure 8 16 on page 8 17 displays a list of the Base Stations with their parameters age link quality type and so forth Check mark the desired Base to use its corrections baselines from one base at a time If the receiver switches base stations when recording data TopSURV warns the user z Currently TopSURV supports
60. Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate to operate or care for the Product Such employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential In the event you become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential Information you shall give TPS immediate notice so that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy WEBSITE OTHER STATEMENTS No statement contained at the TPS website or any other website or in any other advertisements or TPS literature or made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions including the Software License Agreement Disclaimer of Warranty and limitation of liability SAFETY Improper use of a Topcon Product can lead to injury to persons or property and or malfunction of the Product The Product should only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers P N 7010 0492 XVil Preface Users should review and heed the safety warnings in the manual accompanying the Product MISCELLANEOUS The above Terms and Conditions may be amended modified superseded or canceled at any time by TPS The above Terms and Conditions will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without reference to conflict of laws Manual Conventions This manual uses the following conventions Example File gt Exit Enter Notes Topo az xviii Explanation tap
61. Customizing Data Display cc eeeceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 89 SC HOUT EATIS e NR 3 90 Modi vine IWICTIUS co dcasc cases eaccartesdcaientoaiseadabeneeleticnabetaans 3 9 Chapter 4 Exporting Dalal siia 4 1 Expor oe Toa JOD E E teen e terres 4 2 Seeed tata tichata Mutat Saeed oacecaemeencesaanas 4 2 Export To the Joann 4 3 Select Point Types To Export ccccceceeeeees 4 4 select Points to EXport sscteleceancsavndcieeavecivel esses 4 5 SEEE COCE sot atateecs a 4 6 Select Point List to Export cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeees 4 7 Export Status ap a seaniecedacacceatdensevsarersatertneseaavtaess 4 8 IDtiplic ate ODJECIS lt avansnrnnaur a anda 4 9 EXPORUING tOo DEV E saratetete cea cceet clad hati a hae at aae nance 4 10 P N 7010 0492 iii Table of Contents NClCCUMS POLE piasisns te accushiamen i neteiasaeaaneuetaensumecets 4 10 Select Pile TOE PO enie 4 11 FX Ori TOs T a A 4 12 Points and Point LIStE eoio 4 13 Topcon Text Custom ienne 4 14 TexECUSOM REPOT siesti ea 4 20 Topcon Text Custom QC ssssssssonessssssssssseserssssss 4 22 AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD Drawing 4 22 ESRI SADC misskien a 4 24 TPS Coordinates seeren 4 26 Bib or E A EE A AOE A T 4 26 Code LIDI cebi 4 26 IAW DA eaaa a E a 4 27 HonzonalAlhenme N Sienan a 4 28 V GLCICAl AW ONMENIS siaren a E 4 29 A SECON SCLS etc secu E seateceaens 4 30 IO AGS 255 22 0s achat e e e Sates 4 30 A SechiOn Templates vss win ets maha ascetics 4 3
62. Data Selection screen displays to select desired data types Figure 5 29 On the Data selection screen Figure 5 29 select the specific data group from the file to be imported For LandXML as an example you can select Point Lists Lines Alignments Codes Surfaces X Sections and Parcels Ar te selection Cancel File contents Point Lists Lines Alignments Surfaces Sections Parcels Figure 5 29 Data Selection e Next if available opens the Select Data For Import screen Figure 5 30 on page 5 28 P N 7010 0492 5 27 Importing Data The Next button becomes active after selection of a data group from the file contents which needs further selection from the list Point Lists Alignments Surfaces and X Sections e Finish starts the import process This button is not available grayed out until the data not demanding further selection is chosen and the Next button becomes inactive e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings On the Select Data For Import screen Figure 5 30 select objects from the list to import Follow the Next button until the Finish button appears on the screen e Check check marks the highlighted entries e Uncheck deselects the highlighted entries in the list e Back returns to the previous screen e Next tap until the Finish button displays on screen e Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process e
63. EE Port traffic REQ ABOUT SMS SQTTTABRCSS e052 PSO1E 2 07 Rgn Eade a Figure 1 13 Logging to File e Append check mark this box to add new data to the existing file on every start of TopSURV Press the OK button to confirm the operation Switch Menus TopSURV has two implementations of menu interface the Icon Menu and the List Menu Use the Switch Menus option to toggle between the Icon and List Menu interfaces TopSURV defaults to the Icon Menu interface Figure 1 14 on page 1 12 P N 7010 0492 1 11 Introduction Figure 1 14 List Menu About To view basic information about TopSURV tap the About option The About TopSURYV screen Figure 1 15 displays the software name version copyright and build date About TopSURY Y TopsuRY Version 7 TOPCON Copyright C 2002 2007 Dec 21 2007 Figure 1 15 About TopSURV 1 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 2 Working with a Job To work with job files tap the Job icon in the main menu Figure 2 1 The Job folder contains the following options 1 New create a job 2 Open a job 3 Delete a job 4 Job Information Print information from an active job a Ar GS LOT Job et Job Info Open Job Delete Job Figure 2 1 Job Menu If the menu options you need are not visible tap Configure Menus icons and enable these options in the Config Menus screen ix The Help Icon a opens a pop up menu giving access to the Help fi
64. Figure 11 22 on page 11 24 Method sets the method of data collection either By Time By Horizontal Distance or By Slope Distance Interval the time interval for the data collection Press Finish to save the changes and return to the Auto Topo screen AS E Finish Cancel Meas Type HAsvajsD v EDM Mode Fine imm w Prism Constant fo mm Point Guide Prism w Auto Topo Method By Time v Inter al 1 00 sec Defaults l Figure 11 22 Mode Screen Auto Topo Settings The Data tab displays the data being surveyed The Map tab shows the surveyed data graphically and duplicates the controls from the Meas tab to perform the survey to work in map mode 11 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Cross Section Cross Section To perform a cross section survey of the selected road select the X Section icon The Cross Section screen displays The Cross Section screen contains station settings for a selected road where the cross section survey is to be performed Ao Section oK Cancel EF road k Code Eo o M Station 0 00 00 m Inter al 100 000 m Figure 11 23 Cross Section e Road select the road from the Roads list e Cl Code the code of the center line points manually enter a road or either select one from the drop down list a the Attributes List icon opens the list of available attributes for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The menu icon next to t
65. Float Track Figure 3 87 Alarms e Check pressing this button checks the status of selected situations for the instruments being used Figure 3 88 Controller Power Memory PS Power Memory Radio Link Figure 3 88 Checking Status 3 90 TopSURV Reference Manual Modifying Menus Modifying Menus Tap the Menus icon to modify the appearance of the menus Some rarely used functions are not displayed If the menu optioins you need are not visible available enable these options in the corresponding menu in the Config Menus screen Figure 3 89 The Config Menus screen displays a list of menus and submenus for each special submenu for the current job configuration Figure 3 89 e Menu shows the list of available menus e Sub Menu to Display shows the list of the selected menu items available for display Place a check mark next to the item you want to display in the menu a gt Menus To Controller From Job From Controller _ Use Icons Figure 3 89 Config Menu Options e OK press to save the settings made and return to the main screen e Use Icons check and enable this box to use the icon main menu instead of the list of names Figure 3 90 on page 3 92 This operation makes sense only when TopSURV is in the List menu mode For details on switching to the List Menu see Switch Menus on page 1 11 P N 7010 0492 93 91 Configuring a Job Sa t
66. Foresight P C Prism Constant select a backsight and foresight prism from the drop down list Prism Constant 1s the parameter of the prism characterizing the difference between the reflection plane and the center of the prism List Button opens the Edit Prisms screen to add a new prism or change a prism existing in the list Figure 3 65 on page 3 66 Point Guide check and enable to operate the tracking lights 9 64 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Prism Non Prism select the appropriate prism mode either Prism or Non Prism Enabled only if the Point Guide box is check marked e AutoTopo only for robotic total stations the parameters of the automatic survey Method select a method for taking auto measurements either by time or by horizontal or slope distance Interval enter the interval for taking auto measurements e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Stakeout Parameters screen Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Cancel close the screen without saving the settings FA survey Parms Cancel Meas Type HAfvafsD vi EDM Mode Fineimm i Backsight P C jo Offset v Foresight P C Jo Offset vif Point Guid Prism Auto Topo Method be Inter al 1 00 sec Figure 3 64 Survey Parameters Second Screen e The Help Icon in the up
67. HA 230 0600 V4 90 1053 5D 800 005 dms m Take measurements in any order Figure 11 17 Two LIne Intersection Measurement Tab e Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code code for the offset point to be stored Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the list of available attributes e The menu icons next to the Attributes List icon and the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen display the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen e HR sets the target height above the mark rod height e Line 1 Ptl and Line 1 Pt2 obtains measurements to determine the first and second points defining the first line e Line 2 Pt 1 and Line 2 Pt 2 obtains measurements to determine the first and second points defining the second line P N 7010 0492 11 17 Total Station Survey e Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode See the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement for other tabs Line and Corner The Meas tab Figure 11 18 on the Line amp Corner screen contains data for determination of a point on the corner using one line defined by two points D FA inez corner Settings Close 4 Meas Data Map Offsets point Gee EM Code m Oke fi HR 2 000 m HA 230 0600 V4 90 1053 5D 800 005
68. LINJAZ badge hl badge c10 c10 ELEMENTZ Tangents intersections informations point number sta z and radius between tangents With first and last the radius 0 ELEMZ number sta Z radius int f f f Example Horizontal Elements TIE VW9aito TIEVE h LIHJA mL 6101005 0 000 ELEH 1 oO 3 135 000 135 000 0 000 ELEMP1 1 0 000 6825003 0699 2497735 2184 ELEMP 2 1 1 073 6825003 8922 2497734 5289 ELEHCP 1 6625090 27157 24976358 327355 L253 4567S901254567E90 125 4567890123456 79012 34567 S902 4567S901 25 4567890125 Vertical Elements TIE oaita TIEVE h LIHJAS mL mL ELEM 1 270 0000 111 4300 0 000 ELEHMZ 2 47 0000 110 4000 400 000 ELEHZ 3 120 0000 112 4000 0 000 T234567S90 1254567890125 45607890123 45679012 34567 SS01lA Ss 4567890125 4567890125 P N 7010 0492 A 35 File Formats X sect Templates Formats Cross section is defined by templates Each template is stored in a file A template file consists of a series of segments and each segment has a horizontal and a vertical component The following sections describe the formats used in the import export of X section Template data SSS Template SSS Template format is as follows Template Record Template Name 0 Cut Fill Segment Record Template Name 1 Offset Height Code Example SIMP 0 6 000 6 000 SIMP 1 1 000 0 000 I NAME 0 4 000 4 000 NAME 1 1 000 0 250 EP NAME 1 0 000 0 150 1 NAME 1 0 500 0 000 2 NAME 1 0 200 1 000 3 NAME 1 0 300 0 000 4
69. Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 HR sets the target height above the mark rod height Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode Side and Center on the Take measurements in any order panel press Center then Side Take measurements to Center and obtain vertical angle and horizontal angle measurements a Side measurement then provides VA HA and distance measurements With these two sets of measurements the computation can be made for a point at the center of a tree for example when taking measurements a comment displays on the screen The Help Icon on the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing nine items Adv Advance opens the Backsight Survey screen for setting the next traverse point as the next occupation point The current occupation point becomes the next backsight point Edit Points opens the Points list Edit Raw opens the Raw TS screen see Edit Raw Data on page 6 38 Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen see Inverse on page 14 3 Intersection opens the Intersection COGO screen see Compute the Intersection Point on page 14 14 Note opens the Notes screen see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Display Coord if selected the coordinates of the previous point measured displays bel
70. Num Subs lo e ss m me 0 00 000 a Figure 13 19 Stakeout Line amp Offset For details on the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen see Points on page 13 2 13 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets Station amp Offsets The Sta amp Ofst screen Figure 13 20 contains the settings for the stakeout stations with offsets from the line Ar EENE Settings Close EF 0 10 000 Ee f eg Sta Interval 10 000 m A gt Ofke m e s HR in m Figure 13 20 Stakeout Station the station along the line being staked The two arrows to the right decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Sta Interval shown in the next line e E left right arrows decreases increases the distance by the station staking interval uses the right left arrow keys of the keyboard to increase or decrease the station Sta Interval the station staking interval Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line at the station shown in the Station field Up Down the Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the line at the station Antenna Ht for GPS mode sets the height of the antenna reference point ARP above the mark Also select either slant or vertical as the measurement type for the height AR for TS mode the height of the rod target P N 7010 0492 13 19 Staking out e Back returns to the prev
71. On the Settings screen Figure 5 23 on page 5 21 select desired drawing styles to represent points and lines Import block base points enable to import central points in blocks as points Load as background image enable to load data as background 5 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Load as background image Figure 5 23 Settings Screen TDS Coordinates If the TDS Coordinates format is selected the From File screen has the following additional option to import points TOS Coordinates cr5 Point Type Design Points wt Alphanumeric Points will be Renumbered Starting at p Figure 5 24 From TDS Coordinates e Alphanumeric Points will be Renumbered Starting at the TDS Coordinate format demands points have only numerical names The field displays a number at which TopSURV will start renaming points with alphanumeric names e Next follow next screens with the help of the export wizard P N 7010 0492 0 21 Importing Data e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Lines For Lines data you can import the following formats Topcon Text Custom txt AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp LandXML xml KOF kof Topcon 3D Linework lIn3 Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation V8 dgn MX GENIO txt SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo On the Edit Line screen Figure 5 25 TopSURV linework c
72. Screen TopSURV has two implementations of the graphical a gt user interface Icon based and List based By default TopSURV uses the Icon based interface for fast and easy program operation The title bar of the main menu screen shows the name of the job that is open and the following icons Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Title Bar Icons tson rr ee Ea Topcon Logo Help Icon opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files and some options specific to the current open screen ea Controller Power Status Icon shows power status Reconnect Icon reconnects other Bluetooth enabled devices to the controller w Connection Status Icon shows connection status Exit Icon closes TopSURV When in a submenu it turns into the button to return to the main menu 1 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Main Screen Within a menu option the title bar displays the Help Icon the name of the open screen and any system buttons e g OK Cancel Finish required for various operations Figure 1 4 on page 1 3 The TopSURV Icon Menu of the main screen contains the following icons to provide access to job configuration setup display and other jobsite functions and to control data Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Main Menu Icons Job opens a submenu to create open delete a job or get information about an active job For details on the options see Working with a Job on page 2 1 Configure opens a submenu to create
73. See On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The icon next to the Attributes List bitmap displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see Topo Survey on page 9 2 e Azimuth Az to Pt sets the azimuth to the target point by value or by point 9 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey Zenith Angle Elev Ang Vert Dist sets the zenith angle zenith distance to the target point or vertical distance Horizontal Dist sets the horizontal distance between the current and the target point e Store calculates and stores the point The next screen shows the parameters of the current point the PDOP value the Sigma values and the epochs logged counter The Help Icon on the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey Help accesses the Help files Settings opens the Survey Parameters screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 62 Laser Configuration Laser configuration depends on whether the laser selected in the job configuration has an Encoder or not For the Laser without an Encoder the Config Laser screen Figure 9 12 defines an o
74. Stk Slope screen displays The Stk Slope screen selects which slope should be staked out see Figure 13 54 on page 13 54 The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Line amp Offsets screen e Road H Alnt HV Alnt the road horizontal alignment horizontal vertical alignments to be staked out Can be entered manually or chosen from the list e SS Start Stn the starting point of the stakeout the distance from the beginning of the road e Antenna for GPS the antenna height e HR for TS the rod height e Include Trans Point check mark and enable if the transition point should be included in spite of the station distance e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 P N 7010 0492 13 53 Staking out va AS Slope Settings Close Slope E wi Ess p o0o 000 N DS m lioo m F Include a Point HR 0 000 000 m Figure 13 54 Stakeout Slope e Next opens another Stakeout Slope screen e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stakeout Parameters on page 3 66 e Close saves the settings and closes the screen This second Stk Slope screen Figure 13 54 displays the properties of the cross section at the stakeout station and helps to perform the stakeout of the catch point the point where the slope crosses the surface of the terrain and or the offset of the catch point
75. TDS X section Template The following sample template file describes a cross section in two segments Number of segments 2 Cut slope 0 500 Fill slope 1 000 First segment hd 22 000 ft slope 2 000 Second segment hd 2 000 ft vd 2 000 ft Example TH 2 0 500 1 000 A 36 TopSURV Reference Manual X sect Templates Formats TS 22 000 2 000 0 roadbed TS 2 000 2 000 1 ditch Definition of components in template file TH Template Header format TH d 3f 3f Number of segments d Slope cut 3f Slope fill 3f TS Template Segment format TS 3f 3f c s Segment length 3f Vertical dist or 3f Slope Vertical flag c 0 Slope is in field 2 1 Vertical dist is in field 2 Segment name Ps TopSurv Template TopSURV Template format is as follows Template Name Code Offset Height Example SIMP 1 1 000 0 000 NAME EP 1 000 0 250 NAME 1 0 000 0 150 NAME 2 0 500 0 000 NAME 3 0 200 1 000 NAME 4 0 300 0 000 P N 7010 0492 A 37 File Formats Localization Format GC3 This is a binary file containing localization data Roads Survey Formats The following sections describe the data formats used in the export of road raw data X Section Surveys The format is as follows chainage offset level code Example 0 000 4 501 18 527 0 000 3 500 18 553 0 000 0 000 18 658 CLO1 0 000 3 500 18 553 0 000 5 501 18 493 12 669 4 501 18 029 12 669 3 500 18 059
76. To lt Format gt screen to select a destination directory and the name of the created file e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 4 33 Exporting Data Layers For Layers data you can export the following formats Autodesk Layer States las Topcon 3D Linework In3 Multiple For Multiple data you can export the following formats Topcon Text Custom txt AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp LandXML xml KOF kof Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation V8 dgn SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo TopSURV only exports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG files TopSURV exports layers to DWG DXF files along with the appropriate data types The Next button on the To File screen opens the Data Selection screen Figure 4 39 on page 4 35 On the Data Selection screen Figure 4 39 on page 4 35 select a specific data group in the job available to export to a specified format For the LandXML as an example Points Lines Alignments Codes Surfaces X sections TS and GPS Raw Objects are available for selection 4 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Ar te selection Cancel Available data Points Lines Alignments Surfaces Sections z TS Raw Objects T GPS Raw Objects 1 Figure 4 39 Export Multiple Data e Next depending on the data selected for export opens different screens Points Selection for
77. Ts6 Job Files tsv type navigate to the desired tsv job highlight it and press OK g j J FAoren Job oK Cancel Type 56 Job Files tsy ie Job Open Job GJ 1 TPS TopSURY Jobs a Sroad ts Figure 1 5 Open Job Created in Previous Version of TopSURV e OK starts upgrading the job The progress bar shows the upgrading in progress e Cancel aborts upgrading of software When the process is complete the Cancel button turns into the Done button Figure 1 6 on page 1 5 e Done closes the screen and opens the upgraded job 1 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Opening Old Jobs Arm Upgrade Progress Upgrade Complete Figure 1 6 Job Upgrade Progression Bar After pressing the Done button the tsv file turns into the tsj file and the Archive folder is created in the directory where the tsv file was located This folder stores the tsv jobs Also if the job had job history a directory called by the same name as the job is created to store the xml file with the job history Figure 1 7 File Edit View Go gt f File Folder File Folder SS5KB TopSury Job Default ts 586KB TopSury Job Figure 1 7 Upgraded Jobs P N 7010 0492 1 5 Introduction Main Screen The TopSURV main screen consists of a title bar and a main menu Configure Import m e f Edit Job Edit Roads Setup GPS Survey Stake COGO Map Mode Figure 1 8 TopSURV Main
78. a new configuration e OK saves configuration settings and returns to the Survey Style screen FA configurations ok Cancel My RTE My Network RTE My Network DGPS My RT DGPS My PP Static My PP Kinematic My PP DGPS Figure 3 3 GPS Configurations P N 7010 0492 Configuring a Job Configuring the Survey The Srv screen Figure 3 4 on page 3 6 contains general settings for the configuration e Name the name of the configuration that is displayed in the Configurations screen Figure 3 3 on page 3 3 e Type the type of configuration select either RTK Network RTK Network DGPS Real Time DGPS PP Static PP Kinematic or PP DGPS PP means Post Processing RTK Real Time Kinematic implies first a pair of receivers operating simultaneously and secondly a radio link has been established between the two receivers From a functional point of view the two receivers differ from each other One of the receivers usually referred to as the Base Receiver is located at a fixed point with known coordinates The Base receiver collects carrier measurements generates RTK corrections and sends this data to the other receiver usually referred to as the Rover Receiver via a radio link To establish proper connection between the two receivers specify necessary communication parameters first The Rover processes this transmitted data with its own carrier phase observations to compute its relative
79. alignment see Figure 7 5 on page 7 6 e Close closes without saving settings The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up of the Help menu Edit the Horizontal Alignment The Edit Hz Alnt screen Figure 7 5 contains the features of the horizontal alignment The Start Point tab Figure 7 5 displays the starting point of the horizontal alignment parameters AS Ea OK Cancel Start Pt Hz Alnt Name ji HH Start Pt start a Ef Code as North 6178516 34 m East 15418 395 m Start Sta 0 00 000 m Figure 7 5 Edit Horizontal Alignment e Alnt Name the horizontal alignment name e Start Pt the start point name Do the following to enter the start point name either manually from the map icon or from the list icon The photo z icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter additional information for the point if preferred 7 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment e Code the point code Can be entered manually or selected from the drop down list The code of an existing point cannot be edited The Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the selected code The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the following list String toggles the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point see On the Se
80. and displays the result on the screen Store takes a measurement and opens the Store Point screen see Store Point on page 13 9 to store the current position as a point Turn L R the horizontal angle to the left right on which to turn the total station To TS the distance to move F CP cut fill computed from cut fill slope To CL distance away from the center line e Along CL distance along the center line Elev the fill with respect to the Hinge Point Ss advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station Close saves the changes and closes the screen P N 7010 0492 13 57 Staking out Linework To start a Linework stakeout select the Linework icon Figure 13 58 The Linework screen displays Figure 13 58 Select a desired code and string available for this code A Linework FA inework Settings Close EG Code mn yt livid HR 2 000 m Stakeout Figure 13 58 Limework e Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 e Close saves the changes and closes the screen GPS and TS stakeouts are performed in the same way as described in Point List on page 13 38 The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays a pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout 13 58 TopSURV Refere
81. are determined using only the pseudo range measurements or carrier phase pseudo ranges All positions are computed using all epochs accepted including autonomous solutions Auto autonomous positions when differential corrections are not available e The Auto Accept field sets the following parameters for automatic acceptance during a stationary survey Num Meas to Avg sets the number of measurements used for averaging as needed Precision m Hz sets Horizontal and Vertical precision values 1f taken into account If both the Precision and Num Meas To Avg boxes are checked both these conditions must be satisfied before the coordinates are accepted e The Auto Topo field sets the following parameters for kinematic surveys Method defines the method for measuring the interval between the received epochs by time by horizontal distance or by slope distance Interval sets the value of this interval e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen opens the pop up menu that contains two options Point Properties opens the Point Properties screen to define the point increment value for Survey points Figure 3 44 on page 3 44 Help accesses the Help files e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Stake Parameters screen 9 49 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Sett
82. azimuth of the satellite 8 20 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status SNR1 shows the L1 signal to noise ratio SNR2 shows the L2 signal to noise ratio L2C shows the L2C signal to noise ratio USED shows whether a satellite is used in position computation The user can select whether a satellite should be used or not by selecting the corresponding row for the satellite in the list and clicking on the USED column header This will toggle the use of the satellite e Back return to the sky plot view Figure 8 20 on page 8 20 e Close closes the screen Help icon Options The Help icon f in the upper left corner of the Status screen displays a pop up menu which varies depending on the configuration type used e Rover Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup Screen to set the antenna for the survey Config OmniSTAR available if OmniStar is configured opens the OmniSTAR screen to setup the OmniSTAR service see Configure OmniSTAR on page 8 22 Config Beacon available if Beacon is configured opens the Beacon screen to setup the Beacon service see Configure Beacon on page 8 24 Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen to setup the radio see Configure Radio on page 8 26 The option varies depending on the radio selected for the rover see Configure Radio on page 8 26 It can be Config Radio Config CDMA Config CDPD Config GSM or Config UHF Co
83. determines a point on the corner using one line defined by two points and a horizontal angle measurement Line amp Offset determines a point distant from a line defined by two points P N 7010 0492 11 9 Total Station Survey e Plane amp Corner determines a point Corner by a plane which is defined by three points and horizontal vertical angle measurements Horizontal Angle Offset The Measurement tab of the HorAng Ofst screen Figure 11 10 contains data for definition of a point using the horizontal angle from one point and the distance to another u of EES EI _ Meas Data Map Offsets pont Gee EM Code m Oe fi HR 2 000 m Take measurements in any order Figure 11 10 Horizontal Angle Offset Measurement Tab e Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code code for the offset point to be stored Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the list of available attributes for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The menu icon close to the Attributes List icon displays a pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 11 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo
84. displays stakeout results before the point is stored FAstore Pt Info oK Cancel 2 stk 2 7 854 1000 111 1699 930 95 637 0 111 0 037 7 8994 Figure 13 8 Store Point Information e Edit opens the Store Point screen Figure 13 9 to edit point properties e Next Pt selects the next point to stake Psoe rom CREE Point pA Code o M Hote 2 Local m North 1000 111 East 1699 930 Eley 95 637 Figure 13 9 Staked Point Information P N 7010 0492 13 9 Staking out The Point Info tab Figure 13 9 on page 13 9 on the Store Point screen contains the following fields e Point sets the name of the point e Code sets the code for the point either enter manually or select a code from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the code chosen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 e Note the name of the previous point e Cut Fill shows cut fill information for the point if displayed before the point is stored e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon opens the following options String toggles on the String field Also the 8 sign appears For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Layer opens the Select Layer screen to place the point For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Note opens the Note screen For details see The
85. does not require additional settings e Finish saves the change and returns to the Base Radio screen 9 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Ar E Radio Se Finish Cancel Base FIM Figure 3 12 Base Cell Phone Parameters For a Digital UHF Modem Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Internal HiPer Digital UHF TRL 2 and TRL 35 External Digital UHF the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 13 on page 3 16 e Protocol sets the following protocol for data transmission Simplex ArWest s proprietary protocol Only works with other ArWest Digital UHF radios TRMB works with Trimble Trim Talk and Trim Mark Radios PDL works with existing PDL radios and Hiper XTs set in PDL mode e Modulation selects a modulation type for the base radio modem select either DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keying if using the Simplex protocol or GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying if using Trimble or PDL e Back returns to the previous screen P N 7010 0492 9 15 Configuring a Job e Next opens the Rover Receiver screen if the selected modem type does not require additional settings 2 Fost oor Protocol Modulation DEPSK ad Figure 3 13 Parameters for Digital UHF Modems For UHF Modems the Internal HiPerXT UHF and Internal Map HP UHF the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 14 on page 3 17 e Protocol selects the protocol for
86. e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Geoid List Geoid is a physical reference surface Its shape reflects the distribution of mass inside the earth Geoid undulations are important for converting GPS derived ellipsoidal height differences to orthometric height differences 9 94 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters The Geoids List screen Figure 3 82 contains a list of active Geoids available for selection Remove deletes the geoid from the list Edit opens the Add Geoid screen Figure 3 83 on page 3 86 to change the geoid Add opens the Add Geoid screen Figure 3 83 on page 3 86 to add a geoid file to the list Install the geoid file on the controller prior to adding it to the list Some geoid files can be installed on the controller during TopSURV installation They are provided to the user with the TopSURV installation program as gff files OK the job refers to the selected geoid file when performing calculations Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings AS aw OK Cancel Full Path g2003u0 Storage Card TPS g Figure 3 82 Geoid List Add a Geoid File On the Add Geoid screen Figure 3 83 on page 3 86 select a Geoid file from the controller to view the boundaries of the geoid application e Geoid Format the format of the geoid either Geoid 99 2003 Australian Canadian 2000 Canadian 95 Geoid File Format Mexico
87. e Code displays the current point code either enter manually or select from the drop down list e selects attributes for the selected code e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon displays a pop up menu containing three items String switches on the String field The sign also appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Notes screen see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e HR the height of the rod target e Log Now immediately stores the current position e Start starts the survey process After pressing the button changes toggles to Stop Press again to stop the survey process e Qlock sends the Quicklock or Turn Around command which causes the total station to search for the RC 2 e Search make the instrument search for the prism e Lock lock onto the prism or track it 1 RC 2 is the Remote Control System 2 for optical communications For instructions of how to operate the RC 2 device consult the instruction manual for RC 2 P N 7010 0492 11 23 Total Station Survey Turn opens the Rotate screen which allows the total station to turn to various angles or points Stop causes the total station to stop tracking the prism and go into Standby mode Settings opens the Mode screen see Figure 11 2 on page 11 2 Press Next to access the Auto Topo settings
88. enter in the field during survey Code File sets a Global Data Dictionary file to use the file s codes and layers with the currently selected job Browse tap to select a file to use for the Code File above Code with Description if this box is check marked the drop down menu for Code selection check marks the displays descriptions along with code names to select during survey Allow Custom Control Code if this box is check marked TopSURV will not use it s linework package In this case the user can enter any string to mark it as a control code TopSURV will not interpret these control codes Allow Persistent Control Codes if this box is check marked the control codes will be persistent between recorded points and not cleared when surveying This option available only if the Allow Custom Control Code option 1s turned on above Control Code Delimiter when surveying if the selected mode is either Line or Area then this option selects a delimiter for entering control codes along with codes in a single field separated by the delimiter OK saves the changes and returns to the main screen Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 9 97 Configuring a Job PZ cioba Settings OK Cancel ar Use Bold Font Global _ Enable Job History Data Entry Codes Code File Code with Descriptio Allow Persistent Control Codes Control Code Delimiter Space we
89. existing cross section templates e OK saves the cross section in the list and returns to the Add Road screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing two items Edit X Sect Templates opens the X Sect Templates screen to edit cross section templates see Edit X Section Template on page 7 27 e Help accesses the Help files 7 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Calculate Road Points Calculate Road Points To calculate road points select the Calculate Road Points option from the Help pop up menu on the Edit Road screen Figure 7 3 on page 7 4 The Calculate Road Points screen Figure 7 31 generates points along to the right and to the left of the center line of the road along the entire length FA catculate ree ea Cancel Points to Generate Points Right of Centerline Points Left of CenterLine Include Transition Points Prefix Suttix None v Station Interval 100 000 m Figure 7 31 Calculate Road Points Points to Generate defines the points to generate either center line points the points to the right of the center line and or the points to the left of the center line Also if you want to include transition points place a check mark in the corresponding fields and select a prefix suffix for them if necessary in the Prefix Suffix field drop down list below the Points to Generate section Station Interval Chainage Interv
90. from the map Aj icon WGSS amp 4 the coordinates of the point in the current coordinate system Use the Configure gt Coord System and Display icons selection to change the system and the name of the field Its contents also change Ant Ht the height of the antenna reference point ARP above the mark and the type of height measurement vertical or slant Initialize sends the information to the Rover receiver The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Known Point Init screen displays the pop up menu containing four items Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 P N 7010 0492 9 33 Setting up GPS Rover Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup Screen to set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen see Configure Radio on page 8 26 The option varies depending on the radio selected for the rover see Configure Radio on page 8 26 It can be Config Radio Config CDMA Config CDPD Config GSM or Config UHF Help accesses the Help files Initialize mmGPS To setup mmGPS system for RTK surveying tap the Init mmGPS icon The Init mmGPS screen contains information about the calibration of the laser transmitter and initialization of the sensor Figure 8 39 on page 8 35 The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing three items e Field Calibration opens
91. geodesic display system is selected or not When Grid or Ground is the selected display system the results tab lists the following parameters Figure 14 5 P jT wo Point Inverse P Inverse Results Map From Point 3 To Point 4 Azimuth 270 2007 HDist 912 823 m dNorth 5 343 m dEast 912 807 m dHeight 5 527 m Grade Sl 0 61 Slope di 912 839 m Figure 14 5 Two Point Inverse Results in Non Geodesic Display System e Azimuth or Bearing to the second point from the first point e HDist Horizontal Distance VDist Vertical distance from one point to another Horiz The sign means that the height of the second point is lower than the height of the first point Vert P N 7010 0492 14 5 COGO Calculations dNorth the increment of the North coordinate dEast the increment of the East coordinate dHeight the increment of the height Grade Slope the increment of the height in percent Slope distance the computed distance between two points When selecting a geodesic display system the following parameters display Figure 14 6 Forward Azimuth the forward geodesic azimuth Backward Azimuth the backward geodesic azimuth Geodesic Dist the shortest distance between two points on an ellipsoid Ground Dist From the horizontal distance on the geodetic horizon plane at the height of the From Point Ground Dist To the horizontal distance on the ge
92. have already been staked out e Reverse Order check mark and enable to stakeout points from the last point in the list to the first 13 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Point List Ar Point oK Cancel Point List Pointlist1 Show Remaining Points Show Staked Points Reverse Order Figure 13 40 Select Point Digital Level Stakeout DL Stakeout of point lists can be accessed from the main menu or the top left menu icon in the Level Run screen for details see Level Run on page 12 2 The level Stake Point List screen Figure 13 41 on page 13 42 selects a list of design points to determine the elevation and compute a cut fill value at every point on the list e BS Point the backsight point for the stake measurement either enter manually or select from the map or list e Point List the point list point to stake either enter manually or select from the list The point list is displayed in the tab and in the plot e Reverse Order stakes in reverse order of the point list e BS if not already measured takes a backsight measurement before staking e Stakeout opens the level Stakeout screen for every point of the list see Figure 13 13 on page 13 13 P N 7010 0492 13 41 Staking out f espoint 3 Point List List of Points b 1100000 m F Reverse Order Bs stakeout 7 Figure 13 41 DL Stake Point List DL Stakeout of Elevations The DL Stakeout of elevat
93. if enabled automatically scales the horizontal position plot to fit into the screen Satellites The SVs tab of the Status screen Figure 8 19 displays the graphical position of the satellites on the sky FAstatus Settings Pos S s Plots S s N v Show GLNS Figure 8 19 Status SVs Plot e Show GPS shows hides the GPS satellites images e Show GLNS shows hides the GLONASS satellite images GLONASS satellites are marked with a sign The absence of wings on the satellite image a gt means that for some reason the signal from this satellite is not used in the positioning for example below elevation cutoff P N 7010 0492 9 19 Setting up GPS e SNR toggles the appearance of the screen to a table displaying the signal to noise ratio of each of the satellites Figure 8 20 FAstatus Settings Pos S s Plots S s SNR LI L2 dB Hz 4 511121314172023 4 amp Vv Show Gps v Show GLNS ES Figure 8 20 Status SVs SNR e List toggles to the table Figure 8 21 that displays the satellite parameters FAstatus Settings Pos S s Plots S 5 PRN a HU EL AZ SNF 1 56 68 bi 320 12 196 4 238 62 amp y Show GLNS Figure 8 21 Status SVs List PRN shows the number of the satellite H U shows whether signal is healthy or unhealthy EL shows the elevation angle of the satellite AZ shows the
94. je lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 11 33 Select Orientation Point amp switches on off the arrow keys on the keypad to adjust the crosshair position When the Arrow button is enabled the arrow keys on the keypad can move the crosshair up down left or right attempts to move the crosshair to the center of a circular object on the image First tap somewhere inside the circular object The object should be a well defined circle with high contrast between the inside and outside of the circle e The drop down list in the bottom left corner of the screen next to the Meas button contains two options to view the image Figure 11 34 on page 11 36 Tele telescope the default zoomed in view of the crosshair Wide View zooms out and shows the area of the image which contains the orientation point P N 7010 0492 11 35 Total Station Survey aay wide Select or meas Orient Pt Meas e lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 11 34 Select Orientation Point Wide View e Meas measures the orientation point The bitmap menu options Meas From Map From List are used to take a measurement or to select an existing point from a map or list Figure 11 35 opens the Orientation Res screen Figure 11 35 on page 11 36 to delete the selected orientation points MAX dX 2 5 d 0 5 GOOD RMS dX 2 5 dY 0 4 BAD Figure 11 35 Delete Orientation Points e Next when fo
95. of a point for measurement and performing measurements Figure 10 13 FAresection i Settings b Meas Data Map Set 1 j occpt Zz NEUES Figure 10 13 Resection 3D Map Tab For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 The Set tab displays the result of the sideshots being done Figure 10 14 on page 10 14 P N 7010 0492 10 13 Setting up TS Survey FAresection i Settings 4 Meas Data Map Set 0 0001 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Gd N 0 0007 Sd E 0 0009 Sd H 0 0044 Re Meas Accept Ground to Grid scale Remove 0 9999985 Use Ctrl Figure 10 14 Resection Meas Set Tab Sd N Sd E Sd H displays Standard deviations for North East and Height respectively Ground to Grid scale displays the calculated scale factor Accept opens the Store Point screen Figure 10 15 on page 10 15 to save the new point Re Meas replaces the current measurement with a new measurement Remove deletes the selected measurement Use Ctrl toggles through specific measurements in the resection for example the horizontal angle but not the vertical or vice versa The used measurements are listed in the Use column For example HVSD indicates that the Horizontal angle Vertical angle and the Slope Distance were used Store Point The Store Point screen Figure 10 15 on page 10 15 saves the resection point in the job
96. one The Longitudes are positive for the Eastern direction and negative for the Western direction relative to the GMT line 6 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Background Images Side Shot Meas Data Rod Ht 0 9779 m Distance 17 510 m W Offset 0 0000 m Figure 6 46 Edit DL Raw Data Measurements Tab Background Images To edit background images in the current job tap the Images icon Any raster image with a TIF JPG or BMP extension is supported To be positioned correctly under all observed data on the map screen the images must have geo referenced data GeoTIFF images already include geo referenced data while the others use a separate file that references the geographic location of the image This file is called a World File The World File contains information about the size of the corresponding image and the coordinates of the geo reference point the upper left corner of the image in the coordinate system of the job The World File must have the same filename extension associated with the image format TFW JGW or BPW and should be located in the same directory as the image file P N 7010 0492 6 41 Editing Job Data The Background Images screen Figure 6 47 displays a list of available image files Initially the list is empty Ar en ey OK Cancel iG TESTGEO m Figure 6 47 Select Image to Open e Properties opens the Properties screen for the highlighted file e Delete delete
97. opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code the code of the point select from the list or enter manually Also the attributes can be selected with the help of the Attributes List icon 8 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Starting Static Occupation e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the list of additional features String Layer and Note For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e Ant Ht the antenna height and type of measurement vertical or Slant Ar CEN errata Settings Close att i aa Point code fo O wm Ant Ht 1 000 m Slant aa Duration 0 00 00 Start Occ Figure 8 6 Static Occupation e Duration displays the time passed since the starting of the occupation e Start Occ Stop Occ starts the survey in static occupation mode When pressed it changes to Stop Occ The icon displays the status of the log file If the file is opened the icon changes to f e Settings opens the Base Receiver screen to set logging parameters For details see Base Receiver on page 3 7 The Help icon at the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing the following items depending on the survey type and configuration chosen e Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 e Base Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey He
98. opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen see Configure Radio on page 8 26 Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 13 2 PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes its appearance to Stakeout Point PTL For details see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Inverse opens the Two Point Inverse COGO task screen For details see Inverse on page 14 3 Help accesses the Help files For Total Station stakeouts the Help Icon in the upper left corner of stakeout screen displays a pop up menu with the following options BS Setup opens the BS Setup screen see Backsight Survey on page 10 2 Config Link for Robotic mode only opens the Configure Link screen see Configure Link on page 13 7 Remote Control for Robotic mode only opens the Remote Control screen see Remote Control on page 10 18 Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes its appearance to Stakeout Point PTL For details see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Inverse opens the Two Point Inverse COGO task screen For details see Inverse on page 14 3 Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 13 3 Staking out GPS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 3 ass
99. page 3 52 In the Contractor Module only My Conventional and My Reflectorless are available FA survey Style oK Cancel Select the Configuration for the Job or create a New Configuration GPS Config Name Default aa TS Config name emma Figure 3 51 Survey Style opens the Configurations screen for editing parameters for the configurations e OK sets the selected configuration for the current job and returns to the main screen The Configurations screen shows the list of available configurations e Delete deletes the configuration e Edit changes the configuration settings e Add adds a new configuration e OK returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 51 on page 3 51 P N 7010 0492 9 51 Configuring a Job FA configurations oK My Conventional My Reflectorless My Robotic My Level Figure 3 52 TS Configurations If the Contractor Module is selected in the TS mode see Observation Mode on page 16 1 only Conventional Reflectorless and Default TS configurations are available for use by non surveyors doing construction stakeout with total stations Configuring the Survey The Survey screen selects a survey type Figure 3 53 on page 3 53 e Name the name of the configuration that is displayed in the Configurations screen e Type the type of the Configuration either Conventional Reflectorless Robotic or Level e Next op
100. point name in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the direction and the values of the distances to the target 13 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Point in Direction Close ied H v gt gt 103 2 201 3 200 Point 105 ik Hz Dist Left 16 286 m Back 160 384 m Fill 3 000 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 015 m Azimuth 185 4753 dms Figure 13 37 Point in Direction Stakeout e Store performs the measurement and opens the Store Point screen to store the current position as a point e Close saves the changes and closes the screen TS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 38 on page 13 38 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current point name in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and current position the necessary direction and the values of the distances to the target P N 7010 0492 13 37 Staking out Hz Dist 5 270 m Dsan Sp 72 3227 dms Left 1 639 m Towards TS 5 009 m Fill 5 000 m Turn Left 0 3733 dms Figure 13 38 Point in Direction Stakeout EDM sets the distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking gt toggles between the scheme and the map of the layout of the target and of the current position Store opens the Store Point screen to store the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made a
101. pool Type Text Mum Chars 255 Default Figure 6 27 Text Attribute 6 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Edit Layers Edit Layers To edit layers tap the Layers icon The Layers screen Figure 6 28 displays the list of all existing layers in the current job and the layer status of each EIE gt ea ms a Figure 6 28 Select Layer Layer Name a list of Layers Each layer has an icon to show whether the layer is unhidden or hidden gall To turn on off the visibility of the selected Layer tap on the Layer Name column header Status shows whether the layer is empty or contains objects moves the highlighted layer up or down Delete deletes the highlighted layer Edit opens the applicable Edit Layer screen to display the properties of the highlighted layer Figure 6 29 on page 6 24 Insert opens the Add Layer screen to insert a new layer below the selected layer Add opens the Add Layer screen to add a new layer Close closes the screen without saving the changes P N 7010 0492 6 23 Editing Job Data The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu of the Help item View Objects on the Layer The Edit Layer screen Figure 6 29 is similar to the Add Layer screen but has the additional Objects tab to view objects on the layer Layer Name The Layer tab contains general settings You can edit the following to set new parameters for t
102. port is selected for data output Ar e em ok Cancel P N 7010 0492 Log To Type Format File Name Configuring the Survey E Raw Data w FC 6 GTS 7 w Storage Card TP m Figure 3 55 Monitor Option File Selected Log To sets whether the data is output to a File COM port COM2 port Bluetooth Bluetooth2 or None Output Type currently sets only the Raw data to output Output Format sets the format in which to output the data FC 5 FC 6 GTS 7 or GTS 6 File Name sets the file name a browses for the destination of the file and sets the default file extension Comm Settings sets the communication parameters for the port Figure 3 56 on page 3 56 OK saves the settings and returns to the Instrument screen Figure 3 54 on page 3 53 Configuring a Job ww FC 6f GTS ka comm Settings Baud 115200 Parity None Data 8 Stop 1 Figure 3 56 Monitor Options COM1 Port selected Connection Mode On the Conn Mode screen Figure 3 57 on page 3 57 select the connection mode to manage communication between the Total Station and the data controller Initial TS Connection selects a communication course between the total station and the data controller depending on the optional device used Depending upon the type of the instrument select one of the following optional devices Cable for connection using the RS 232 cable Radios for radi
103. position with centimeter accuracy A mmGPS aided RTK survey uses the usual RTK GPS survey system but with a wireless PZS 1 sensor at the Rover to pick up the signal from the PZL 1 transmitter for millimeter accurate elevations Network RTK Network Real Time Kinematic implies that the Rover uses RTK correction data received from operating reference station networks to compute its position Real Time DGPS Real Time Differential GPS implies that the Rover uses differential pseudorange correction data transmitted from DGPS services Network DGPS Network Differential GPS implies the usage of pseudorange corrections received from operating differential GPS reference station networks TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey PP Static Static Post Processing implies two receivers that collect data at stationary locations during a long period of time In the office the software operator processes the GPS data collected in the field usually differential processing and calculates the relative position of the receivers Differential processing takes place when data from two or more receivers are processed together in order to compute the receivers relative position If the coordinates of one receiver are known then the coordinates of the other can be calculated PP Kinematic Kinematic Post Processing implies two receivers One is fixed the other is moving along some traject
104. set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen see Configure Radio on page 8 26 mmGPS Options if mmGPS is used opens the mmGPS Options screen see mmGPS Options on page 8 32 Auto Advance Sta if check marked enabled after storing a staked point automatically opens the Stakeout screen for the next point Design Offsets opens the Design Elevation screen allowing you to change the design point elevation height road offsets and DTM offsets identical to Design Offsets on page 13 8 Store Design Pt Layer opens the Design Pt Layer screen to select options to store the points see Store Design Pt Layer on page 13 7 Display Coords select this option to display coordinates instead of directions Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 Inverse opens the Two Point Inverse COGO task screen For details see Inverse on page 14 3 Help accesses the Help files TS Stakeout The Stakeout screen reflects the status of the stakeout On the Stake out screen Figure 13 4 on page 13 6 shows the current point name in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the direction and the values of the distances to the target display e gt opens the map of the target layout and the current position e EDM select the distance measurement
105. stations that support Auto Tracking and Auto Aiming mode Table 3 3 Motorized Total Stations GTS 800 810 900 Motorized AP L1 Motorized and Auto Tracking GTS 800A 8 10A 820A 900A AP L1A Motorized and Auto Tracking Motorized and Auto Tracking Aiming GRI 2000 Motorized and Auto GPT 8000 Motorized Tracking GPT 8000A 8200A Motorized and GMT 100 Motorized Auto Tracking Aiming e Enable Motor Turning sets the motor to active mode if enabled e Auto Tracking if motor turning is enabled sets the motorized total station into remote control or a fully automatic mode of operation Select one of the following modes of auto tracking Auto Tracking causes the total station to track the reflector as the surveyor moves from point to point P N 7010 0492 3 59 Configuring a Job Auto Tracking Auto Aiming causes the instrument to find the prism in a pre defined region No Aiming No Tracking disables the total station operation program e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Search Track screen Figure 3 61 on page 3 61 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Ea Fos oor Auto Tracking No Aiming No Tracking w Figure 3 60 Mode Search Track The Search Track screen Figure 3 61 on page 3 61 contains parameters for signa
106. tap the Level Run icon The Level Run screen Figure 12 2 creates a new level run Figure 12 2 New Level Run e Name sets a name for the new level run e Note adds optional information on the level run e Next opens the screen to make leveling measurements see Figure 12 3 on page 12 3 12 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Level Run DL Level Run The DL tab on the Level Run lt run name gt screen Figure 12 3 displays all leveling data in progress and contains tools to conduct leveling DL Data Figure 12 3 DL Level Run ES sets the point for rod reading select from either the map or the list of points e sets the code for the measured point The icon next to the field opens the Code Attributes screen to set a new code For details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 BS usually sighting back along the leveling line the Level takes a rod reading on a point of known elevation e SS the Level takes a sideshot to the point FS the Level takes a rod reading on a point of unknown elevation The fieldbook displays the following information Pt Name point name and icon displaying point type Icons can be e backsight point sideshot point a foresight point closure P N 7010 0492 12 3 Digital Level Survey Code the code of the point BS arod reading taken on the backsight point HT the height of the level
107. the code attribute e Required enable to always use the default value with the code attribute e OK saves the changes closes the screen and returns to the Code Attributes screen 6 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Codes For Integer type the attribute value is an integer Enter the minimum and maximum values of the attribute Figure 6 24 P Attributes oK Cancel Attrib Mame height Type Integer Min wal Max Val Default Required Figure 6 24 Integer Attribute For Menu type the attribute value is selected only from a list of available values Figure 6 25 P Attributes OK Cancel Attrib Name count Type Menu state Xx Sort List Default state Required Figure 6 25 Menu Attribute e Add adds admissible values entered in the Add entry field e Sort List enable to arrange the list in alphabetical order Delete X deletes the selected entry from the menu P N 7010 0492 6 21 Editing Job Data For Real Number type the attribute value is a real number Enter the minimum and maximum values of the attribute Figure 6 26 P Attributes OK Cancel Attrib Name width Type Real Number Min Val 5 51 Max Val 9 15 Default Figure 6 26 Real Number Attribute For Text type the attribute value is an alpha numeric string Enter the number of characters available for the text value Figure 6 27 P Attributes oK Cancel Attrib Mame path near
108. the correct operation of the application the E gt sides of the polygon should not cross each other that is the polygon should be simple and convex To start the Hinge task select the Hinge icon The Known Area Hinge screen displays Figure 14 40 on page 14 32 P N 7010 0492 14 31 COGO Calculations Ar aa Area Hinge ES Area Results Map Hinge Point List PointListl1 List of Poir 4 lt 3 bo 1 eal Figure 14 40 Hinge Area Tab 1 The Area tab contains the initial data of the Hinge task e Point List the Point List name either enter manually or from the Point List drop down box m closes the plot of the polygon Only the list of points is available e List of Points the list of currently selected vertices of the polygon e Up and down arrows move the highlighted point up and down to change the order of the points switches the keyboard arrow keys on off duplicates the arrows on the screen e Next opens the second screen of the Area tab Figure 14 41 on page 14 33 14 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Area FArnown Area Hinge Area Results Map Total 746323 7 Reqd Area 250000 Rotation 3 we Direction CounterCle v fe Pt froin EM code i ez Figure 14 41 Known Area Hinge Area Tab 2 Total Area the calculated area of a polygon formed with the currently selected points of the point list Reqd Area the requeste
109. the filename e Name the name of the selected file from which you want to import points P N 7010 0492 Importing Data e OK approves the selection and opens the Text File Format screen Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P From Text Type Text Files txt BJ TPS TopSURV EFiles Mame points txt Figure 5 17 Import From Format The Text File Format screen Figure 5 18 on page 5 17 imports a file of arbitrary text format Delimiter sets the separator symbol between data in the import file either a space a comma tabs or other select from the list Header in First Row enable 1f the text file has a header File Style sets the order of fields in the selected file Delete deletes the selected file format Edit Format changes the selected file format with the help of the same Custom Style screen see Figure 5 19 on page 5 17 Add Format creates a new file format with the help of the Custom Style screen Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Coordinate System screen see Figure 5 20 on page 5 18 Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process see Import Status on page 5 8 Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 5 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Ar iext File Sud Finish Cancel Delimiter Space Tabs Other w _ Header
110. the list of pre defined modem types contents will vary depending upon the job configuration selected e Receiver Port Connected to Radio contains parameters for the connection port i e Port Parity Data Baud Stop which are specific to the connected modem For example Siemens cell phones need a 19200 baud rate Internal GR 3 FH915 Internal HiPer Lite and Internal HiPer Lite FH9I5 modems require a 57600 baud rate e Defaults returns all the values in the Receiver Port Connected to Radio fields to the default value e Back returns to the previous screen P N 7010 0492 3 11 Configuring a Job e Next opens the Base Radio screen to set parameters for the chosen modem Figure 3 10 and Figure 3 11 on page 3 13 AirLink GPRS AirLink CDMA AirLink CDPD CDMA2000 Generic Sierra Wireless MP200 CDPD Internal HiPer Pro radios do not require additional settings e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 All settings are transmitted only when using the configuration e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Radio Modem Internal HiPer Lite a Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port Baud 36400 Data prt Comnected to a seo F Parity None Stop 4 Defaults Figure 3 10 Base Radio Parameters If Multiple Ports are set for peripherals Figure 3 5 on page 3 6 several Base Radio screens display to co
111. the measurement screens which are the corresponding GPS measurement screens For details see Tape Dimension on page 11 29 and Topo Survey on page 9 2 P N 7010 0492 9 23 GPS Survey Notes 9 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 10 Setting Up TS Survey To set up a TS survey tap the Setup icon in the main menu when in TS mode The Setup menu Figure 10 1 includes options to 1 Start a backsight survey Backsight 2 Calculate a resection task Resection 3 Calculate a point s elevation from remote benchmarks Remote BM 4 Remote Control for Robotic mode ia resect E A g ii Setup Resection Remote Br Remote Ctrl Figure 10 1 Setup GPS Menu The Help Icon gaa opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 10 1 Setting up TS Survey Backsight Survey To set up a Total Station survey with localization tap the Backsight icon The BS Survey screen Figure 10 2 displays On the BS Survey screen Figure 10 2 the BS Setup tab contains the following Backsight parameters Paps suvey Ee BS Setup Data Map EI occ Point foce joge j 200 m 1 350 m E BS Azimuth BS Azimuth BS Azimuth o 0000 9 BS Circle 0 0000 F Measure dist to BS d Turn To BS F Fixed HR at BS Figure
112. the plane perpendicular to the center line called a cross section The alignment can be divided into sections each described with the help of algebraic functions The horizontal alignment can be described through lines spirals arcs and intersection points Intersection point is defined as the intersection of the two lines tangential to the Iincoming and exiting spirals or to the central curve at the PC and PT points if spirals are not specified The vertical alignment can be described through vertical grades and parabolas or long sections The cross section can be described using templates see The next X Sect Temp screen Figure 7 26 displays the parameters of the highlighted template to edit on page 7 27 for details To edit a road as a whole tap the Roads icon The Roads screen Figure 7 2 displays a list of the created roads and plots of the horizontal and vertical alignments for each road peee eat aaa Figure 7 2 Select Road The left side of the screen displays the list of created roads The right side displays the corresponding alignment plots 7 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads e Delete deletes the road from the job e Edit opens the Edit Road screen Figure 7 3 on page 7 4 displaying the parameters of the selected road e Add opens the Add Road screen blank parameter fields to set a new road The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu co
113. the point being edited for example e Topo or Auto Topo for GPS data Figure 6 43 on page 6 39 BS and Side Shot for Total Station data e Side Shot for Digital Level data 6 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data AA CAEDE OK Cancel Topo Data Point Ea Code o M Ant Ht 2 000 m vert Ant Type HiPer Lite Lite ki Mote mo Figure 6 43 Edit Raw Data The Data tab Figure 6 44 displays information on measurements e Vector components for GPS data Figure 6 44 e Angle and distance measurements for Total Station data e Horizontal distance rod height and vertical offset for Digital Level data Topo Data HA 000 m ertical Topo 1371 526 m 88 353 m 1 708 m Local Time 2007 11 01 01 1 Figure 6 44 Edit Raw Data Data Tab P N 7010 0492 6 39 Editing Job Data For the Base Station the Edit button displays the Base coordinates on the PC Coords screen Figure 6 45 Ari Coords WG564 m Lat oo 424945090 Lon 37 43 1844289 Ell ht 171 930 F Relative cal Figure 6 45 Base Station Coordinates Relative cal enable to use relative parameters at the base with CMR data transmission if necessary Fas In addition the Edit Raw Data screen Figure 6 46 on page 6 41 for DL measurements contains a Measurements tab to adjust vertical offsets The Latitudes are considered to be positive in the Northern Hemisphere and negative in the Southern
114. the pop up menu containing three items P N 7010 0492 11 27 Total Station Survey String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen HR sets the target height above the mark rod height BS Setup opens the Backsight Survey screen to set the backsight point The information displayed is the same as has been entered PStn computes the result of the point station CStn computes the result of the current station takes the sideshot to the point and stores the point to the data set Meas computes the result and takes the sideshot to the point The result is reflected on the Results tab Figure 11 25 on page 11 27 Settings opens the Mode screen to set the sideshot mode The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing six items Edit Points opens the Points list Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen Notes opens the Notes screen PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Display Coord if selected the coordinates of the previous point measured displays below the HR data see Figure 11 4 on page 11 4 Help accesses the Help files The Result tab shows the results of the computation The Map tab shows all points in a graphic mode and duplicates the button contr
115. the screen e Next opens another 2D Transform screen with the transformation parameters calculated Figure 14 64 The second 2D Transform screen displays the transformation parameters which will be applied to the set of points needing transformation Ar E Transform close Origin Position North 1249 990 1349 947 483 100 843 571 Scale Factor 1 061255801 Rotation 33 121951 Select Points From To EA LE A 2 points selected Figure 14 64 2D Transformation Parameters e Select points select the points to convert using one of the following methods From To press to display the By Range screen For a description of the By Range screen see Select Points by Range on page 14 47 Select points for transform from the map or the list using the icons to the right Tap the Layer icon to transform all points on a layer selected in the Layers screen Once the set of desired points is specified the number of points selected will display on the 2D Transform screen e Back returns to the previous screen 14 5 TopSURV Reference Manual Adjusting Points e Calc performs the two dimensional transform and displays a successful message e Close returns to the 2D Transform screen Point Pair Info The Point Pair Info screen Figure 14 65 selects the pairs of points or coordinates to obtain transformation parameters Ar E Pair Info oK Ar Pair Info E Fromet f
116. the selected area P N 7010 0492 6 31 Editing Job Data Points in Area The Points in Area tab displays a list of existing points Area Name in the selected Area on the left side of the screen Figure 6 37 and the general view of the area lines on the right side The point highlighted in the list of points will be marked with a yellow circle The Point Info button displays information on the selected point To view the current selected area on a large map tap on the map plot Points in Area Layer Style Area Name wow A rea 9 D List of Point Point Info Sel Pts g Figure 6 37 Edit Points in Area Edit a Layer Style On the Edit Area screen tap the Layer Style tab to edit a style and color to display the points lines and area in the selected Area on the map Figure 6 38 on page 6 33 e Layer selects the layer for the line from the drop down list e The List icon opens the Layers screen to edit layers For details on editing layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 e Point Style selects the color and the symbol for the Point Color opens the Select Color screen see On the Select Color on page 6 11 to choose the fill color for the point e Line Style selects color style and thickness for Line e Area Style selects fill color fill style and transparency for Area 6 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Lists ca Edit Area OK cancel Points in Area Layer Style Laye
117. the starting point of the arc PT Point Tangent Azi the azimuth of the Tangent of the curve arc at the PC point Radius Deg Curve Deg Chord the radius parameters of the curve Num Subs check and enable to designate the number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line For instance a value of 3 indicates a calculation of four points by subdividing the line into three equal segments Turn the direction of turn relative to the PC Point SS the starting station chainage of the line Next opens the Station and Offsets screen see Station amp Offsets on page 13 19 Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 P N 7010 0492 13 29 Staking out The Help Icon in the upper left hand corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Lin amp Ofst screen see Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 GPS and TS stakeouts are performed in the same way as described in Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 Spiral amp Offset To stakeout Spirals amp Offset select the Spiral icon Figure 13 31 On the Spiral amp Ofst screen Figure 13 31 you can stake points at specified Horizontal and Vertical offsets with respect to a specified spiral Ar TEG Settings close TS Point fi Tangent Azi 50 0000 dms A ss o 00 000 m Turn EE TS Tosc vi Tost w 50 m Next gt gt Next gt gt Figure 13 31 Stakeout Spiral amp Offset
118. to close the area Ar Settings Cancel AERE Draw Scan Area then press Next Figure 11 38 Select Scan Area e Next press to begin the scan when the areas are set the Interval screen Figure 11 39 on page 11 39 opens first to set the scanning settings e Clear erases all drawn areas Settings opens the Mode screen for a description of parameters on this screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 62 This is the same screen that opens if you press the Settings button in the Observation and Occ BS Setup screens The main objective is to set the instrument to Non Prism mode which is required for 11 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning scanning and also to change the measurement mode Fine or Coarse Interval The Interval screen Figure 11 39 sets the starting point and the horizontal and vertical intervals for scanning Cancel Start Pt pti Start Pt pti Scan Mode Fine v Scan Mode Fine v Meas Mode Normal NP aa Meas Mode Normal NP v Interval Angie v Interval Num Points HA 0 3000 dms Num H YA 0 3000 dms Hum Figure 11 39 Scanning Interval e Start Pt enter a name for starting point the scanned points e Scan Mode select the scanning mode either Fine or Coarse e Meas Mode select the measuring mode Normal NP normal Non Prism measurements Long NP long distance Non Prism measurements 200 300 meters away only availa
119. to the Background Images screen Figure 6 47 on page 6 42 with the file added to the list To use a file once it is added make sure the file is selected in the list i To map a Background Image correctly the image it s geo reference point should be in the job s ans current coordinate system or at least in a very similar one for example in a corresponding UTM zone 6 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Sessions Sessions To create or edit GPS sessions of the automatic survey for post processing tap the Sessions icon The Sessions Figure 6 50 screen displays Sessions ar FAsessions oK Cancel i Sessions Type Start Da Static Sun Static Tue Edit i Receivers Figure 6 50 Sessions Sessions on this panel enter an ID name survey type the day and time the survey began and the day time and date the survey ended Edit press to edit the existing session The Session Setup screen opens Figure 6 51 on page 6 46 Add press to create a new session The Session Setup screen opens Figure 6 51 on page 6 46 Receivers on this panel is the list of the available receivers and their session plans To hide display the session plans of the receiver tap on the sign located near the receiver name Add press to add a receiver The Receiver Name screen displays press to put a session to the session plan of the receiver On the Sessions screen highlight the pr
120. txt v GJ 7TPS TopSURVEFiles comm log txt Name pte Figure 4 16 Select the File e Type specifies the file extension file type e Name the name of the created file e OK opens the Text File Format screen e Cancel returns to the main screen P N 7010 0492 Exporting Data On Text File Format screen Figure 4 17 select a desired text format Peet Fie Form REN EET Delimiter Space Tabs Other w _ Header in First Row File Style Name N Lat E Lon Elev Codes Figure 4 17 Text File Format Delimiter enables the delimiting symbol between the data in the exported file either space comma tabs or Other delimiter selected from the list e Header in First Row enable to output a header in the file e File Style selects the order of fields in the exported file e Delete deletes an existing file format e Edit Format edits an existing file format The Custom Style screen displays Figure 4 18 on page 4 17 e Add Format adds a new file format The Custom Style screen Figure 4 18 on page 4 17 displays e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Coordinate System screen Figure 4 19 on page 4 18 e Finish press to start the export process Figure 4 21 on page 4 19 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 4 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File On the Custom Style scree
121. version of TopSURV tap OK a confirmation message displays Figure 1 2 Tap OK to confirm using TopSURV in the Demo Mode Pjetur lt Defaul A z x Security not enabled for GPS Mode The controller will run in Demo Mode with limited functionality View Map Switch Mode Figure 1 2 Run Demo Mode 1 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Open Job Open Job Initially TopSURV opens only a Default job created upon program installation Figure 1 3 On the Open Job screen do the following Created 09 30 2007 22 33 Modified 09 30 2007 22133 1 TPS TopSURY Y Jobs Figure 1 3 Open Job e Open press to create the Default current job and returns to the main screen e New press to create a new job e Exit press to quit the program e Browse press to display browse directories to open a job from a remote directory Highlight the file and press OK Figure 1 4 FAoren Job OK Cancel Type Job Files tsj aa GJ Storage Card TPS 7 EGEERS Name Sroad tsj Figure 1 4 Open a New Job P N 7010 0492 1 3 Introduction Opening Old Jobs Starting from Version 7 TopSURV job files are made universal to be compatible on both controllers and personal computers They have the tsj extension and need no conversion e To open a job created in a previous version of TopSURV tap Job Open Job then tap the Browse button in the Open Job screen Figure 1 3 on page 1 3 Then select the
122. 0 0000 dms 0 000 m Figure 10 3 Backsight Data The two fields at the top of the page display the height of the instrument and the azimuth respectively The Map tab Figure 10 4 shows all points in a graphic mode For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 RRRA Figure 10 4 Backsight Map P N 7010 0492 10 5 Setting up TS Survey Multi Point Backsight To access the Multi Pnt BS screen Figure 10 5 press the menu icon next to the Map icon in the BS Point field and select the Multiple BS item Multiple backsight points can generate more precise measurements On the Meas tab edit the following parameters Prdv rn os ESTES EN Meas Data Map Set Point 103 jO Zs EG Code fi HR 1 500 m Measure Foresight Direct Figure 10 5 Multi Point BS Point the known point name Can be selected from the map or from the list e Code the known point code e HR the height of the rod target e Measure Foresight Direct press the Meas button to take the sideshot of the point Settings opens the Mode screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 e The Help Icon on the upper left corner of the Multi Pnt BS screen displays a pop up menu containing six items Edit Points opens the Points list see Points on page 6 2 Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen see Inverse on page 14 3 10 6 TopSURV Refer
123. 0 0492 13 31 Staking out Digital Terrain Model Stakeout To start the DTM Digital Terrain Model stakeout select the DTM icon The DTM Stk screen displays Figure 13 32 settings cose der gt Use Alignment Create TIN Cut Fill v HR 2 000 m Stakeout Figure 13 32 DTM Stakeout DTM the name of the TN3 file which is stored on disk Ant Ht and m for GPS stakeout the antenna height and method of height measurement Use Alignment check mark and enable to report stations and offsets Create TIN check mark and enable to generate a TIN TN3 file cut sheet model HR for TS stakeout the height of reflector Stakeout opens the Initial Point Name screen see Initial Point Name on page 13 21 and then the Stakeout screen by pressing OK Close closes the screen without any settings being made 13 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Digital Terrain Model Stakeout Open DTM On the Open DTM screen Figure 13 33 select a surface file to open FAoren DTM oK Cancel Current File SUF DTM List Created 11 24 2007 00 02 Modified 11 24 2007 00 02 ig 1 TPS TopSurRv DTM Figure 13 33 Open DTM e Current File displays the file that is currently open DTM List lists all surface files in the DTM directory on the controller e Browse searches for the file on disk e Open opens the selected file in the DTM Stk screen Figure 13 32 on p
124. 003 1 500 BLDG 01 SD 0 0000 84 4650 9 747 SS 1004 1 500 BLDG 01 CTL CL SD 359 1740 84 4650 9 747 SS 1005 1 500 NS SD 359 1740 84 4650 9 747 P N 7010 0492 A 41 File Formats SS 1006 1 500 NS SD 359 1740 84 4650 9 747 FS 2 1 500 NS SD 179 1740 84 4650 9 747 STN 2 1 500 STN GTS 600 v3 1 JOB TEST2 SET COLLECTION NAME FRED INST GTS 7 UNITS M D STN 1 1 500 STN XYZ 1000 000 1000 000 100 000 BKB 2 315 0000 0 0000 BS 2 1 500 HV 344 0620 86 3810 FS 101 1 500 STN SD 325 3420 88 4750 5 275 FS 102 1 500 STN SD 7 0610 85 2210 9 914 FS 103 1 500 STN SD 36 1350 87 3800 9 755 FS 104 1 500 STN SD 83 4730 84 0410 3 313 FS 104 1 500 STN SD 263 4820 275 5530 3 313 FS 103 1 500 STN SD 216 1430 272 2150 9 755 FS 102 1 500 STN SD 187 0650 274 3730 9 916 FS 101 1 500 STN SD 145 3520 271 1510 5 27 A 4 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data Formats BS 2 1 500 HV 164 0640 273 2340 Land XML LandXML is a standard data exchange format Refer to LandXML Website for details http www landxml org schema landxml 1 0 Documentation LandXMLDoc htm TDS RawData Example JB NMA_meas DT03 15 02 TM15 17 53 MO AD0 UN1 SF1 000000 ECO EO0 0000 SP PN1 N 90 0000 E 200 0000 EL 50 0000 man OC OP1 N 90 0000 E 200 0000 EL 50 0000 man LS HI1 0100 HRO 0000 user has entered the following Azimuth BK OP1 BP2 BS0 0000 BC65 4618 SS OP1 FP2 AR65 4618 ZE102 0935 SD4 7720 DOOR LS HI1 0100 HR2 5600 SS OP1 FP3 AR61 1834 Z
125. 1 OC AZ ATION sro isn setae eieueaeenenes 4 32 scanning Data ieoi a tater 4 32 Roads SUL VC aiciasae sk achseck sat duh assets dton sane ee aa 4 32 JODES COTY soren a a heat nat antvenues 4 32 TIA DA a a ee tae att 4 33 Kaye serioen e ET E uancenehcebenes 4 34 MAP e aa a T ean re 4 34 EXpOrine OPS Session sincronia ais 4 37 Chapter 5 Importing Data a nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 1 liiporime Froni JOD asra 5 2 Select 4 JOD oreca neces 5 2 Inport Prom Ne JOD a seiccesthe Sossmententete tos ctal Soa E 5 3 Select Point Types To Import c eee 5 4 Select Points to Import ce eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 WOE erison E abo uaone 5 6 Select Point List to Import cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 TinpOrt Stas ai teen eae ate ae 5 8 Duplicate Objects eie tratetedeeeiecenes 5 9 iv TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents iiportine Prony Device usiag cota tenstaaes a tecekl suse a 5 10 DCICCHIN POL sarera a a tutes 5 11 Pile TPO Directory repre besaasteancaseoties 5 12 lmiportins Prony a Fie senise e a s 5 13 Points and Point Lists euena 5 14 Topcon Text COSTON sroin a 5 15 AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD Drawing 5 19 EDS COOrdimates aE O 5 21 DAMES aceasta Nida de Dien es nears eeaie roles ce 5 22 Code LIDIA sere 5 22 Horizontal Alignments ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 23 Vertical Alignments cccccccceecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 5 23 k SCCUION
126. 1 21 Total Station Survey Auto Topo This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and collects points by Time and Distance To open the Auto Topo screen Figure 11 22 select the Auto Topo icon in the Robotic mode Edno roo serena cose Meas Data ma jose Point Alen E Code pm aa m fi HR 0 000 Log Now Start Figure 11 21 Auto Topo The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing nine items e Edit Points opens the Points list e Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen e Notes opens the Notes screen e PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Mode on page 11 6 e Remote settings opens the Search Track Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 e Config Link opens the Configure Link screen see Configure Link on page 13 7 e BS Setup opens the Backsight Survey screen see Backsight Survey on page 10 2 11 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Auto Topo e Display Coord if selected the coordinates of the previous point measured displays below the HR data see Figure 11 4 on page 11 4 e Help accesses the Help files The Measurement tab on the Auto Topo screen Figure 11 21 on page 11 22 contains the initial data for the survey e Point displays the current point name The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point
127. 10 0492 13 15 Staking out e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Line screen For details on the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen see Points on page 13 2 TS Stakeout The Stake Point screen Figure 13 17 displays the stakeout process displaying the current point name in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the direction and the values of the distances to the target Passeron E jogs Point Left of Line 1 916 m Away From TS 1 993 m Dist Along Line 0 573 m Fill 0 000 m Turn Right 73 2100 dms Figure 13 17 Stake Point E toggles between the scheme and the map of the target layout and the current position e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking e Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen Store takes a measurement and opens the Store Point screen to store the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 Close returns to the Line screen Figure 13 15 on page 13 14 For details on the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen see Points on page 13 2 13 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets Offsets To stake Line Intersection Curve 3 Pt Curves or Spiral with Offsets tap the Offsets icon Intersection SPt Curve Figure 13 18 Offsets Menu Line amp Offsets To st
128. 12 669 0 000 18 164 CLO1 12 669 3 500 18 059 12 669 5 501 17 999 Find Station Report The format is as follows FindChainageReport Reference road FindChainage PointName Chainage Offset North East Elev Cut A 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data Formats Raw Data Formats The following sections describe the formats used in the export of raw data FC 5 Refer to the FC 5 interface manual to confirm details on FC 5 data format Example _ SAMPLE_ SOMEONE_ GX0021_ 06 01 95_ 24C_ amp 990HP_ X1000_ _ 1 200_ A001_ a 2755858d_ b0881003d c 00010942m_ NSOO1_ 1 200_ A002_ a 0006 3265752d_ b0952330d c 00003366m_ NSOO1_ 1 200_ A003_ a 0420820d_ b0894549d c 00006913m_ NSOO1_ 1 200_ 1002 GTS 6 The data is GTS 6 and FC 5 unformatted data Refer to the GTS 6 interface manual to confirm details Example _ SAMPLE_ SOMEONE_ GX0021_ 06 01 95_ 24C_ amp 990HP_ X1000_ _ 1 200_ A001_ 2 00010942m088 1003 2755858d 00010936 4 O54 NSOO1_ 0064 1 200_ A002_ 2 00003366m0952330 3265752d 0000335 1 4063 NSOO1_ 1 200_ A003_ 000069 13m0894549 0420820d 000069 12 4 1039 055_ NSOO1_ 1 200_ 2037 P N 7010 0492 A 39 File Formats FC 6 GTS 7 The format of the GTS 7 data is the same as the FC 6 data format The general format of each record is as follows CONTROL WORD field1 fieldn Where CONTROL WORD 1s terminated by a space Fields 1 to n 1 are terminated by commas Field n is terminated by th
129. 15 5 Map Options Most TopSURV functions can be performed on the Map opened in a TopSURV task for example see Figure 15 6 for a Topo survey Depending upon the task the appearance of the view changes Mostly the controls located on the main task page are duplicated There are also some controls that are independent of the function being performed These controls correspond to the viewing options and customized display options Ed QA I Topo Data Map SEAR e po a Figure 15 6 Topo Map P N 7010 0492 15 5 Viewing Map Notes 15 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 16 Switching Instruments The Mode Icon sets the instrument mode for surveying The Observation Mode screen displays Figure 16 1 Observation Mode On the Observation Mode screen select the instrument type and wireless control options Te Seo oer Select Instrument Type Mode Contractor _ Bluetooth come Figure 16 1 GPS Observation Mode e Select Instrument Type sets the operation mode for surveying select either GPS or Total Station If Total Station mode is selected you can choose Contractor mode a scaled down version of the existing Total Station mode e Bluetooth the option for remote wireless control on short distances Only available if a Bluetooth device is available The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the Help option to access the help files P N 7010 0492 16 1 Sw
130. 1527D 060 235596584 16659472D 060 52054181820995780D 03 0 862815918054191 16D 060 23559801922184543D 060 52113322369797083D 03 0 8628 1609007772699D 060 23559807287367 1 19D 060 52115270941608628D 03 0 8628 170616893 1420D 060 23559837590624942D 060 52 1262233005645 16D 03 0 0O0O000000000000000D 000 00000000000000000D 000 52 1262233005645 16D 03 999 A detailed explanation of each of the lines in this file follow MOSS MX files begin with this line to clear any previous errors GENIO DESIGN P N 7010 0492 A 31 File Formats Begin the GENIO option Include the model name that the string s will be created in 017 NORM This command changes the Angular Input format for the file 017 NORM will use the system default format for MX which is typically radians Other alternatives for this are DEGR Decimal Degrees DMS Degrees Minutes Seconds in the format D23 17 RADI Radians GRAD Grads QUAD Quads To specify angles in one of these other formats substitute the appropriate Keyword for NORM 001FORMAT 3D23 17 Formats The INPUT Information in the Data Block The format is described by a number of field descriptors separated by commas and is contained within parentheses A field descriptor in a format specification has the form r Cwl d where r represents a repeat count which specifies the field descriptor is to be applied for r successive fields The default is 1 if omitted C is a format code I Inte
131. 2 f E Azimuth _ 50 0000 dms COGO Point 10009 I Figure 14 17 Intersection e Point I the first point either enter manually or select from the map or the list e Azimuth Distance Az to Pt rotates through selections Azimuth sets the azimuth from the first point to the unknown point Distance sets the distance between the first point to the unknown point Az to Pt sets another known point to which the direction will be calculated and input as azimuth e Point 2 the second point either enter manually or select from the map or the list 14 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Compute the Intersection Point e COGO Point enter the name and code for the resulting point of the calculation The code can be selected from the menu or entered manually Also the Attributes can be selected through the Attribute List bitmap Note that the Code String field remembers and displays the last user saved code string e Calc starts the calculation process i The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items To edit angles azimuths distances and so forth use the entry fields to add subtract angle and linear values directly or by using the Calculator e Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 e Help accesses the help files The Results tab shows the results of the calculation Figure 14 1
132. 260 299 8770 100 126 1 670 03 101 45 300 3350 299 6791 200 345 1 670 03 101 45 100 3206 100 3215 200 256 1 670 03 100 45 1247 100 1234 100 139 1 670 09 39 03 2 7002 110 0000 101 3955 50 002 1 350 03 3 7002 125 3600 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 4 7002 136 2300 100 2500 48 369 1 350 09 91 035 7002 148 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 6 7002 150 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 7 7002 158 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 8 7002 168 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 9 7002 170 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 03 10 7002 180 0000 100 2500 48 369 1 350 09 99 00 Then a couple of coordinates P N 7010 0492 File Formats 05 100 1000 134721 459 9867 343 21 633 05 101 1000 134741 349 9881 834 21 514 00 And some GNSS vectors 42 Bauta 2210658 5530 618726 6390 5930812 0680 1 341 43 D1 4 5619 230 4119 47 0982 2 054 44 1 4314 0 6481 4 5640 1 0000 0 4382 0 8757 1 0000 0 4811 1 0000 42 Bauta 2210658 5530 618726 6390 5930812 0680 1 341 43 D2 0 6466 176 7444 33 8989 2 054 44 0 2134 0 1012 0 5657 1 0000 0 0395 0 8015 1 0000 0 1045 1 0000 The examples shown are not complete blocks but show typical use of the blocks Several of the blocks have a two digit code that describes the kind of measurement being done The relevant values are 30 TS Traverse 31 TS Free station eccentric station 32 TS Known station 33 TS Other 91 GPS code differential DGPS 92 GPS autonomous 96 GPS RTK fixed 97 GPS RTK float Block 00 Header DB
133. 4 TOPCON TopSURV Integrated Controller Software Reference Manual TopSURV Reference Manual Part Number 7010 0492 Rev K Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems Inc October 2008 All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc All rights reserved The information contained herein may not be used accessed copied stored displayed sold modified published distributed or otherwise reproduced without the expressed written consent from Topcon Positioning Systems Inc ECO 3443 ToC Table of Contents PRCTACE casasctevactencedessaiwewcccannnconstuacaeentdsuiessoansaacesuaen XV Terms and Conditions enosed naa i i oles XV Manual COnmventOns seana xvili What s New with TopSURV cccccseseeeseeees X X Chapter 1 MENU OGUCUION E E 1 1 DOCU a T EE OE l 1 Open Job mnnon onera Setialerestiecn status iaa eos 1 3 Openine Old JODS sarene Phi A Riley 1 4 Main Sere Me cise once doh ceance tea aanneseeaaceseented N 1 6 Help Icon s Pop up Menu ccccceccceessssseeseeeeees 1 8 g lo ls E ens Cerner Seminar nen seer ream AE AAE Sterns 1 8 INCUV ALE Mod le S wvearicercrnsvorcuersanciarcen teeta eean 1 9 POF Data LOS INE enina 1 9 SWA MENUS aereis o l 11 A DOUD ereen E OE ET A 1 122 Chapter 2 Working with a Job sssasssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 Creatine a INOW JOD mreniarne a a esesetensct eat 2 2 Select Survey Configuration
134. 486024506D 060 23557974062420847D 060 5 1777335 135235114D 03 0 OO0DD000000000000D 000 00000000000000000D 000 52 1262233005645 16D 03 Data Block These lines define the points for string CECI as defined in the 080 line above Each is in the format specified in the 001 Format line 3D23 17 which is 3 fields of 23 columns in double precision format and 17 places to the right of the decimal point To end the data block defining this string s points a final data line is added with the X and Y coordinates set to 0 000 The data in the 3rd column of this row is of no concern other than the fact an appropriate value of the specified type must be provided In most cases it will suffice to provide the same Z coordinate as the preceding line the last actual point on the string In the example above a string was created that consisted of a continuous series of points In many cases you may want to create strings that have gaps in them i e discontinuities To represent the point on the beginning of a discontinuity gap set the X value of that point to a negative value The point representing the end of a discontinuity gap should have the Y value set to a negative value Add a new 080 command to specify the new string 999 999 Tell MX to end the GENIO command Tekla XRoad amp XStreet VGP This format has the extension vgp Horizontal Elements Every line starts with feature information with element information follo
135. 500 mW or 1 W power 8 30 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status Configure RE S1 Repeater To setup the RE S1 as a stand alone repeater during the survey configuration first enable the usage of the RE S1 radio modem as a repeater see RE S1 FH915 Repeater on page 3 31 Then the Config RE SI Repeater option appears in the pop up menu of the Status Start Base and Topo screens This option opens the Config Radio screen to set RE S1 as a repeater Figure 8 36 on page 8 31 Radio Port selects the radio port that connects with the receiver or controller Location selects the territory North America Australia or New Zealand where the RE S1 is used Protocol shows the compatibility protocol e Channel sets the operating frequency channel e Disconnect turns off the RE S1 modem e Connect opens a daisy chain and sends commands to setup the RE S1 radio as a repeater A confirmation message displays if the modem was setup successfully e OK saves and returns to previous screen e Cancel closes the screen without making changes Ao Radio OK Radio Connected to Repeater Type RE 51 Repeater Radio Port Location North America Protocol FHS 15 Ext Channel 1 w Disconnect Connect Figure 8 36 RE S1 Repeater Configuration P N 7010 0492 8 31 Setting up GPS mmGPS Options The mmGPS Options screen Figure 8 37 displays the status of mmGPS in RTK s
136. 8 l Intersection Results Map F ISection 10009 North 1048 952 m East 1977 513 m Eley 87 783 m Figure 14 18 Intersection Results Tab e North the North local coordinate of the corresponding point e Fast the East local coordinate of the corresponding point e Elev Height the height of the first corresponding point e Save saves the result of the calculation P N 7010 0492 14 15 COGO Calculations The Map tab Figure 14 19 shows the solution of the task graphically In the example below there are two solutions for the Intersection calculation l Intersection Results Figure 14 19 Intersection Map Tab For a detailed description of the Map view see Viewing Map on page 15 1 If Distances instead of Azimuths are specified between the known points to the unknown points in the Intersection tab see Figure 14 17 on page 14 14 then there can be two points of intersection to save Figure 14 20 P intersection Close l Intersection Results Figure 14 20 Two Points of Intersection 14 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Calculator Calculator A built in calculator in TopSURV performs calculations and conversions To access the calculator tap the Calculator icon The Calculator screen displays Figure 14 21 m M wu FF a a fmi m Sa gn l T D Vf BA Elia ESES wn T Figure 14 21 Calculator i To enter
137. 930812 0680 DB is data block 45 PointName is occupation name pointname and Feat Code is feature code X Y and Z is the coordinate in WGS84 geocentric coordinates Ant H is antenna height NB be left blank if coordinate is already adjusted for antenna height Bk is left blank and Comm is a freetext comment Block 46 Additional GNSS information DB Date Time UTC SVs PDOP Ant Height Epochs Type AZO 1S Se Al 4S 24 63 813 aB Example 46 31122004 23 59 59 13 1 45 001 96 DB 1s data block 46 Date is date in format DDMMYYYY Time is UTC time in format HH MM SS 24h notation SVs is P N 7010 0492 A 11 File Formats number of satellites included in position calculation PDOP is PDOP Ant height is antenna height NB should be left blank if coordinate or vector is already adjusted for antenna height Epochs is number of epochs measured and type is type of solution from this list Block 50 coordinate in selected system with ellipsoidal height DB Pointname Feat Code North East Ell H Type Comm J2 AlO AS F12 3 4 F11 3 4 F8 3 412 A7 Example 50 Point2345 1000 134741 349 9881 834 62 643 DB is data block 50 PointName is the name of the occupation point and Feat Code is feature code North East is coordinate from the measurement in selected system EIl H is ellipsoidal height in WGS84 Type is left blank Comm is a free text comment Block 51 GNSS RMS and correlation coefficients NEU North East Up DB sN
138. AS Slope Settings Close Sta 2 00 000 fe fe Sta Interval 100 0 m Hinge Point la Ee EN Offset from CP 18 00 m R Slope se Cut 1 000 0 500 A p I Figure 13 55 Stakeout Alignment 13 54 TopSURV Reference Manual Slope e Sta the station where the stakeout is performed The arrow buttons change the station number on the value of the Station Interval Sta Interval the interval of the station increment e Hinge Point the hinge point code The hinge point is a point of rotation of the Cut Fill slopes The arrow in this field moves the hinge point along the cross section This is reflected on the scheme in the bottom of this screen Offset from CP the offset from the catch point Right Left Slope the values of the Cut Fill slope parameters applied to the hinge point switches the keyboard arrow keys on off The upper arrows stands for the station increment decrement the lower arrows stands for the current hinge point location Only one set of arrows can be enabled at a time e Back returns to the Slope Stakeout screen Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stakeout Parameters on page 3 66 e Close saves the settings and closes the screen P N 7010 0492 13 55 Staking out GPS Stakeout The Stake out screen Figure 13 56 shows the direction to target and the parameters of the target Cut Fill values
139. Al with ground plane G3 Al with ground plane RD GMS 2 GR 3 HiPer Ga Gb HiPer GD GGD HiPer Lite Lite HiPer Pro HiPerXT HiPer Legant 2 Legant E Legant L1 Legant3 with UHF MapAnt B MG Al MG A2 MG A5 MG B5 Odyssey PG Al PG AI with ground plane PG A1 with ground plane RD PG A2 PG A5 Regant DD Regant SD Regency DD Regency SD or Unknown P N 7010 0492 9 91 Configuring a Job e Ant Ht the height of the antenna and the type of antenna height measurement either Vertical measured to ARP antenna reference point or Slant measured to the edge of the antenna The screen also illustrates the measurement type FArover Recyr Cancel Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Elevation Mask 10 deg RTK Format CMR v Antenn HiPer LitefLitt anp Ant Ht 2 000 m H vertica v Peripherals l Figure 3 20 Rover Receiver e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Rover Radio screen see Rover Radio on page 3 29 For PP enabled RTK survey the Next button opens the Rover PP Setup screen Figure 3 24 on page 3 26 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Peripherals opens the Peripherals screen with three options to select Figure 3 21 on page 3 23 NMEA Ports check mark this box to set the number of ports available to output NMEA messages Multiple Po
140. Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings ArH PACES Aaa Cancel FAcelect Data ee Finish Cancel Alignments Figure 5 30 Select Data For Import 5 29 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 6 Editing Job Data To edit data in a job tap the Edit Job icon in the main menu The Edit Job menu Figure 6 1 includes options to edit the following data in the current job Points Codes Layers Linework Area Point Lists Raw Data Sessions for GPS post processing modes only and Images Also you can Set Simulator in GPS mode Aj j J _ Codes Layers A d Area Point Lists Raw Data Images Set Simulator Figure 6 1 Edit Job If the menu option you need is not visible tap the Configure Menus icons to enable these options in the Config Menus screen PaA The Help Icon gas opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu P N 7010 0492 6 1 Editing Job Data interface and information about TopSURV for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 Fa Points To edit points tap the Points icon The Points screen contains the list of stored points with coordinates and codes and a set of tools for database operation Figure 6 2 To edit any object properties double click on the object or select the object and tap the Edit button Find Code Find Point Find Next Delete Figure 6 2 Points In the
141. Check Sheet Check Sheet format is as follows Header Date Time Job Name Dist Units Meter US Feet Int Feet US Inches Int Inches Observed Point Record A 14 Point Name Code North East Elev Check Station Record Station Name North East Elev deltaNorth deltaEast deltaElev TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats PTL Sheet PTL Sheet format is as follows Header Date Time Job Name Dist Units Meter US Feet Int Feet US Inches Int Inches Point Record PointName North East Elev Code FirstReferencePointName SecondReferencePointName CMM The ASCII format file that consists of two files with extentions cor and lev containing coordinates and heights respectively Land XML LandXML is a standard data exchange format Refer to LandXML Website for details http www landxml org schema landxml 1 0 Documentation LandXMLDoc htm CR5 This is a file format of TDS 48 Coordinate file The TDS Coordinate File is a binary file consisting of a 38 byte header followed by coordinate point records 45 bytes in length CR 5 format is as follows Header Bytes 1 10 is the file name in ASCII Bytes 11 20 are not used Bytes 21 34 is the starting point number in MS long integer format This record is 1 if the file is non sequential P N 7010 0492 A 15 File Formats Bytes 35 38 is the last point number in MS long integer format Coordinate Point Records Bytes 1 4 is t
142. D DDDD dH HHHH dV VVVV dS SSS t ttt EEEEEEF EEEE NNNNNNN NNNN ZZZZ ZZZZ dE EEE dN NNN dZ ZZZ HV BKB3pppppppppppp HHH HHHH VVV VVVV DDDD DDDD dH HHHH dV VVVV dS SSS t ttt EEEEEEF EEEE NNNNNNN NNNN ZZZZ ZZZZ dE EEE dN NNN dZ ZZZ HVSD BKB4pppppppppppp HHH HHHH VVV VVVV DDDD DDDD dH HHHH dV VVVV dS SSS t ttt EEEEEEE EEEE NNNNNNN NNNN ZZZZ ZZZZ dE EEE dN NNN dZ ZZZ HVSD P N 7010 0492 A 49 File Formats Notes A 50 TopSURV Reference Manual Index A Alarms 2 9 Alignment 7 2 Attribute 6 16 C Code 6 16 COGO intersection 14 14 two point inverse 14 4 Configuration GPS configuration 3 3 survey configuration 2 3 TS configuration 3 51 Control code 6 7 Co Op tracking 3 48 Coordinate system 2 5 3 72 4 18 5 18 Cross Section Templates 7 27 Datum 2 5 3 72 Degree of chord 7 12 Degree of curve 7 12 Distance averaging 3 64 Elevation mask 3 7 3 21 8 15 Export to device 4 10 to job 4 2 F Feature 6 16 P N 7010 0492 Index Find station 11 27 G GPS GPS status 8 13 start base 8 2 HAL 7 7 circular arc 7 12 intersection point 7 2 7 14 line 7 11 spiral 7 13 Import from file 5 13 5 14 from job 5 2 Job job list 2 10 new job 2 2 open job 2 10 select job 4 2 5 2 L Localization 8 8 Missing line 11 31 mmGPS 3 4 3 39 Index Index Modem GSM 3 13 Multipath reduction 3 48 O Observation mode 16 1 Offset hidden point 11 16 Offsets sideshots 11 9 topo surve
143. DELS sitet setae ca ha laa oa aise 5 23 FROGS a O athe eateteteat satire hale teek ites Aatunanh 5 23 M SCCUON Templates soniers 5 24 Localizat OM reinan ce neeeabeiapecamecnees 5 25 SCAMS TIAA se cul taccdateaste tech dteatanatenniels 5 25 TINS caeu oan eae Ma ee eas este ea ie 5 25 DESAY CU hts di oie harieatactsicued acti a stn taaalt 5 26 Multiple Data siimscsentiue nn i a e 5 26 Chapter 6 Editing Job Data iicetscscceesvecsascencencnertesecvenssseesecios 6 1 POS ne R 6 2 Display Sene S aia ane E 6 4 Finding Point by Name cccssensea 6 4 Emde Font by Code incase E 6 5 Edine APOI chedeece reese tba a a 6 6 Edit Point Information eee 6 6 Layer Ani SIC eoii eset iasineconaesioens 6 11 PEPON sasoien hans cack eeiaaoan 6 12 Photo NOE ceee a aa aaa 6 13 Check Points rssereni nana Ea 6 14 Weighted Average cccccccccsssssstsssssssessseseeseees 6 14 OLS E a EE aes moe geia eee ee eieeeenees 6 16 Ed 016 cee err er aren eee eer tere erento 6 17 Edit AtIDULES scot ete ancien eencaias 6 19 OIC iG ir A nieaeaeeaits 6 23 P N 7010 0492 V Table of Contents View Objects on the Layer cc eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 24 Layar IN ANC neee e nse beavseanntiael 6 24 SE LAD meron terres ree ores ene Resear rnin ner eng eee ere 6 24 CODIECIS LAD ener o E 6 25 Edit Mu lipleLayers siniseen E 6 26 EEE E E E E E E E S EE E E 6 27 EH LME cenaa wii ied 6 28 POUT tS 100 Ene erinan een eA 6 28 Layer SUV E nena 6 30 ATO a sat aeon
144. E 11 32 Scanning with an Image seinni 11 32 VIEW Call oi 11 33 Oren aO aen selnicaieatae bette 11 34 Orientation Results osoeneoeseennseeeesssseersseeeens 11 37 Selectie SCAM ATG eoriet i 11 38 Mierna a AT 11 39 P N 7010 0492 ix Table of Contents Tine ESNIE rers 11 40 Scanning without an Image seeeesesssssssoeereesssssssse 11 41 PTC a teat r ac ceneanaeesetaceeaceneeeek aneeal earn eame 11 42 SG she sett es ee eet esas a oa esa shane teabaatan te 11 43 MONON asasaran aaa ces nes e E 11 44 Monit r P intlASt rossin ineat neeaaea a 11 44 MOMO asin eecnn a a has haan ae ele tate 11 45 Chapter 12 Digital Level Survey ccsssseecsssseesenseeseeneees 12 1 keve rR U eee tia ite a eke tan cumetamel 12 2 DTC VCR Un e sect aeseetaracceaaceceoancaceaats 12 3 Display Seting siia 12 6 POPE LE a A 12 6 Two Peg Test Results sinsiciatisisiei 12 8 Chapter 13 Staking OUT asss 13 1 POE E E E R 13 2 SlAKCOUL POINE iann ices eters ieiesesiene aes 13 2 Eee ecb 102 4 ol 8 0 Kanner ain ee an eae Tey em ae ee ee ee ee eee 13 4 ESS Gale OU te ota aes eet a eee te 13 5 COMM Ure Link srno R 13 7 Store Desion Pi Lavyer niin cee ee 13 7 DSI Gt OTSCUS assisar eroii aia 13 8 Store Point casita races eds sends alee aes Dee 13 9 DIE Staket testers iri E Sheen Seas tated seek 13 12 Stake POT srice e E 13 12 SCAG OU haaa cadet achat enceacseacwaecosnesteaiatae 13 13 WAVING N AEE N N A EA A ise aceasta 13 14 GPS SMkCOUl mis
145. E From Crd N 1000 000 E 1000 000 tmr Toca _ n roso 000 E eT Figure 14 65 Point Pair Information From Pt From Crd changes the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated To Pt To Crd changes the field to enter either the point or coordinates to which the parameters will be calculated e OK returns to the 2D Transform screen with the pair added e Cancel returns to the 2D Transform screen without changes made Traverse Adjustment Traverse adjustment is performed to provide a mathematically closed figure and at the same time to get the best estimates for positions of all the traverse stations P N 7010 0492 14 53 COGO Calculations To perform an adjustment of a surveyed traverse tap the Traverse icon The Adjustment screen displays Figure 14 66 Adjustment Parameters The first Adjustment screen contains general settings for adjustment e Start Point the station on which the traverse originates either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points e End Point the station on which the traverse closes either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points e Adjust Elevations check mark and enable this box to include adjusting elevations if elevations were determined in the traverse e Adjust Sideshots check mark and enable this box to include adjusting side shots e Curvature refrac
146. E84 2723 SD6 5740 BEN TopSURV can import export localization data gt from to this file and can only export GPS and TS observations MOSS Survey Both traverse and detail raw data formats can be exported Example SURVEY D J0119A 017 DMS 190 DECR 0900000 180 9000 1000 000 1000 000 0 000 P N 7010 0492 A 43 File Formats 200 9000 9001 SDVA 3595958 1 600 1 000000 201 PT01 0103620 14 194 0870623 0 000 1001 201 PT0O1 1333115 10 386 0880200 0 000 1002 201 PT02 2872920 9 187 0901702 0 000 1003 201 PT02 3350057 15 887 0871812 0 000 1004 201 CD2 02 PP01 0103555 14 196 0870649 0 000 1005 201 CD2 03 PP01 1333053 10 392 0880209 0 000 1006 201 P101 2872902 9 187 0901634 0 000 1007 201 P101 3350118 15 886 0871727 0 000 1008 999 FINISH Field Book Field Book files are text files that contain the observed point data Data from a data collector can be exported to a Field Book file to import into a drawing and project Example for GPS data INOTE Start Survey Date Time DT07 30 2007 TM 19 08 23 INOTE End Survey Date Time DT07 31 2007 TM18 35 21 UNIT FOOT DMS HORIZ ANGLE RIGHT PRISM CONSTANT 0 PRISM OFFSET 0 EDM OFFSET 0 CR OFF TEMP 20 C PRESSURE 1013 300 MM COLLIMATION OFF JOB gr3r VERT ANGLE ZENITH NEZ 999 9950 370 10012 484 1202 250 BASE NEZ 1000 10000 000 10000 000 1200 000 SSB NEZ 1001 10270 261 10001 970 1193 982 SSB NEZ 1002 10330 897 10227 397 1193 548 5 8
147. EEEEEF RW 104 35 000 105 35 000 22 000 14 000 0 RW 106 35 000 107 35 000 14 000 22 000 0 WLAAHHEEAEEEFAEEFAEEEFEEEFEEEFAEEEAEEFAEEEEAEEEEEPEH LW 104 35 000 105 35 000 22 000 14 000 0 LW 106 35 000 107 35 000 14 000 22 000 0 Component definitions Horizontal Alignments A 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats HL 51f 3f Horizontal Line Azimuth of line DMS Mf 1 if tangent to previous segment Horiz distance of line ft or meter 3f HC lf 3f 3f c Horizontal Curve Tangent azimuth Molt 1 if tangent to previous segment Radius Bt Arc length 3 Turn R Right or L Left c HS lf 3f 3f c c Horizontal Spiral Tangent azimuth Jolt 1 if tangent to previous segment Radius 3 Arc length 3f Turn c R Right or L Left Direction c T Tangent or C Curve Vertical Alignments VG 3f 3f Vertical Grade Horiz distance 3f Grade 3f VC 3f 3f 3f Vertical Parabolic Curv Horiz distance 3f Begin grade 3f End grade 3f Cross section Templates RT d 3f s Right or Left Cross Section Template LT d 3f s P N 7010 0492 A 25 File Formats Station number d Station offset 3f Template name Ps Super Elevation Right or Left Super Elevation RS d 3f d 3f 3f 3f c c 3f 3f or LS d 3f d 3f 3f 3f c oc 3 3f Start Station number od Start Station offset 3f End Station number d End Station offset 3f Start slope 3f
148. Figure 14 57 Station amp Offsets Station the station along the road The two arrows to the right decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Sta Interval shown in the next field es E left right arrows decreases increases the distance by the station interval uses the right left arrow keys of the keyboard to increase or decrease the station Sta Interval the station interval Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the road at the station shown on the Station field e Up Down the Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the road at the station e COGO Point sets the starting name for the points calculated e Code the code of the point e Back returns to the previous screen e Calc calculates the points along the road A successful message displays P N 7010 0492 14 45 COGO Calculations Adjusting Points To transform points or perform traverse adjustment tap the Adjust icon Figure 14 58 The Adjust menu opens to access the Rotate Translate Scale 2D Transform and Traverse options SSS 20 Transform Traverse Figure 14 58 Adjust Menu Rotate To rotate points tap the Rotate icon The Rotate screen displays Figure 14 59 on page 14 47 To rotate the selected points around a specific point select a rotation method either Rotation Angle or Azimuth e Select points sel
149. Figure 9 13 on page 9 15 first defines an occupation point and backsight azimuth or point e Occ Point enter an occupation or select an occupation using the map or list buttons e BS Azimuth BS Point enter either a BS azimuth value or select a BS point using the map or list buttons e OK saves the settings and opens the Config Laser screen Figure 9 14 on page 9 15 for lasers with an Encoder 9 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey Ar EE BS Meas OK Cancel g Occ Point 101 A Press the Fire Button on the Laser to measure Figure 9 13 Laser BS Meas The Config Laser screen Figure 9 14 defines the laser height and point information Ar C Laser close g Occ Point 101 e BS Point 100 Laser HI 1 5 m Point fluga3 er EF Press the Fire Button on the Laser to measure E Code A Figure 9 14 Config Laser e Occ Point enter an occupation or select an occupation using the map or list buttons e BS Azimuth BS Point enter either a BS azimuth value or select a BS point using the map or list buttons e Laser HI enter the height of the device above the occupation point P N 7010 0492 9 15 GPS Survey e Point enter the name of the point being measured The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Also the field appears to enter a string e Code displays the current point code Can be entered manually or chosen from t
150. Finish saves the settings and returns to the main screen See Setting Coordinate System Parameters on page 3 72 for more information P N 7010 0492 9 5 Working with a Job Units On the Units screen the default units that are used in the job display Set the following measurement units Figure 2 6 P Aunits Distance Metes v Angle DMS Temperature Celsius C v Pressure mmHg v Figure 2 6 Units e Distance units of linear measurements select either Meters Feet International Feet 1 Ifoot 0 3048 Meters US Feet 1 USFt 1200 3937 Meters Feet and Inches or US Feet and inches formula If the selected units are US Feet linear values can l Pes be entered as meters or international feet by appending m or if to the entered value If the selected units are in meters then a linear value in US Feet or International Feet is entered by appending for if to the end of the entered value If the selected units are in International Feet enter linear values in meters or USfeet by appending m or P to the entered value The appended characters m f or if are not case insensitive You can also enter M F or IF 9 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Creating a New Job If the selected units are US or International Feet and Inches you can enter feet and inches in the following formats ins feet inches fracNumerato
151. FreeText AT2 A64 Example 00 This is just a comment Block 02 Station DB Station Feat Code NR Press Temp Ih Type Comm 2 A10 A8 AI8ATI8 I8 F6 3 IR2 A7 Example 02 P100 1000 1 723 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats DB is the data bloc number 02 Station is name of station point where total station is situated Feat Code is feature code NR could be left blank Pressure in mmHg and temperature in C h instrument height Type is type of measurement and Comm is comment Block 03 Total Station observations 1 DB AimPoint Feat Code Hor Vert Dist Ph Type Comm AJ2 AIO A8 F8 4 4F8 4 4F8 3 F6 3 12 A7 Example 03 PP230 7002 100 1230 100 1230 100 123 1 670 DB is data block number 03 Aim Point is point name of point at which the total station is aimed Feature code is feature code of Aim Point Hor is horizontal angle gon Vert is vertical angle gon Dist is slope distance Ph is pole height prism height Type is type of observation and Comm is comment Block 04 Total Station observations 2 DB AimPoint Feat Code Hor Dh DistH Ph Type Comm 2 A1I0 A8 F8 4 F8 3 F8 3 F6 3 412 A7 Example 04 PP231 7002 100 1230 2 113 144 341 1 670 DB is data block 04 Aim Point is the point at which the total station is aimed Feat Code is feature code for Aim Point Hor is horizontal angle gon Dh is height difference DistH is horizontal distance Ph is pole height prism height Type is type
152. GPS Week 1150 Recent studies have shown that WGS 84 G1150 is essentially identical to the International Terrestrial Reference Frame of 2000 ITREFOO Also during this time there have been no new realizations of NAD 83 What this means is that WGS 84 and NAD 83 can no longer be considered identical and are in fact different by more than one meter This is because the WGS 84 datum has been updated over time using GPS while the NAD 83 datum has remained constant since 1986 However most software manufacturers still consider WGS 84 to be identical with NAD 83 To be compatible with other manufacturers Topcon provides transformation parameters from WGS 84 to NAD 83 where all the parameters are zero This means WGS 84 equals NAD 83 This set of datum transformation parameters is called NAD 83 No_Trans Topcon also provides another set of datum transformation parameters called NAD 83 which reflects the updates to WGS 84 These parameters are taken from the National Geodetic Survey Topcon only uses the first seven parameters three translations three rotations and scale Geoid Model shows the geoid selected if any The List button opens the Geoids List screen where geoids can be added deleted or their properties viewed See Geoid List on page 3 84 for more information e OK saves the settings and returns to the main screen e Cancel returns to the main screen without saving changes P N 7010 0492 9 73 Config
153. Line i Ref Line Data Map Missing Line Start Pt Start Point 105 ad EM Code End Pt End Point 106 Code Figure 11 28 Missing Line Ref Line Tab The Start and End Points can be entered manually chosen from the map or from the list or measured through the Meas button The Data tab displays the results of the measurements The same results are reflected in the Raw Data screen The Map tab shows the relative position of the points and the measured line P N 7010 0492 11 31 Total Station Survey Scanning This function is activated only with robotic reflectorless and motorized reflectorless total stations Make sure that the Show Scan Point option is selected in the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner of the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 To open the Scanning screen select the Scanning icon in the Robotic mode On the Scanning screen Figure 11 42 select either Scan w o Image or Scan with Image mode Scanning with an Image To scanning with an image tap Next to follow a scan wizard Scan with Image v Figure 11 29 Scan with Image Enter the following parameters on the Select Scan screen Figure 11 30 on page 11 33 e Session sets a name for the session e Image sets an Image file Select a previous Image or browse for a new one Images are stored as a JPEG file with the jpg file extension e Camera sets the Camera parameters If the Image e
154. List and Elevation The Help Icon Opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 13 1 Staking out Points To stakeout a point tap the Points icon The Stakeout Pt screen Figure 13 2 displays Stakeout Point The Stakeout Point screen Figure 13 2 contains initial data for the stakeout point FAstakeout e Settings Close lll Fixed H v ge 100 2201 3 200 10 3 f Design Point 100 EAA 2 000 m Vertical w Stakeout Figure 13 2 Stakeout Point e Design Point sets the identifier of the design point enter either manual or select from the map or from the list e Antenna Ht for GPS mode sets the height of the antenna reference point ARP above the mark and specifies the measurement type for the height either slant or vertical HR for TS mode the height of the rod target e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 e Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen For GPS stakeouts the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu with the following options e Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 13 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Rover Antenna Setup
155. Map Ql Mi H oom o1 Az 95 0000dms HD Error YO Error HA Error 0 0000 dms BS Azimuth 95 0000 dms HA 60 0000 dms WA 90 0000 dms 5O HR 0 000 m lt B Figure 10 7 Check Backsight There are two fields at the top of the page for the height of the instrument and the azimuth Station and Offset The Station and Offset screen Figure 10 8 on page 10 9 calculates a point defined by the number of stations on the road and an offset from this station Select the road from the list and enter the desired station offset and elevation Press the OK button to open the Add Point screen on which to add the calculated point to the list of points The Backsight Survey screen opens with this occupation point 10 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Backsight Survey P Station and wj ok Cancel Road foad Staion 200 m Offset 10 m Elevatior foo m Figure 10 8 Station and Offset Set Measurement Mode To toggle between sideshot modes press the Settings button on any Survey screen The Mode screen Figure 10 9 on page 10 10 displays Select one of three measurement methods Sideshot Dir Sideshot Dir Rev or Ang Dist Sets Dir Rev Sideshot Dir defines the measurement to a single point taken using the Direct position of the Total Station Sideshot Dir Rev defines that the measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct Position and the Reverse Position of the Total Station that is Plunge
156. On the Latitude Longitude Record Format screen Figure 4 20 on page 4 19 select from the drop down list the format you want to represent the degrees of Latitude and Longitude in the file exported e Back returns to the previous screen e Finish opens the Export Status screen and starts the Export process see Figure 4 21 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 4 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File A eh cancel ddd rornsssssss ddd decimal Figure 4 20 Select Latitude Longitude Format On the Export Status screen Figure 4 21 tap the Close button to return to main screen FAJexport Status 3471 points exported Export successfully finished Close Figure 4 21 Export Status P N 7010 0492 4 19 Exporting Data Text Custom Report If the Text Custom Report format is selected the To File screen displays the Code Style button Figure 4 21 Note that report files cannot be imported back to TopSURV Text Custom Report tet Select Types Of The Points Use Filters zode Style Figure 4 22 To Text Custom Report e Code Style opens the Code Style screen to set a format for point properties codes control codes strings and notes to export to the file e Next with the help of the export wizard follow next screens which are similar to those for the Topcon Text Custom format e Cancel closes the screen without saving the set
157. Pegi p1 Measure to Peg 2 p2 Locate Peg Locate Peg Figure 12 6 Two Peg Test e Locate Peg2 measures the horizontal distance to Peg2 and compares it with the Peg measurement previously taken This measurement is not used in the error computations e Meas takes measurements for the displayed prompted Peg The results display on the Two Peg Test Results screen Figure 12 7 on page 12 8 P N 7010 0492 12 7 Digital Level Survey Two Peg Test Results The Two Peg Test Results screen Figure 12 7 displays the results of the test after all measurements are taken FA iw TPA Cose Figure 12 7 Two Peg Test Results e The table displays all the shots taken e Error computed error means inclination of the actual line of sight from true horizontal This error is proportional to the distance from the level to the rod 12 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 13 Staking Out To stake out points tap the Stake icon in the main menu The Stake function is used to stake out Points Lines Offsets DTM Point in Direction Point List Curve Road Real Time Road and Slope Figure 13 1 Pt in Direction Point List ioe Curve Real Time Rd Road w Slope Linework Figure 13 1 Stake Menu 7 Configure Menus icons and enable these options in If you need menu options that are not visible tap 7 the Config Menus screen For stake out with digital levels the menu options include Points Point
158. Plus and RE S1 radios the Config Radio screen Figure 8 33 contains the following parameters FA confia Radio OK Type Internal GR 3 FH915Plus Connected to a Radio Port Location North America Protocol FH915 Ext aa Channel aa Disconnect Connect Figure 8 33 Config Internal GR3 FH915Plus The RE S1 is a 1W radio extension system using FH915 Plus spread spectrum radio It can be used as a repeater with the GR 3 or HiPer Lite GPS receivers or as a transmit receive external FH915 Plus radio for the GB or Legacy GPS receivers For the RE S1 radio used as a repeater see Configure RE S1 Repeater on page 8 31 P N 7010 0492 9 29 Setting up GPS For Satel modems the Config Radio screen Figure 8 34 displays the model channel and frequency to set for the radio Ar C Radio oK Cancel Type Satel Connected to cE Radio Port Model 345d Channel Frequency 469 5000 MHz i Ic i i E i Set Radio Figure 8 34 Config Satel For the Internal GR3 Satel radios the Config Radio screen Figure 8 35 allows to get the frequency from the radio or to turn Free Channel Scan mode AS Radio OK Type Internal GR3 Satel Connected to CaN Radio Port c Turn on Free Channel Scan Set Radio Figure 8 35 Config Internal GR3 Satel When using the Internal GR 3 Satel as the Base radio set the signal strength that the Base transmits Select either 700 mW 250 mW
159. Point column an icon displays the point type Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Points Icons T GPS stationary topo jt GPS kinematic auto topo RTK base 6 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Table 6 1 Points Icons Continued 0 ian observed e design or imported op Lu TS scanned point cogo manually entered e Find Code opens the Find by Code screen to enter a code for searching for a point e Find Point opens the Find by Point screen to enter a point name or a part of the name to perform a search e Find Next finds next point that satisfies the same conditions as the previously found point e Delete deletes the point from the list e Edit opens the Edit Point screen to edit the point parameters name code coordinates and or other parameters stored with the point e Add opens the Add Point screen to create a new point The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing five items e PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes its appearance on PTL Points For details see PTL Point on page 6 12 e String switches on the strings displaying function along with the codes e Show Scan Points switches on the scan points displaying function P N 7010 0492 6 3 Editing Job Data e Show AutoTopo Points switches on the AutoTopo points displaying function e Recompute recomputes the
160. Points WA photo Note af Check Points WA Photo Note af N Resid E Resid E Resid 100 0 000 a 100 8 519 0 001 4 763 ioo 3 756 0 000 ioo 12 275 Hio 3 756 0 000 E Exclude from WA E Figure 6 17 Exclude Station from Weighted Average P N 7010 0492 6 15 Editing Job Data Codes To edit codes and attributes tap the Codes icon The Code Attributes screen displays Figure 6 18 The Code Attributes screen Figure 6 18 contains a list of codes used for a survey the list of attributes for each code and a set of tools for editing the codes and attributes Codes already in use cannot be edited or deleted P code Attributes qreen br Figure 6 18 Code Attributes e Codes contain a list of codes with their associated icons C Point 7 Line or e Area e Attributes contains a list of attributes for the selected code e Delete deletes the highlighted entry e Edit opens the applicable Code Figure 6 20 on page 6 18 or Attribute Figure 6 23 on page 6 20 screen with the properties of the highlighted entry e Add opens the applicable blank Code or the Attribute screen A new attribute can be added if at least one code exists and is highlighted e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen opens the pop up menu containing the Export To File option The To File 6 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Codes screen Figure 6 19 displays to export the code l
161. Points Figure 4 40 on page 4 36 Roads to Export for Alignments Figure 4 33 on page 4 28 which is similar to this one Select TN3 for Surfaces Figure 4 41 on page 4 36 X Sections to Export for X Sections Figure 4 33 on page 4 28 which is similar to this one To lt name of Format gt screen Figure 4 16 on page 4 15 On the Point Selection screen Figure 4 40 on page 4 36 select the filter type to select the exported Points Figure 4 40 P N 7010 0492 4 35 Exporting Data Ar ite selection Cancel Points All Points Figure 4 40 Points Selection On the Select TN3 screen Figure 4 41 select a destination directory and the name of the created file Type 73 Files TNS pa GJ TPS TopSURVYDTM iN Name i LJ Figure 4 41 Select TN3 e OK starts the export process e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 4 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting GPS Session Exporting GPS Session To export a session settings to the receiver tap the GPS Session icon In the Sessions screen the Receivers panel contains a tree of the available receivers and their session plans The Active Sessions panel contains a list of sessions to export Figure 4 42 ate Close Receivers Goto sleep mode GPS Session Active Sessions ID Type Start Day Sitez Static Tue gt Figure 4 42 Job Sessions selects the highlighted session to export
162. R G B MStyle Line R G B DashStyle Width gt field 1 FIELD_TYPE field NC FIELD_TYPE Comments Point Line types of the supported objects R G B color of the objects with such code MStyle mark style of the points with such code 0 Dot 1 Filled Rectangle 2 Filled Diamond 3 Filled Circle 4 Filled Triangle 5 Rectangle 6 Diamond P N 7010 0492 A 19 File Formats 7 Circle 8 Triangle 9 Cross DashStyle dash style of the lines with such code 0 Solid 1 Dash 2 Dot 3 Dash Dot 4 Dash Dot Dot Width width of the lines with such code FIELD_TYPE can be String Integer Float List For FIELD_TYPE List we use next format ListGitem 1 1tem N Example test_code menu_item lt Point 255 128 255 3 Line 255 255 1287371 gt List blue green red text_item String int_item Integer real_item Float XML File as Storage of the Code Library XML The XML Code Library format supports String Integer Float and List types as fields of the codes The format also supports Layers dictionary and draw information for each code All exported codes are stored in one file The format uses the XML syntax and is as follows Example lt xml version 1 0 gt lt CodeDictionary version 1 1 gt lt Layers gt lt Layer name lay1 active 1 plot 1 notes first gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 87 colorG Value 65 colorB Value 189 dashStyle 1
163. RV SBAS setup Setup of a satellite based augmentation system is updated For details on the setup see SBAS Setup on page 3 37 Internal CDMA GPRS Network Connection Now automatic connection is available for internal CDMA and GPRS network connection For details on network connection see the TopSURV User s Manual Prism Constant Separate BS FC prism constant is now available for setting For details on the setting TS survey parameters see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 Traverse Adjustment Traverse adjustment of a surveyed traverse is added For details on traverse adjustment in COGO calculations see Traverse Adjustment on page 14 53 XX Fo sras Sielu Hira OPSE Type ADREF 3 FPGAS AOR furbems Lert sett rby if neal tt lt lt Back Naxt gt gt a ee fray OK Cancel Querying Signal Quality Making PRP connection Querying Mount Points Comrust ting to NTRIP Serer fom oe Manual Het 1 CMR Net PPP Connected Spesad 115200 ee ECU ER Eger Poms Finish C Meas Type uaivaiso v EDM Mode Firm immi i Hacksight P t jo Offset we Foresight P t u offset f Faint Guid Prism Auto Topo Method a Inhorval fou Bi lt lt wack Next gt gt TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 1 Introduction TopSURV is Topcon s survey software available for hand held controllers When installed on a hand held controller that runs the Windows
164. Radio screen Figure 3 10 on page 3 12 For PP enabled RTK survey the Next button opens the Base PP Setup screen Figure 3 9 on page 3 11 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Base Receiver screen displays the pop up menu that contains three options e Receiver Setting check mark the box on the Receiver Settings screen appear to turn the charger mode off e Use relative calibrations select the option if needed to use Relative antenna model at the base station that transmits CMR data By default TopSURV 7 2 uses Absolute calibration offsets for antennas Also you can select this option when editing the base e Help to access the Help files For PP Static or PP Kinematic and PP DGPS surveys the Static Recvr screen Figure 3 8 contains the same parameter fields as for RTK survey type except for the RTK Format field Ar GEN Recyr Cancel Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Elevation Mask 10 deg Elevation Mask 10 deg Antenn HiPer Lite Liti v gt Antenn HiPer Lite Liti v gt Ant Ht 0 000 m r Ant Ht 0 000 m Slant na Slant w Peripherals l Peripherals l Figure 3 8 Static Base Receiver Settings P N 7010 0492 3 9 Configuring a Job The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Static Base Recvr screen displays a po
165. TAR service with MAP HP receivers the OmnitSTAR screen begins to display the status of OmniSTAR service directly after selecting the Config OmniSTAR option Wait for some time to get the information shown Ar OE close Satellite EA_SAT Lon 25E w OmniSTAR SN 200969 11 29 2007 HP 4 10 1535 2 MHz Figure 8 23 OmniSTAR HP Status e Satellite select an OmniSTAR satellite e Set Satellite connects to the selected satellite and begins logging data from this satellite The System tab will display Figure 8 24 first DGPS VBS position type and then HP DGPS solution P N 7010 0492 P status Settings Pos S s Plots svs A Position Type HP DGPS g common Sats initialized Sats Radio Link 100 Rtk Age sec o fl Receiver Me 124152 A Receiver Power 100 Controller Me 203946 a Controller Po 100 Figure 8 24 HP DGPS 8 23 Setting up GPS Configure Beacon To set up a DGPS survey with the Beacon service select the Config Beacon option from the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner of the Status screen The Beacon screen Figure 8 25 displays Status Figure 8 25 Beacon e Country the country where the radio beacon is located e Station the station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the Rover e Status opens the Beacon Status screen Figure 8 26 to view information on the beacon link and the receiver beacon board Ar EE Status clos
166. Tab The Map tab Figure 11 7 on the second SS Dir screen performs sideshots in the graphic mode The buttons on the right duplicate the controls on the first S Dir screen Figure 11 4 on page 11 4 FAss pir Settings 4 Meas Data Map Offsets f occpt 2 g occp i 3 c 00 m EINES 8 Bpm Figure 11 7 Sideshot Direct Map Tab For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 In the Sideshot Sets Dir Rev and Ang dist Sets Dir Rev mode the Set tab displays Figure 11 8 on page 11 8 P N 7010 0492 11 7 Total Station Survey The SS Dir Rev screen Figure 11 8 contains the data collected during the measurements grouped by sets the set for Multiple mode contains two measurements the set of the Repeat mode contains four measurements LI set ose 4 Meas Data Map Set R HR 5 occpt 5 occpt Figure 11 8 Ang dist Sets Dir Rev Meas Set Tab e The columns on the Set tab displays the following parameters Point the name of the point Res HA Difference of each HA measurement within the set from the average of all the HAs in the set Res VA Difference of each VA measurement within the set from the average of all the VAs in the set Res SD Difference of each SD measurement within the set from the average of all the SDs in the set AR the height of the rod target HA Horizontal Angle measurement in the correspondin
167. Times ccce 3 40 Survey Parame ors eso 3 41 Pont NUMDEMNS irie a A 3 44 Stake Farame ter S serae neni sceteuetevaddaws 3 45 Staked PomTICON sixcasrstetereaireei Sir eisias 3 47 PRY AICO asns a usar eieees 3 48 RTE Sets crial oss cision aon 3 49 Miscellaneous zssicvecwsscver vesesan dotedeqaseadecanehdccaveecdaanes 3 50 Total Station Configuration ccssseeesseeeeseeeeeeees 3 51 COMMeUnNe the SULV EY orori ER 3 52 TASQUUTNCNE osese naeercasienelnwan 3 53 Montor Opos oe 3 55 ii TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents Connection ModE esene aen 3 56 Cable siian a a seuadeciaes 3 57 BaO A aa teet acaeet hice 3 58 MOE rarena erue a ehsaseaieaatenneeatun toacteans 3 59 Seale TACK E E isle indica tess 3 60 SUVE V Parameters dost auiehaicocwtat diesel a 3 62 Cit Prisms suisse cena ia eon naene ae 3 66 SUAKCOUl Parameters asien e i eea 3 66 Miscellaneous a veiolausria minder en eca cnet 3 68 Miscellaneous Level Survey c sessesseeeeees 3 70 Setting Coordinate System Parameters cccceeeeeeees 3 72 PEO VCC UIO IS esea 3 74 Custom Projections sonconiecni oeei 3 75 From Grid to Ground Ground to Grid Transformation sacanear 3 78 Compute ROLGON sorsia A 3 81 Compute AZMU ereer EEE 3 82 Custom Datums snini ie iia 3 83 Geoid iSt eessen ie 3 84 Adda Geod Pile szeaniani i icnea cena 3 85 Setting Global Parameters for JOD ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 87 CIN UNS eoa uae deat N uaa 3 89
168. Topo Menu on page 9 3 The Layer Style tab Figure 13 10 on page 13 11 on the Store Point screen contains the following fields 13 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Point Info Layer Style Photd gt Civ Point Style E lt By Code gt Color Figure 13 10 Store Point Layer Style Tab e Layer select the layer to locate the point e Point Style select a point style from the drop down list The field to the left shows the symbol for the selected point e Color opens the Select Color screen The Photo Note tab on the Store Point screen Figure 13 11 adds a photo note to the stakeout point Initially the screen is empty Figure 13 11 Store Point Photo Note e Delete erases the image from the screen P N 7010 0492 13 11 Staking out e Add opens the Select Image File screen to browse for the necessary file in the controller DL Stakeout The DL Stakeout of design points can be accessed from the main menu or the top left menu on the Level Run screen for details see Level Run on page 12 2 Stake Point The Stake screen Figure 13 12 selects a design point to determine the elevation and to compute a cut fill value fF espont Bo f Design Point 4 Stakeout Figure 13 12 DL Stake Point Design Point selects the point to stake either enter manually or select from the map or list BS Point selects the backsight point for the stake m
169. Z elevation Example 1 1000 0000 1000 0000 100 0000 2 990 0000 1010 0000 100 0000 101 994 8159 1000 9684 100 1130 102 993 9304 1007 7991 100 8000 103 998 5 150 1009 6329 100 4026 104 1002 0648 1002 5682 100 3421 1001 1004 7210 997 6496 100 1153 1002 1003 7027 990 8382 100 7989 1003 998 7911 990 3286 100 4033 1004 997 3111 998 0951 100 3421 GTS 7 with strings The GTS 7 with strings format is as follows ptno X easting Y northing Z elevation pt code string Example 1 1000 0000 1000 0000 100 0000 STN 001 2 990 0000 1010 0000 100 0000 STN 001 101 994 8159 1000 9684 100 1130 STN 002 102 993 9304 1007 7991 100 8000 STN 001 103 998 5150 1009 6329 100 4026 STN 002 104 1002 0648 1002 5682 100 3421 STN 001 1001 1004 7210 997 6496 100 1153 PT 09 1002 1003 7027 990 8382 100 7989 PT O5 1003 998 7911 990 3286 100 4033 PT 09 1004 997 3111 998 0951 100 3421 PT 0O5 A 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats GT The GT Format is as follows 0 Code Name North East Elev 0 0 Example 0 a 101 12 320 45 100 23 120 OO 0 102 34 200 9 400 3 220 00 0 b 103 2 334 8 450 45 000 00 0 104 78 600 45 000 56 600 00 GT FIN The File Extension for this format is GT Format is 8 8 8 8 14 14 14 1 Surface Eight marks Line Eight marks Code Eight Marks Point Eight marks X coordinate N fourteen marks Y Coordinate E fourteen marks 7 Z Coordinate H fourteen marks NM BW WN Ex
170. a calculated value to any entry field in Pas TopSURY start the calculator from this field by pressing the F1 button on the controller keyboard or by tapping the Ea button on the pop up keyboard for controllers with soft input panels e Input field enter the entire equation here then press the equals button to calculate the result Result field shows calculation results This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular polar conversions Previous Result field once equals is pressed the previous result is moved up to this field This field is also used as the x or r values for rectangular polar conversions MC clears the memory MR recalls the memory value indicated by M in the Input field MS saves the already computed result into memory P N 7010 0492 14 17 COGO Calculations e M adds the already computed result to the value in memory e C clears all the fields e backspace lt removes the last entry e copy if the calculator was started from a field in TopSURV copies calculation results to that field closes the calculator in case it was started from the COGO menu e sci brings up the scientific calculator oi wu e oo D fo PE ar i a 0 a C Pol Rec O me x wn Figure 14 22 Scientific Calculator Curve Solutions A Curve is part of a circle and can thus be described throu
171. ademarks or registered trademarks of Sokkia Corporation Satel is a trademark of Satel Oy Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT THIS MANUAL THE PRODUCT AND ANY ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL THE SOFTWARE OR THE PRODUCT SUCH DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF TIME LOSS OR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF PROFIT SAVINGS OR REVENUE OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCT S USE IN ADDITION TPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAINING SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE CLAIMS BY OTHERS INCONVENIENCE OR ANY OTHER COSTS IN ANY EVENT TPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PORDUCT LICENSE AGREEMENT Use of the Software and any other computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website the Software to be used with a Topcon Product consti
172. age 13 32 P N 7010 0492 13 33 Staking out GPS Stakeout The Stake out screen Figure 13 34 shows the relative position of the antenna Close i H Vv gg 100 2 201 3 200 1 Point 104 fal Y a North 6168623 573 m East 412605 406 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 014 m C F Figure 13 34 Stakeout DTM TS Stakeout The Stake out screen Figure 13 35 reflects the relative position of the target The current point name displays at the top of the screen ISEGI Point 104 EDM Elevation Cut Figure 13 35 Stakeout TS DTM for the job TopSURV neither calculates nor z If a stakeout point is located on the outside of the writes the coordinates of this point 13 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Point in Direction e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit point screen e Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen e Close saves the changes and closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout Point in Direction To perform the Point and Direction stakeout select the Point in Direction icon Figure 13 36 On the Point in Dir screen Figure 13 36 you can stakeout a point using a known point the azimuth and the offsets fr
173. ails on editing layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 e Point Style select a point style from the drop down list The box to the left shows the style to designate the point on the map e Color opens the Select Color screen see On the Select Color on page 6 11 to edit the color you desire On the Select Color screen Figure 6 12 set the color of the point mark to show on the map P N 7010 0492 6 11 Editing Job Data FFAscect coor EM EI Figure 6 12 Select Color Tap in the area of the color you want You can select the color of the point for either the Layer or the Code by highlighting the Layer or Code node on the screen Figure 6 12 PTL Point In PTL Mode the PTL tab displays on the Edit Point screen with the following parameters Figure 6 13 on page 6 13 e Start Ref Pt End Ref Pt selects reference points either from the map from the list or when entered manually e PTL Offsets the offsets from the reference line formed by the reference points Line the distance from the start of the reference point along the reference line where the perpendicular to this line passes though the target Offset the horizontal distance from the target e Ell ht the height of the target 6 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Point Info PTL Phot gt Start Ref Pt 100 End Ref Pt 101 PTL Offsets m Line 10 000 Offset 10 000 Ell ht 137 000 Figure 6 13 Edi
174. akeout lines and offsets tap the Line icon The Line amp Ofst screen displays The Line amp Offset screen Figure 13 19 on page 13 18 performs a stakeout of a line with offsets in the Horizontal and Vertical directions e Start Point the starting point of the line The line is defined by the azimuth the azimuth to another point or the the End Point of the line End Point Azimuth the direction of the line set through either the azimuth of the line or the ending point of the line e Ht Comp the type of height computations for the stakeout point At of Start Pt height of starting point the stakeout point has the same height as the starting point of the line P N 7010 0492 13 17 Staking out Interpolate Ht the height of the stakeout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line e Num Subs designates the number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line For instance a value of 3 indicates the stakeout of four points by subdividing the line into three equal segments e Start Sta the starting station chainage of the line e Next opens the Sta amp Ofst screen Figure 13 20 on page 13 19 see Station amp Offsets on page 13 19 e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 AS een Settings Close Start Point 1 foo Ht Comp interpolate H aa F
175. al rd TDS Road rd5 Topcon 3D Road rd3 TopSURV Road thl tvl trd CLIP Road PLT ALZ TRV ISPOL Road ALI RAS SC1 Tekla Roads vgp MX GENIO Road txt or SBG Road LIN In TopSURV or TDS Road format select the desired distance units Figure 5 26 on page 5 24 P N 7010 0492 5 23 Importing Data Meters ka Figure 5 26 Roads from TopSURV Road The header of the TopSURV Road format contains the starting azimuth if the Road is not a straight line X Section Templates For X Section Templates data Figure 5 27 on page 5 25 you can import the following formats SSS X Section Templates xtl TDS X Section Templates tp5 or TopSURV X Section Templates xst When importing from TopSURV or TDS Road format select the desired distance units 5 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Cancel Data x Section Templates na Meters v Figure 5 27 X Section Templates from TopSURV Templates Localization For Localization data you can import the following formats Topcon 3D gc3 TDS RAW and Trimble DC dc which contain coordinates of control points in two coordinate systems Control Points are imported together with Localization data Scanning Data For Scanning Data all scanning data can be imported from DI 3000 cmr imc csv TINs For TINs data you can import the following formats AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing
176. ame names as the job that the objects are exported to the Duplicate lt Objects gt screen displays Figure 4 9 a warning that the code already exists FAbupicate Codes Warning Code already exists Mame Yes To All Skip All Figure 4 9 Duplicate lt Objects gt The Duplicate lt Objects gt screen issues a warning that prevents the loss of points roads or point lists when names of these exported objects coincide with existing ones Select from the following options e Overwrite the exported object overwrites the existing one e Rename the imported object is renamed The new name should be noted in the corresponding field Start Name Prefix Suffix the imported object differs from the existing object by prefix or suffix The prefix suffix should be noted in the corresponding field e Yes press to accept the decision Yes To All press to accept the same decision for all similar cases e Skip press to skip the object without exporting e Skip All press to skip all the objects with names that coincide with the names of existing objects without exporting P N 7010 0492 4 9 Exporting Data e Close disables the export process and opens the Export Status screen to remove all the objects already exported Exporting to Device To export a file to a controller tap the To Device icon Selecting Port On the Settings screen Figure 4 10 you can select the port for data transfe
177. amp 4 Point panel contains the name and global coordinates of the control points Point sets the name of the control point either enter a point name manually select a point from the map or from the list Code sets the code of the control point Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the code selected The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Start Meas sets the control point to the current location The Epoch Count field shows the number of the accepted epochs The parameters of the logging are set through the Survey Parameters screen If the point name already exists the Point Check notification screen displays which prompts you to overwrite rename or store the point as a check point OK saves the point and opens the Localization screen to display a new point 8 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Localization Localization Details The Localization Details screen Figure 8 9 on page 8 11 contains the Results and Map tabs The Results tab Figure 8 9 on page 8 11 displays calculated parameters of the localization global coordinates corresponding lo
178. ample 9 1 0 1 44318 541 72090 844 0 000 where 9 Surface Code ctrl code 1 Line Code String code 0 Code 1 Point number 44318 541 North 72090 844 East 0 000 Height P N 7010 0492 A 5 File Formats MMH360 The File Extension for this format is 360 MMH360 format is as follows Empty Four marks Control Code three marks String Four Marks Point pointnumber seven marks Empty four marks Code Three marks Control Code 2 two marks Empty mark One mark O o NNW nH BPW N e X coordinate N 11 marks three after comma 10 Empty mark One mark 11 Y coordinate E 11 marks three after comma 12 Empty Eight marks 13 Z coordinate H 8 marks three after comma Example 25 4 10 60101 7062800 100 3513639 300 17 800 where 25 Control code 4 String 10 Point Number 601 Code 01 Control Code 2 7062800 100 North 3513639 300 East 17 800 Height A 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats DXF AutoCAD DXF Drawing eXchange Format is the native vector file format of Autodesk s AutoCAD application KOF KOF is a Norwegian format that consists of a set of data blocks Example 00 Starting off with total station 02 P10 1 690 31 09 40 03 100 45 100 1230 100 1230 100 123 1 670 03 101 45 200 3210 100 3210 200 321 1 670 03 101 45 3215 299 6786 200 322 1 670 03 100 45 300 1236 299 8770 100 134 1 670 09 40 03 100 45 200 1
179. and Conditions USE This product is designed to be used by a professional The user should have a good knowledge of the safe use of the product and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for both private use and commercial job sites COPYRIGHT All information contained in this Manual is the intellectual property of and copyrighted material of TPS All rights are reserved You may not use access copy store display create derivative works of sell modify publish distribute or allow any third party access to any graphics content information or data in this Manual without TPS express written consent and may only use such information for the care and operation of your Product The information and data in this Manual are a valuable asset of TPS and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work time and money and are the result of original selection coordination and arrangement by TPS P N 7010 0492 KV Preface TRADEMARKS Topcon HiPer TopSURV Topcon Link Topcon Tools and Topcon Positioning Systems are trademarks or registered trademarks of TPS Windows and ActiveSync are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and is used by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc under license Sokkia Corporation and the names of Sokkia Corporation products referenced herein are either tr
180. and Internal HiPer Pac Crest Radio Modem the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 17 on page 3 19 e Channel selects the operating channel to the radio modem e Sensitivity selects the sensitivity level for the radio modem either low moderate high or off 3 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Channel Sensitivity Figure 3 17 Pacific Crest Radio Parameters For Satel Radio modems the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 18 on page 3 20 Model select the model of the radio Channel select the channel of the radio Frequency shows the frequency of the radio Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Rover Receiver screen Figure 3 20 on page 3 22 Finish saves changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used P N 7010 0492 9 19 Configuring a Job Model Channel E ba Frequency 469 5000 MHz Figure 3 18 Satel Radio Parameters For Airlink Multicast CDMA Multicast UDP the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 19 e Address to Add the field for IP address input e IP Addresses list displays all available IP addresses Address to Add 225 0 055 IP Addresses list 225 0 055 Figure 3 19 Base Multicast Parameters e Delete deletes the highlighted IP address e Add adds a new address from the Add
181. ap the following sets of points 14 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve Solutions RP Point PC Point PT Point for these set of points the distance between the RP Point and the PC point should be an equal distance between the RP Point and the PT point The radius and the PC and PT points define two curves one with delta less than or equal to 180 degrees Small curve and the other with delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees Large curve Select either Small value or Large value from the Curve drop down list to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations PC Point Curve Point PT Point for these set of points the coordinates for the RP Point are calculated along with curve parameters The name and the code for this calculated point can be set e Calc press to calculate the curve parameters The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files The Results tab Figure 14 28 displays the results of the calculation Ar ics Pt Curve Close Ar ics Pt Curve Results Map BE Results Map gt EJ Save RP 10012 Radius 525 015 m A North 1495 025 m Length 1009 957 m East 1524 991 m Chord 861 280 m Eley 0 000 m Degree 10 5447 dms Radius 529 015 m Degree 10 5547 dms Length 3296 764 m Delta 110 1306
182. are computed from Cut Fill Slope other offsets are computed using the Catch Point Close HH v ge 2038 3 427 gtd 0 00 000 Left 164 907 m Back 234 684 m Fill 16 447 m To CL 49 340 m Along CL 282 553 mM Ell ht 161 707 m c HP 9 057 m Figure 13 56 GPS Stakeout Slope E fq advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station e Store saves the location Edit the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit Point screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Roads screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays a pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout TS Stakeout The Stake Stakeout Catch Point screen TS Stakeout Slope on page 13 57 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current station in the upper left hand corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position and the parameters of the 13 56 TopSURV Reference Manual Slope stakeout Cut Fill values are computed from Cut Fill Slope other offsets are computed using the Catch Point 5e DARE 2 00 000 w z Turn L is 46044 dms To TS 114 463 m F CP 0 000 m To CL 106 324 m Along CL 177 802 m Eley 95 637 m F HP 10 000 m Figure 13 57 TS Stakeout Slope EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made
183. ation of the application the gt sides of the polygon should not cross each other that is the polygon should be simple and convex The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items Edit Points see Points on page 6 2 and Help to access the help files The Results tab Figure 14 46 shows the results of the calculation FAknown Area Line Area Results Map M1 Save co 10000 North 1188 147 m East 1436 518 m EJ Save co 10001 North 482 808 m East 893 612 m Total Ar H i m 2 746323 7 Acres 184 4206 Plot Area mA 7onnnn Save Figure 14 46 Line Results Tab x The Map tab Figure 14 47 on page 14 37 shows the view of the quadrilateral 14 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Corner Angle FAknown Area Line Map JAN AJA Figure 14 47 Line Map Tab Corner Angle To calculate a corner angle tap the Corner Angle icon Figure 14 48 The Corner Angle screen displays Ar comer Angle Angle Results Map Start Point Eoo Mid Point Figure 14 48 Corner Angle The Angle tab contains initial data for the angle creation and calculates the angle e Start Point the point that defines the first side of the angle either enter manually or select from the map or from the list P N 7010 0492 14 37 COGO Calculations e Mid Point the point that defines the corner of the angle either e
184. attribute nameN type of the attribute Vvalue of the attribute amp code stringM control codeK Select only one type of the code output to one file Selection of several Codes fields for export is not supported FC 4 The FC 4 format is as follows Name Northing Easting Elevation Code Example 101 12 32000 45 10000 23 12000 a 102 34 20000 9 40000 3 22000 103 2 33400 8 45000 A 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats 45 00000 b 104 78 60000 45 00000 56 60000 FC 5 Example OutPut _ BS_ 012500000m_ g 011500000m_ h 000050000m_ PJ1_ f 012000000m_ g 011002106m_ h 000049970m_ PJ11_ f 012000000m_ g 011002106m_0063 h 000049970m_ PJ12_ 011994478m_ g 011004703m_ h 000050025m_ PJ13_ f 011990588m_ g 011003698m_ h 000049863m_ PJ2_ 011994476m1051 InPut _ BS_ x 012500000m_ y 011500000m_ z 000050000m_ PJ1_ f 012000000m_ g 011002106m_ h 000049970m_ PJ11_ f 012000000m_ g 011002106m_0063 h 000049970m_ PJ12_ 011994478m_ g 011004703m_ h 000050025m_ PJ13_ f 011990588m_ g 011003698m_ h 000049863m_ PJ2_ 011994476m1051 GTS 6 GTS 6 coordinate input and output is the same format Refer to the GTS 6 interface manual to confirm details The format of GTS 6 is the same as FC 5 coordinate input P N 7010 0492 A 3 File Formats FC 6 GTS 7 The format of FC 6 is the same as GTS 7 coordinate format The GTS 7 format is as follows ptno X easting Y northing
185. b icon The Select Job screen Figure 5 2 displays Select a Job The Select Job screen Figure 5 2 selects the job for import through a wizard based import process The wizard guides you through the import process by tapping the Next button At the final stage press the Finish button to complete the process Current Job shows the name of the job selected from the job list Created shows the date the selected job was created Modified shows the last date the selected job was modified displays the directory where the job file is stored in the controller Browse opens the browse screen for choosing the job file from files previously downloaded to the controller Select selects the job file highlighted in the job list Close returns to the previous screen without changes being made FAcelect Job Close Current Job 06 224 Created 10 15 2007 23 35 Modified 10 24 2007 00 19 TPS TopSURYV Jobs Browse Select Figure 5 2 Select Job 5 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From Job Import From the Job On the From lt name of Job gt screen select the data to import and if necessary filter the imported points see Figure 5 3 e Points select the points to import from the drop down list either All Points By Type By Range and Code By Type Range and Code or None e Check mark the data to be imported along with the points either Code Library Localizaiton Po
186. beeps each time a point is stored VA Zero at Level if enabled vertical angle measurements are oriented to be zero at the Horizontal Level direction If this option is disabled vertical angle measurements are oriented to be zero at the vertical Zenith direction default Only certain Total Stations allow TopSURV to set this value For this reason ensure that this option is set to the same value in the total station as that set in TopSURV e Use Horizontal Angle Left if enabled the horizontal angle measurements are shown in a counter clockwise Left direction If this option is disabled the horizontal angle measurements are shown in a clockwise Right direction default TopSURV automatically sets the Total Station to HR or HL depending on the selection e Automatically display BS Setup screen if enabled the Backsight Setup screen displays automatically when attempting to access any of the screens involving total station observations see Prompt for Feature Codes e Hold Offset Measurement if enabled the screen to measure an offset point with the help of the selected offset tool displays automatically after each measurement see Prompt for Rod Height P N 7010 0492 3 69 Configuring a Job e BS Is Always Required if enabled a warning to set the Backsight to always display when attempting to access any of the screens involving total station and level observations
187. ber of stop bits for the laser device s connection port to output raw and calculated data to the peripheral device P N 7010 0492 3 97 Configuring a Job e Back returns to the previous screen e OK saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Table 3 1 lists supported manufacturers and models of laser devices Table 3 1 Laser Device Manufacturer and Model Type of Laser measurement system MDL LaserAce 300 Range Finder Only Range Finder with Encoder Laser Technology Inc Impulse 200 Impulse Only Impulse with Compass Laser Technology Inc TruPulse 200 TruPulse Only TruPulse with Encoder Laser Technology Inc TruPulse 360 TruPulse Only TruPulse with Compass Ar confia Laser OK Cancel Manufacturer v Model LaserAce 300 v Type Range Finder On v Laser Port Setting Port Parity Mone Data Baud Stop ul Figure 3 26 Laser Configuration 2 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Rover Radio The Rover Radio screen contains parameters for the radio modem connected to the Rover receiver Figure 3 27 Piove kato REN EE Radio Modem Internal HiPer Lite na Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port Baud 38400 Data Parity Mone Stop 1 ll Defaults Figure 3 27 Rover Radio e Radio Modem the type of modem The contents of the drop down list depends upon a style used e Receiver Port Connect
188. ble for GPT 8200 and GPT 7000 Total Stations Normal Long NP attempts to take a normal NP measurement If unsuccessful the instrument automatically switches to long NP mode for the measurement only available for GPT 8200 and GPT 7000 Total Stations e Interval select the scanning intervals either as Angle values or Numbers of points e HA Num H enter the interval in the horizontal direction P N 7010 0492 11 39 Total Station Survey e VA Num V enter the interval in the vertical direction e Next saves the settings and opens the Estimate Time screen Figure 11 40 Time Estimate Before scanning begins the Estimate Time screen Figure 11 40 displays the scanning information including the total number of points to be scanned and an estimate of the time it takes to complete the scan If the estimated time is too long click Cancel and enter larger intervals P Estimate Time Cancel Start Pt pti Scan Mode Fine Meas Mode Normal NP H Interval 0 2537 Interval 0 0209 Areas 1 Points 3 0 01 08 57 Figure 11 40 Estimate Time e Stop immediately stops the scan e Finish begins scanning points As the total station measures points within a predefined area each point displays on the image 11 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning SREE Scanning Figure 11 41 Scanning in Progress Scanning without an Image To start working select the Scanning icon The Scanning scre
189. by Range on page 14 47 Select points for rotation from the map or the list using the icons to the right Tap the Layer icon to rotate all points on a layer selected in the Layers screen e Translate By select either Coords Pts or Az Brg Dist Ht as the translating method Coords Pts all the selected points are moved in the same direction and distance as between the points locations set by the next two fields From Pt From Crd and To Pt To Crd In the first case define only the point name in the second case define the local coordinates and the height of the location AzBrg Dist Ht all the selected points are moved in the specified direction by a specified distance These parameters P N 7010 0492 14 49 COGO Calculations are set through the Azimuth Bearing field Hz Dist and Vert Dist fields e Calc press to translate the selected points A successful message displays E gt The limit for translation of points is 20 000 meters Scale To scale a set of points tap the Scale icon The Scale screen displays To scale the distance of a range of points relative to a Base Point on the Scale screen set the following parameters Select Points Scale A 2 points selected Base Point 4 Scale Factor 1 05 Scale Heights Figure 14 62 Scale e Select points select the points to scale using one of the following methods By Range press to display the By Range
190. c3 and TDS Raw Data RAW Control Points are exported together with Localization data Scanning Data For Scanning Data you can export the following formats all scanning data are exported for D 3000 Project fsc Roads Survey For Roads Survey data you can export the following formats TopSURV X Section Survey xss or Find Chainage Station Report txt Job History For Job History data you can export the following formats CSV Comma delimited csv and Text report txt 4 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File The Job History file is formed if the Enable Job History box is check marked on the Global Settings screen see Setting Global Parameters for Job on page 3 87 TINs Data For TINs data you can export the following formats AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg or LandXML xml When exporting to AutoCAD DXF or Drawing file tap the Settings button to select desired drawing styles to represent points and lines for details see On the Settings on page 4 23 TopSURV stores surfaces in TN3 files in the DTM directory Select a desired TN3 file to export in the Select TN3 screen Figure 4 38 FAcelect TH3 OK Cancel AE DXF oK Cancel Type 73 Files TMS Type JautocaD DXF C dxf ba GJ TPS TopSURV DTM BJ TPS TopSURV EFiles L THS aj MYCS hit sur THIS Name der TN3 Figure 4 38 Select TN3 Select File e OK opens the
191. cal Conn Mode Radio Port Model Channel Frequency 469 5000 MHz Set Radio Figure 13 5 Configure Link e Conn Mode select the connection mode either Cable or Radios Only e Type shows the current modem type set for the current survey configuration To change the modem from the Survey menu tap the Configure icon in the main menu e Radio Port Model Channel Frequency parameters for the radio connection Store Design Pt Layer The Store Des Pt screen Figure 13 6 on page 13 8 selects parameters for storing staked points e Display Store Pt Info check mark this box to display the Store Point screen before storing a staked point e Layer selects a layer from the drop down list e opens the Layers screen to edit layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 P N 7010 0492 13 7 Staking out FAstore Des Pt OK Cancel Figure 13 6 Design Pt Layer Design Offsets The Design Elev screen Figure 13 7 sets an offset to add to the elevation of the point when staking points roads or DTM s FAbesian Eley oK Cancel Design Eley e7 783 m Road Offset e DTM Offset T Figure 13 7 Design Elevation Initially the point height is shown To set the elevation offset check mark the appropriate box and enter the offset you want Click OK to save the setting 13 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Store Point The Store Pt Info screen Figure 13 8
192. cal coordinates scale parameter the azimuth and plane slope angles deflections corresponding to north and east directions FA cocaiization details Results Map Projection Name None Geodetic Origin Lat H 55 511811 Lon E 37 30577 Ht 191 656 1 Local Origin North 24391 26 East 7610 194 Ht 129 351 f Scale 1 000 1035 ks Figure 8 9 Localization Results e The Map tab Figure 8 10 displays the job graphically with the localization points marked by blue triangles FA cocaiization details i0000 m ASSEOIR Figure 8 10 Localization Map P N 7010 0492 8 11 Setting up GPS After editing coordinates of a localization point a confirmation message displays Figure 8 11 on page 8 12 to select whether to recompute the localization or not Localization parameters changed Recompute now press no to recompute later Figure 8 11 Recompute Localization GPS Survey Status To check the status of a GPS survey tap the Status icon The Status screen displays Figure 8 12 on page 8 13 The Status screen contains information about the current position of the receiver RTK status and the satellite constellation 8 12 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status Position The Position tab displays the following information yo MAS Pos sys Plots SVs g 13 13 utc 11 36 07 Fixed Status Local m North 14066 969 East 12118 581 Eley 87 578 gt PDOP
193. ccupation point and backsight azimuth or point and defines the laser height and point information Ar C Laser close Occ Point 101 Laser HI 1 0 m Point 107 Ef code A Press the Fire Button on the Laser to measure Figure 9 12 Config Laser P N 7010 0492 9 13 GPS Survey e Occ Point enter an occupation or select an occupation using the map or list buttons Az to Pt BS Azimuth BS Point enter either a BS azimuth value or select a BS point using the map or list buttons e Laser HI enter the height of the device above the occupation point e Point enter the name of the point being measured The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code displays the current point code Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list E the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen See On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point See On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see Topo Survey on page 9 2 e OK saves the settings and returns to the Topo screen For the Laser with an Encoder the Laser BS Meas screen
194. code resides e The List button opens the Layers screen to edit layers For details on editing layers see Edit Layers on page 6 23 Type Ti Fi Layer st ka aal Point Line Attribute Style ee Dash Width 3 Pt v Figure 6 21 Edit Code Line Type 6 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Codes e Attribute the radio buttons selected on this tab determine whether the prompt for code should be at the beginning of a line area Start or at every point along the line area Each Node e OK saves the changes closes the screen and returns to the Code Attributes screen ia Layer Point Line Area Attribute Style illl Fill Style vert IO Transparency 50 og Figure 6 22 Edit Code Area Type Edit Attributes On the Attributes screen you can set attributes for the code selected on the Code Attributes screen Figure 6 18 on page 6 16 This screen sets different parameters depending on the attribute type chosen from the Type drop down menu Bool boolean with default True or Faulse Date Time Integer Menu Real Number or Text P N 7010 0492 6 19 Editing Job Data For Date Time type use the default current date and time for the code attribute or set the date and time from the drop down list Figure 6 23 P Attributes oK Cancel Attrib Name Default _ 07 11 03 04 30 03 Required Figure 6 23 Date Time Attribute e Attribute Name the name of
195. coordinates to a near ground reference surface and vice versa Datum shows the datum for the selected projection The drop down list of datums is available only when the current grid projection allows appropriate datum selection The List button opens the Custom Datums screen to add edit user defined datums The NAD83 datum has three independent realizations in TopSURV with respect to the WGS84 datum NADS3 NAD amp 3 ITRF96 and NAD amp 3_NO_TRANS to reflect the updates to these datums The original intent was for WGS 84 and NAD 83 to be identical The mathematical definition of the ellipsoids WGS 84 and GRS 80 differs slightly due to the choice of defining constants and number of significant figures The maximum discrepancy between a Cartesian X Y Z coordinate projected onto both ellipsoids is 0 1 mm at 45 degrees latitude So for all intents and purposes consider the ellipsoids to be identical The confusion arises when we start to talk about the realization of the WGS 84 and NAD 83 datums When NAD 83 was first realized in 1986 it used the same control stations as WGS 84 3 72 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters some of which were Doppler stations which were accurate to about one meter Consider the datums to be identical Since this time there have been several realizations of WGS 84 the latest being WGS 84 G1150 which was performed using data from IGS tracking stations collected during
196. cstadieaacieaanaie 8 27 Configure RE S1 Repeater cc cscccs essccssevsecenenss 8 32 TAM P SO PHONG sairaana RS 8 33 Known Point Initialization ccccceccsssseseeseeeeeeeeeees 8 34 Initialize GPS Feriae N neues 8 35 TT AMSMIM CED Abas oaeiae devtel ddatiaiadestaloeceas 8 35 TEANS MIET ce sisenededinceneaivasdenesed rete 8 36 Transmitter POSITION eisicescss ronin a 8 37 KOWA PON eao a 8 38 FRESE CUOU agea A 8 39 SENSOR soraa EO S 8 42 Field Calibration eeosesoeenssssssserssssssceresssssceressssseeee 8 43 Chapter 9 GPS SUIVCY mi ciihrna i 9 1 Topo UV CY aaa TE D 9 2 The Lopo Meni scriere EA 9 3 Da eaaa ate AA net Soha TE RMT 9 7 TTS CUS aa a E E AEAN E 9 9 B E E E A A E A A T 9 10 Azimuth Distance Height cccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 9 12 Laser Configuration ccccccesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 13 Gnid Sep orena 9 16 Auto TOpo SUVOV sone eiia E 9 18 AMO FOPO orrae E E 9 19 Fs ea aN ee O 9 21 IVA Scents tacisah dacaned A T 9 21 KES CCO a E A 9 22 PIG OCAUIOMN e a TR 9 22 Tape Dimensio sosaren R 9 23 Chapter 10 Setting up TS Survey ssassssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 10 1 Backsig nt SUCVCY oosa ea a aaa 10 2 Multi Point Backsight cc cccccccsssesssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 10 6 Check Back sient saesson 10 8 Slalom and OMSET werra sacked ds E 10 8 Set Measurement Mode soisin 10 9 Vili TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents ICSC COI scsi atenme phen atete ates A 10 11 Occapat
197. ct w Angle Sequence Bsf FS Plunge FS BS Num Sets Tolerances aM Hz sec Dist 0 006 m ec 5 0 VA 5 0 5 Auto Advance Set Auto Accept Meas Distance Averaging Measure Reverse Dist Figure 11 2 Mode e Sideshot Dir defines that the measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct position of the Total Station e Sideshot Dir Rev defines the measurement to a single point that is taken using the Direct Position and the Reverse Position of the Total Station that is Plunge Flip and Rotate the Total station by 180 degrees to get the reverse measurement This measurement method is known as Multiple in which case the Set tab displays in the SS Dir Reyv screen One set consists of one direct and one 11 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo reverse measurement These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical and Horizontal circle centering errors e Ang Dist Sets Dir Rev defines that during the measurement the instrument uses the specified Angle sequence to perform repeated measurements In this case the SS Dir Rev screen also has the Set tab The sequence of four measurements constitutes one set One measurement is the backsight in Direct face or the Foresight in Reverse face in two positions of the Total Station These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical and Horizontal circle centering errors e Next opens the next Mode screen to set the order and the type of the measurements i
198. cted custom grid systems e Edit opens the Custom Projection screen Figure 3 73 on page 3 76 to edit parameters of the selected custom grid system e Add opens the Custom Projection screen Figure 3 73 on page 3 76 to enter parameters for the new custom grid system Ar custom Projections Projection Figure 3 72 Custom Projections Add New Custom Grid System P N 7010 0492 9 75 Configuring a Job On the Custom Projection screen enter or select the following parameters for the custom grid Figure 3 73 e Name enter the name of the new projection e Type select a sample projection to construct a custom projection from the following list of available types Albers Equal Area orthembadic conic projection Cassini Soldner cylindrical projection Double Stereographic conformal azimuthal projection Lambert conformal conic projection Oblique Mercator conformal cylindrical projection Stereographic conformal azimuthal projection Transverse Mercator conformal cylindrical projection see Figure 3 74 on page 3 77 for more information Ar custom Steed Finish Cancel Name Type Transverse Mercato v Datum WGS8 v Region oho Note m TM projection Figure 3 73 Custom Projections Add New Custom Grid System e Datum select the datum for the projection from the list of available types e Region displays the region e Note
199. ction set e The list of stations contains the following columns Station the station where the cross section is applied Left X Section Right X Section the names of the cross section templates for the left and right side of the road cross section relative to the center line The left and right side cross sections can be different If two or more cross sections are defined the am intermediate cross sections are calculated using interpolation e Delete deletes the station with the road cross section from the list e Edit opens the X Section screen Figure 7 30 on page 7 32 to edit the selected cross section e Add opens a blank X Section screen P N 7010 0492 7 31 Editing Roads Cross Section The X Section screen Figure 7 30 contains parameters of the road cross section at a given distance and a plot of the cross section FA x section oK Cancel Station m X Sect Both v X Section Left Right Figure 7 30 Cross Section Parameters e Station Chainage the station where the cross section is applied or the distance to this station e X Sections selects whether the cross section is created for both parts of the road or only for the left or right side of the road The screen display changes depending on the selection e Left X Section Right X Section the cross section templates for the left and right side of the road cross section These can be selected only from the
200. d known area Sq m Job Units Acres press to set the area units Rotation Pt the point in the list that fixed for rotation of a ray to the new point to form a polygon of the requested area Direction the direction of rotation COGO Point the name of the new point calculated Code select the code from the drop down list or press the attributes list El icon to open the list of available attributes Back returns to the previous screen Calc calculates the coordinates of the new point and displays it on the Results tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items Edit Point Lists see Edit Point List on page 6 34 and Help to access the help files The Results tab Figure 14 42 on page 14 34 shows the results of the calculation P N 7010 0492 14 33 COGO Calculations Ara Area Hinge ES Area Results Map Ei coGo pti 10018 North 1443 563 m East 1078 976 m Total Ar m 2 740323 7 Acres 184 4206 Plot Area m 2 250000 0 Acres 61 77635 Difference mA ANSAT F Save Figure 14 42 Hinge Results Tab The Map tab Figure 14 43 shows the view of the polygon Fe Aknown Area Hinge Map Figure 14 43 Hinge Map Tab The Line Method The Line method computes the coordinates of two points that along with two other known points form a quadrilateral of the known area To start t
201. data transmission either TPS Topcon FSCS mode to scan for the best channel on which to communicate or PDL to communicate with the Rover PDK radio e Channel selects a dedicated channel for the PDL protocol e Power selects the level of power for RF transmissions either IW or 2W 9 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Pese kaso ra REN CEE Protocol ADL Channel jo Power oy w Figure 3 14 UHF Modem For the FH915 Modem Internal HiPer Lite the screen sets the operating channel for the modem Figure 3 15 2 ra EEE Channel Figure 3 15 Parameters for the FH915 Modem For FH 915Plus Modems the Internal Hiper Lite FH915Plus the Internal GR 3 FH915Plus and RE S1 radios the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 16 on page 3 18 e Location selects the territory North America Australia or New Zealand to adjust the frequency range and RF power level for the modem P N 7010 0492 3 17 Configuring a Job e Protocol selects the operation protocol either FH915 Ext recommended if all receivers on the jobsite are equipped with FH915Plus radios only or FH915 recommended if there is a mixture of receivers with FH915 and FH915Plus radios on the jobsite e Channel selects the operating channel Ar E Radio SFY Finish Cancel Location orth America Protocol FHO1S Ext na Channel 1 aa Figure 3 16 Parameters for FH915 Modems For Pacific Crest
202. de close Code v Figure 6 5 Find by Code e Code select a code from the drop down list P N 7010 0492 6 5 Editing Job Data e Search starts the search process and returns to the Points screen highlighting the first point with the code selected Editing a Point The Edit Point screen Figure 6 6 shows the properties of a point to edit Point Info Layer Style Check Poir Point 100 kA code hbe ow F E Note WG564 m Lat 55 303974574 Lon a7 363960014 Ell ht 150 015 Figure 6 6 Add Edit Point Edit Point Information On the Edit Point screen Figure 6 6 tap the Point Information tab and edit the following fields e Point enter the name of the point e Code enter a code for the point either manually or from the drop down list The lower field marked by the 4 sign is intended for entering a string for a Code Type of Line or Area the Attributes List icon opens the Point Attribute screen to set the code and attributes available for the code chosen Figure 6 7 on page 6 7 e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing two items 6 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e WGSS4 the field for the coordinates of the point in the current coordinate
203. diately stops the scan and returns to the Area screen After scanning is completed the screen returns to the Area screen to set a new area for scanning The points icon denotes the scanned points in the list of points Figure 11 46 on page 11 44 P N 7010 0492 11 43 Total Station Survey Settings Close Find Code Find Point Find Next Delete Figure 11 46 Scanned Points Monitor This function is activated only with robotic total stations To enable the monitor survey select the Monitor icon in the Robotic mode The MonitorPoint List screen displays Figure 11 47 on page 11 45 Monitor PointList The points to be measured are added to a point list which is then loaded using the Monitor Pointlist screen Figure 11 47 on page 11 45 displays 11 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Monitor i Ar e Pointlist Close gt A Point List PointList1 Toa z g occp i Monitor m2o0 m Figure 11 47 Monitor Point List After the point list is selected the Next button opens the Monitor screen Monitor The Monitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms The measurements are recorded into the raw data file Optionally the raw measurements or the computed points can be output to a file or communication port in either an FC 6 or GTS 7 format The output format and destination is accessed from the Monitor Options screen when confi
204. dms m Measure Line Points Figure 11 18 Line and Corner Measurement Tab Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo icon icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Code code for the offset point to be stored Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens a list of available attributes The menu icons next to the Attributes List icon and the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen display the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen HR sets the target height above the mark rod height Line Pti obtain measurements to determine first point defining a line 11 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo e Line Pt2 obtain measurements to determine first point defining a line e Corner obtain the horizontal angle to locate a point on line at the corner e Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode Line and Offset The Measurement tab Figure 11 19 on the Line amp Ofst screen contains data for determination of a point distant from a line defined by two points e cetera cose z 4 Meas Data Map Offsets Point 5 occpt4 fi HR 2 000 m HA 230 0600 V A 90 1053 5D 800 005 dms m Take measurements in any order Figure 11 19 Line and Offset Measurement Tab e Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note
205. ds e Get Data retrieves the transmitter s data e OK returns to the Init mmGPS screen Figure 8 41 on page 8 36 showing the calibration data P N 7010 0492 9 35 Setting up GPS FA transmitter oK Cancel Name Com Port com ki ID NiA Calibration Data NifA Firmware Version NifA Clear Data Get Data Figure 8 40 Transmitter Transmitter Position The Position tab Figure 8 41 sets up the transmitter s height and location at the jobsite Data Pos Sensor Figure 8 41 Initialize mmGPS Position Tab e Name the name of the transmitter e JID the channel of the transmitter e Point the point over which the transmitter is setup 8 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Initialize mmGPS e Resect opens the Resect mmGPS screen to perform a resection for an unknown transmitter location e Edit opens the Known Point screen to select the point over which the transmitter is setup e Delete removes the transmitter from the list Known Point On the Known Point screen Figure 8 42 select the known point over which the transmitter is setup and enter the transmitter height AACS OK Cancel Point TR fell Transmitter Name 21 ID 1 Ht 1 303 m Slant v 2m Fixed Tripod Figure 8 42 Known Point e Point the point over which to set up the transmitter select using either the map or list icons next to the Point entry box e Transmitt
206. e Station ACUSHNET MA Yersion NjA Frequency NjA Signal Quality N A Figure 8 26 Beacon Status 8 24 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status BR 1 Configuration When a survey is configured to use the differential corrections receiver BR 1 see Config Beacon on page 3 34 the Beacon screen Figure 8 27 displays to set up the BR 1 radio Ar EE OK Cancel Country usa Station ACUSHNET MA Automatic Scan Mode Figure 8 27 Beacon BR 1 Setup e Config sends the appropriate configuration command for BR 1 radio channels Figure 8 28 When Automatic Scan mode is on all four channels of the BR 1 automatically scans frequencies until one of the channels find the available Beacon Signal After the signal is found the channel maintains this frequency Ar EE oK Cancel country usa Station ACUSHNET MA Automatic Scan Mode mn Radio Command Config Figure 8 28 BR 1 Configuration P N 7010 0492 8 25 Setting up GPS When Automatic Scan mode is off the frequency and data transfer rate of the known Station selected is set only to channel a of the BR 1 receiver The other channels do not work Configure Radio The Config Radio screen sets up the parameters for the rover base repeater radio modem This screen displays the parameters which were set in the job configuration see Base Radio on page 3 11 and Rover Radio on page 3 29 The set of the parame
207. e road To change the azimuth of all other elements remove the check mark from the Tangent to Previous Item box on the bitmap in the upper left corner of the screen azimuth since road elements are usually tangential Caution should be exercised when setting the to each other Turn the direction of turn Select either the Right value clockwise direction or the Left value counter clockwise direction e Dir the direction of movement along the spiral TS to SC entering the turn or CS to ST exiting the turn e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Horizontal Alignment screen Intersection Point To add an intersection point select the Intersection Point option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Horizontal Alignment screen The Intersection Pt screen Figure 7 13 on page 7 15 displays 1 The traverse points on the turn have the following markers TS traverse spiral SC spiral circle CS circle spiral and ST spiral traverse 7 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment P intersect Pt oK Cancel KH Point IPI North 6178584 m East 153778 2 m g Length 1 30 000 m E gt Length 2 30 000 m Figure 7 13 Intersection Point e Point the name of the intersection point Either enter the name manually with the coordinates specified in the North and East fields and a height of zero or select it from the map or the list e North
208. e x deletes the session from the export list e Goto sleep mode puts the receiver into sleep mode if the box is check marked e Refresh refreshes the export list e Export starts the connection with the receiver e Close closes the screen without performing export The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen opens the pop up menu that consists of two items e Edit Session opens the Sessions screen to edit the sessions For details see Sessions on page 6 45 e Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 4 37 Exporting Data Notes 4 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 5 Importing Data To import data tap the Import icon The Import function is used to add points codes and attributes Code Libraries Roads Cross Section Templates Point Lists and Localization from another job controller or file The Import menu Figure 5 1 includes options to 1 Import data from a job From Job 2 Import data from another controller From Device 3 Import data from a file From File From Device From File Figure 5 1 Import Menu The Help Icon g opens a pop up menu giving access to help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 5 1 Importing Data Importing From Job To import data from a job tap the From Jo
209. e 10 21 Rotate the Remote Total Station P N 7010 0492 10 21 Setting up TS Survey Notes 10 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 11 Total Station Survey The Survey menu Figure 11 1 for Total Station surveys opens by the Survey icon in the main menu and allows to perform the surveys e Topo e Auto Topo for Robotic mode e X Section e Find Station e Tape Dimension e Missing Line e Scanning for Robotic mode e Monitor for Robotic mode y 2 Ar ie resect B amp as Na T Survey pS r Auto Topo x Section 53 P Find Station Tape Dim Missing Line Scanning Monitor Figure 11 1 TS Survey If needed menu options are not visible tap Configure Menus icons to enable these options in the Config Menus screen Pa P N 7010 0492 11 1 Total Station Survey The Help Icon rg opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 Topo To toggle between sideshot modes Figure 11 2 press the Settings button on any Survey screen Select one of three measurement methods from the Meas Method drop down list Sideshot Dir Sideshot Dir Rey or Ang Dist Sets Dir Rev For a description of other parameters on this screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 for more information Ar E Cancel Meas Method Sideshot Dire
210. e 3 13 except as provided for cell phones Figure 3 29 on page 3 31 e Rover PIN a personal identification number for the Rover e Base Phone Number the phone number for the Base e Add adds it to the Phone number list e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Survey Parameters screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 9 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey All settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Prover kaso r ERE CEE Rover PIM 1234 Base Phone Number 805 0 0 215 Phone number list 203 0 0 215 Figure 3 29 Rover Cell Phone Parameters RE S1 FH915 Repeater The RE S1 is a transmit receive repeat FH915 spread spectrum radio modem The RE S1 FH915 Repeater screen configures the RE S1 modem as a stand alone repeater to increase the range between a Base and Rover in spread spectrum systems such as with the GR 3 or HiPer Lite GPS systems Figure 3 30 on page 3 32 This screen opens by selecting the Config RE SI Repeater option from the pop up menu on the Rover Radio screen Enable RE SI Repeater Configuration enables using the RE S1 as repeater Connect Type selects the connection of the modem either to the receiver or the controller to setup the modem Connect Port Setup sets the properties of the connection port Defaults sets the port properties to the defa
211. e Add Edit Point screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Roads screen TS Stakeout The Stk Slope screen Figure 13 54 on page 13 54 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current station in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the necessary direction and the value of the distance to the targets see Figure 13 53 on page 13 53 Tapping in the current station string enables the bitmap menu to display the station number and the offset value of the current point e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking fa advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station e Store takes a measurement and opens the Store Point screen see Store Point on page 13 9 to store the current position as a point e Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen e Close saves the changes and closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays a pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout 13 5 TopSURV Reference Manual Slope ae 505 a F HA 6 5506 dms Left 0 563 m Towards TS 2 441 m Fill 10 200 m Turn Lett 0 0954 dms Figure 13 53 Stakeout Road Stakeout Slope To start the slope stakeout select the Slope icon Figure 13 54 on page 13 54 The
212. e Manual Curve Solutions Radius amp Points To define a curve using the PC and PT points and a radius parameter tap the Radius amp Points icon The Radius amp Points screen displays Figure 14 33 The Radius amp Point tab contains the initial data for the task Ar ete amp Points Close A i Radius amp Pts Retell Path Map ecpont Bo pTpont M Turn Right v Curve Small v RP Point 0017 Ew Figure 14 33 Radius amp Points PC Point the Point of Curvature either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points PT Point the Point of Tangency either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points Radius Deg Curve Deg Chord the radius parameters of the curve Turn the direction of turn relative to the PC Point Curve defines the curve in the circle that should be considered The radius and the PC and PT points define two curves one with delta less than or equal to 180 degrees Small curve and the other with delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees Large curve RP Point the point to be defined Enter the name and select the code if necessary Calc press to calculate the curve parameters P N 7010 0492 14 27 COGO Calculations The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two options Edit Points see Points on page 6 2 and Help to access the help files
213. e Status screen For details see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 e Point displays the current point name The icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code displays the current point code enter manually or select from the drop down list tap on this icon to open the Code Attributes screen to set the attributes for the selected code for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The icon next to the Attributes List bitmap displays the pop up menu containing three items P N 7010 0492 9 3 GPS Survey Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point See On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen Figure 9 3 The Note screen is used for additional information When exporting raw data for example to a TDS Raw Data file this information is in the Point Description field The note should be entered in the Note field Press OK to store the Note RS corner Figure 9 3 Note e Ant Ht sets the antenna height and its type slant or vertical I When using mmGPS 4 the height of the Rover Pas antenna includes the height of the PZS 1 sensor with 5 8 inch plug Epoch count shows the number of accepted epochs e Rem Time shows remaining time to stop logging when in PP Kinematic or PP DGPS mode 9 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey e Start start
214. e end of line Each field may be preceded by a number of space characters which should be ignored but may contain spaces after the first non space character GTS 600 v3 1 JOB job name description DATE date time NAME surveyors name INST instrument id UNITS Meter Feet Degree Gon SCALE grid factor scale factor elevation ATMOS temp press STN ptno ins ht stn id XYZ X easting Y northing Z elevation BKB ptno backsight bearing backsight angle BS ptno target height FS ptno target height pt code string number SS ptno target height pt code string number CTL control code pt code 2 string no 2 optional HV HA VA SD HA VA SD A 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Raw Data Formats OFFSET radial offset tangential offset vertical offset PTL_OFF offset along ref line offset perpendicular to line vertical offset NOTE comments MLM from point to point delta HD delta VD delta SD RES_OBS ptno target height observation count XYZ if present follows the STN record BKB if present follows the BKB record or STN record if no BKB CTL if present follows the FS or SS header record HV SD o HD must follow a BS FS or SS header and follows the CTL if present OFFSET may follow any SD or HD record Example GTS 600 v3 1 JOB TEST1 TOPO COLLECTION NAME FRED INST GTS 7 UNITS M D STN 1 1 500 STN SS 1001 1 500 BLDG 01 SD 0 0000 84 4650 9 746 SS 1002 1 500 BLDG 01 SD 0 0000 84 4650 9 746 SS 1
215. e following surveys 1 Topo 2 Auto Topo 3 X Section 4 Find Station 5 Tape Dimension P gt iq 7 Fi Survey ee Auto Topo X Section 29 Find Station Tape Dim Figure 9 1 GPS Survey Menu The Help Icon a opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 tap Configure Menus icons and enable these i If there is no choice for some needed menu options 7 options in the Config Menus screen P N 7010 0492 9 1 GPS Survey Topo Survey To set up a survey with topo points tap the Topo icon The Topo screen Figure 9 2 records stop and go survey Ar rope Settings Close Topo Data Map Offsets ae Fed H V Pg 100 2201 3 200 10 Point iz E Code Aw Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertical Epoch Count o Figure 9 2 Topo Points Survey The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu that varies depending on survey mode used Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 Rover Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen For details see Configure Radio on page 8 26 Config RE S1 Repeater opens the Configure Radio scr
216. e station where the alignment has a parabolic shape e Insert opens a blank Long Section screen in which to insert an element at the selected location in the list Figure 7 24 e Add opens a blank Long Section screen for adding an element to the end of the list Figure 7 24 e Delete deletes the element from the road e Edit opens a screen with properties of the selected long section The Long Sections screen Figure 7 24 adds a new long section to the vertical alignment Prong Section oK Cancel Station 0 00 000 m Elevation 149 938 m Curve Type Circular Arc v Arc Radius 0 000 m Figure 7 24 Long Section e Station the station distance from the beginning of the road e Elevation the height at the station P N 7010 0492 7 25 Editing Roads e Curve Type selects the type of curve to add either Parabola or Circular Arc The plot at the bottom of the screen shows the element appearance VC Length or Arc Radius the length of the parabola at the station assuming that the station is located in the middle of the interval or the radius of the arc depending on the type of curve selected e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Vertical Alignment screen Cross Section Templates A cross section template is a template for the creation of a complex cross section view of the road The cross section template consists of several sets of segments cut slopes a
217. e the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen 13 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets e Close saves the changes and closes the screen I Tapping in the current station string enables the floating information screen to display the point ras name the note design elevation if enabled the station number and the offset value of the current point Figure 13 25 on page 13 24 FAstare Close O5 Note 106 Design Eley 100 000 m Station 44 00 000 m Offset 5 000 m Right F i me Dsan 27 1836 dms 0 001 m Towards TS 0 052 m Fill 2 900 m Turn Lett 0 0024 dms Figure 13 24 General Stakeout information e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu of options For details see Points on page 13 2 Stakeout Intersections amp Offsets To stakeout Intersection amp Offsets tap the Intersection icon The 2Line amp Ofst screen Figure 13 25 on page 13 24 stakes out the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets The first screen defines one line Line 1 and the offset of the first parallel line The second screen Figure 13 26 on page 13 25 defines another line Line 2 and the offset of the second parallel line The intersection point of these two parallel lines defines the stakeout point The first screen contains parame
218. easurement entered manually or selected from the map or list BS if not already measured takes a BS measurement before staking Stakeout opens the level Stakeout screen Figure 13 13 on page 13 13 13 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Stakeout The level Stakeout screen Figure 13 13 displays the design point and the BS point For every measurement taken Elevation and Cut Fill values are updated HI 93 696 Eley 92 146 Fill oa es Poa Figure 13 13 DL Stakeout e Store opens the Code Attributes screen to set a code for the staked out point see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 and then opens the Edit Point screen see Editing a Point on page 6 6 e Meas measures the elevation and computes a cut fill value Staked out points are not added to the Level Run instead they are listed as observed points on the Points screen Figure 13 14 on page 13 14 P N 7010 0492 13 13 Staking out Find Code Find Point Find Next Delete Figure 13 14 Points Staked Out Lines To stakeout a line select the Lines icon The Line screen Figure 13 15 contains the initial data for the line stakeout Eae EEE E H y gt 100 2201 3 200 10 3 Start Point 1 10000 Ht Comp Ht of Start Pig Ant Ht 2 000 m vertic Stakeout Figure 13 15 Stakeout Line e Start Point sets the starting point of the reference line e End Point Azimuth sets the direction of t
219. eatures String Layer and Note For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e Ant Ht enter the antenna height and type of measurement select either vertical or slant Local m for RTK mode the field for the coordinates of the antenna in the selected coordinate system Changes its name based on the chosen value on the Coord System screen that is WGSS4 or Local see Coordinate System on page 2 5 the Display screen see Display on page 2 8 and the selected distance units see Units on page 2 6 8 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Starting the Base Auto Pos for RTK mode measures the position of the current point Once pressed the button becomes a Stop button press to stop position averaging The average of the coordinates displays and the Pos field appears with the number of measurements used for averaging Duration and Remaining Time for PP Kinematic mode displays the time passed and the time that remains since the beginning of the survey Start Base sets the receiver as a Base transmitting data The Help icon at the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing the following items depending on the survey type and configuration chosen Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 String toggles on the String field to enter a string for the code Also the sign appears Base Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen t
220. ect the point points to be rotated by one of the following methods By Range press to display the By Range screen For a description of the By Range screen see Select Points by Range on page 14 47 Select points for rotation from the map or the list using the icons to the right Tap the Layer icon to rotate all points on a layer selected in the Layers screen 14 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Adjusting Points e Rotation Point sets the center of rotation either enter manually or select from the map or the list e Rotation Method select either Rot Angle if the rotation angle is input directly or Azimuth as a difference between the new and old azimuths bearings e Rotation Angle enter the value of the rotation right angle e Old Azimuth enter the value of the old azimuth e New Azimuth enter the value of the new azimuth P ee Close Ao ec Close Select Points Select Points B ee B ee 2 points selected 2 points selected Rotation Point 4 Rotation Point 4 Rotation Method Rot Ang Rotation Method Azimuth ka Rotation Angle E dms Old Azimuth s5 dms New Azimuth 20 0000 dms Figure 14 59 Rotate e Calc press to rotate the selected points A successful message displays The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 e Help accesses t
221. ed instrument the elevation of the line of sight of the telescope above the datum FS a rod reading taken on the foresight point Elev elevation of the point BS Dist the horizontal distance from the level to the rod on a backsight point FS Dist the horizontal distance from the level to the rod on a foresight point Sum BS Dist the sum of backsight distances Sum FS Dist the sum of foresight distances SumBS SumF S the difference between the sums of BS and FS measurements Accumulated Ht the difference between the sum of the backsights and the sum of the foresights Notes any additional information on the point _ All columns except PT Name can be selected to display see Display Settings on page 12 6 e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing eight items Stake Point opens the Stake Point screen to stake out a point Stake Point List opens the Stake Point List screen to stake out points from the list see DL Stakeout on page 13 12 Stake Elev opens the Stake Elev screen to stake out at a rod point see DL Stakeout of Elevations on page 13 42 Vertical Offset opens the Vertical Offset screen to set the vertical offset to apply at the point 12 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Level Run Display Settings opens the Settings screen to select the columns and the order of the columns to dis
222. ed to Radio contains the parameters of the connection port e Defaults returns all the values to defaults in the Receiver Port Connected to Radio fields e Back returns to the previous screen e Next displays the parameters for the chosen modem see Rover Radio Parameters on page 3 30 Opens the Survey Parameters screen if the selected modem type does not require additional settings e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen All settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Rover Radio screen displays the pop up menu that contains an option e Config RE S1 Repeater enables using the RE S1 radio as repeater see RE S1 FH915 Repeater on page 3 31 P N 7010 0492 9 29 Configuring a Job Rover Radio Input If Multiple Ports mode is selected depending on the number of ports selected Figure 3 23 on page 3 25 there can be two Rover Radio screens to configure radios for data input Figure 3 28 Prove kato GRE EE Radio Modern 4 Receiver Port Connected to Radio Fort Baud 36400 Data my i EJE Parity None Stop 1 Defaults Figure 3 28 Rover Radio Input Use only one radio to receive corrections from the Base Fa Rover Radio Parameters Modem parameters for the Rover receiver are the same as for the Base receiver for details see Base Radio Configuration on pag
223. ee points and an angle measurement Ar Settings amp Meas Data Map Offsets poin Gee EM code m vy JORS 2 000 m HA 230 0600 A 90 1053 50 800 005 dms m Measure Plane Points Figure 11 20 Plane Point and Corner Measurement Tab 11 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Point name for the offset point to be stored The icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Code code for the offset point to be stored enter either manually or select from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens a list of available attributes for the selected code The menu icons next to the Attributes List icon and the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen display the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen HR sets the target rod height above the mark Plane 1 obtains measurements to determine the first point in a plane Plane 2 obtains measurements to determine the second point in a plane Plane 3 obtains measurements to determine the third point in a plane Crnr obtains horizontal and vertical angle measurements to determine corner point in a plane errors The three points defining a plane must be not be colinear all on the same line Settings opens the Mode screen to set the sideshot mode The Data Map and Offsets tabs are similar to that of the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement P N 7010 0492 1
224. een opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 13 on page 3 16 e For UHF Modems Internal HiPerXT UHF The Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 14 on page 3 17 P N 7010 0492 Configuring a Job e For FH915 Modem Internal Hiper Lite The Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 15 on page 3 17 For FH915Plus Modem Internal Hiper Lite FH915 Plus Internal GR 3 FH915 Plus and RE S modem The Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 16 on page 3 18 For Pacific Crest and Internal HiPer Pac Crest Radio Modem The Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 17 on page 3 19 For Satel modems the Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 18 on page 3 20 For AirLink CDMA Multicast UDP the Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 19 on page 3 20 Base Radio Parameters The Base Radio Parameters screen contains the following parameter settings for the radio For the cell phone the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 12 on page 3 15 e Base Pin a PIN number for a cell phone e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Rover Receiver screen if the selected modem type
225. een to setup the RE S1 radio as a repeater see Configure RE S1 Repeater on page 8 31 Config OmniSTAR opens the OmniSTAR screen to start the OmniSTAR service For details see Configure OmniSTAR on page 8 22 Reset RTK resets the ambiguities and sets the receiver in the Rover RTK mode The settings being used are based on the selections in the survey configuration 9 9 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey Reset DGPS sets the receiver in the Rover DGPS mode The settings being used are based on the selections in the survey configuration mm GPS Options opens the mmGPS Options screen in RTK survey see mmGPS Options on page 8 32 Notes opens the Notes screen Figure 9 4 on page 9 5 Edit Points opens the Points screen Inverse opens the Two Point Inverse COGO task screen For details see Inverse on page 14 3 PTL Mode switches on the PTL Point To Line Mode The screen changes its appearance to Topo PTL For details see PTL Point on page 6 12 Grid Setup opens the Grid Setup screen to set a grid to be displayed with the Map see Grid Setup on page 9 16 Help accesses the Help files The Topo Menu The Topo tab on the Topo screen Figure 9 4 on page 9 5 contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey Figure 9 2 on page 9 2 The upper right corner of the screen displays the status of information on th
226. eferred session in the Sessions panel and highlight the necessary receiver in the Receivers panel Press this button P N 7010 0492 6 45 Editing Job Data e press to delete the session from the sessions list or receiver e OK saves the changes and closes the screen Session Setup The Session Setup Figure 6 51 screen contains the parameters of the session Ar Setup oK Cancel Site Name Biter Type static we Start Time Bunday IA la o 4 End Time Sunday vi jp 4p 4 Interval Min Svs Ant Type CR 3 Ant Ht 1 000 m Vertical v Figure 6 51 Session Setup e Site Name the name of the occupation point e Type sets the type of session survey either static or kinematic e Start Time End Time sets the start and end time of the survey e Interval sets the interval between measurements e Min SVs sets the minimum satellites available for the survey e Ant Type sets the type of antenna e Ant Ht sets the value and type of the antenna height e OK saves the changes and returns to the Sessions screen Figure 6 50 on page 6 45 The antenna type specified in this screen does not display in the receiver file But the antenna height recorded in the file includes offsets for the specified antenna type 6 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Simulation Setup Simulation Setup Simulation Setup becomes available in the Edit Job menu when GPS Simulation mode is enabled see Figure 3 6
227. ems Edit Points displays the Points screen For details see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files Edit Point List The Edit Point List screen Figure 6 40 on page 6 35 is similar to the Add Point List screen and consists of two tabs Point List and Properties The Point List tab displays the points included in the list to edit 6 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Lists Point List Properties Point List Mame ae List of Poin y fy 1 Point Info Sel Pts ha Figure 6 40 Edit Point List e Point List Name the name of the Point List List of Points the list of currently selected points Use the up and down arrows to the left to select a point Adding a point to the list can be performed in two ways Tap the map plot on the right The large Map screen opens for details on the screen icons see Points on page 6 2 Select the points by tapping them on the map the two sequentially tapped points are connected with a line Press Close to return to the Edit Point List screen Select Points displays the five methods of adding points select either By Range By Code By CodeString By Radius From Map or From List Enter in this sequence set the range check the codes set the center point and the radius of the area then select the points from the map or use the list e Point Info shows the point information of the currently selected single point
228. en displays To scanning without an image select the type of scan orientation either Vertical Horizontal or Incline Figure 11 42 Cancel Scan wijo Image w Orientation Horizontal w Figure 11 42 Scan without Image e Next opens the Area screen Figure 11 43 on page 11 42 P N 7010 0492 11 41 Total Station Survey Area The Area screen Figure 11 43 selects the starting and ending points for the scanning area Select or meas Point 1 Figure 11 43 Select Area e Meas measures the orientation point The menu icon opens the menu options Meas From Map From List used to take a measurement or to select an existing point from a map or list e Next displays the same Interval and Estimate Time screens as for Scanning with Image mode Figure 11 44 Cancel AS Sue Time Cancel Start Pt point1 Start Pt pointi Scan Mode Fine Scan Mode Fine Meas Mode Normal NP Meas Mode Normal NP H Interval 0 0300 Interval Y Interval 0 0300 Areas 1 X Dist Points 7B Y Dist Time 00 15 36 Figure 11 44 Interval and Estimate Time 11 42 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning Scan Press the Finish button on the Estimate Time screen Figure 11 44 on page 11 42 to start scanning Figure 11 45 Ar Settings Cancel Scanning Figure 11 45 Scanning in Progress As the total station measures points within the predefined area each point displays on the screen e Stop imme
229. ence Manual Backsight Survey Notes opens the Notes screen PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Point on page 6 12 Display Coord if selected the coordinates of the previous point measured displays below HR data Help accesses the Help files The Data tab Figure 10 6 on the Multi Pnt BS screen shows the results of the current measurement and the scale factor and standard deviations of the coordinates The Map tab shows all points in graphic mode For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 The Set tab on the Multi Pnt BS screen Figure 10 6 displays measurement results of the sideshots being done during one set the Res HA residuals of the horizontal angles and the measured and initial parameters HR HA and so forth Ao eee ea Settings 4 Meas Data Map Set 0 1334 1 500 0 2704 1 500 0 1329 1 500 a Figure 10 6 Multi Point BS Meas Set Tab e Remove deletes the highlighted measurement from the set e Re Meas replaces the current measurement with a new measurement e Accept stores the new coordinates in the database P N 7010 0492 10 7 Setting up TS Survey Check Backsight The BS Survey screen Figure 10 7 shows information about the backsight point errors am HD and VD does not display if only an azimuth direction has been entered for the backsight Aoi Surrey ings BS Setup Data
230. ence Manual Configuring the Survey e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Config Modem Connect screen Figure 3 25 on page 3 27 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used For PP Kinematic and PP DGPS surveys the screen contains the same parameter fields as for RTK survey type except for the RTK Format field Figure 3 23 Prover Recyr Cancel Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Elevation Mask fzo deg Antenn Map Ant B agp Ant Ht 0 000 m H vertica v Peripherals l Figure 3 23 Rover Receiver Options for PP Kinematic and PP DGPS The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Rover Receiver screen displays the pop up menu containing two items e Receiver Setting check mark the box on the Receiver Settings screen appear to turn the charger mode off e Help accesses the Help files The Next button opens the Rover PP Setup screen Rover PP Setup The screen contains parameters for logging rover raw data Figure 3 24 on page 3 26 P N 7010 0492 9 25 Configuring a Job e Raw Data Logging the set of logging parameters log to the receiver set the logging rate and select if the name of the receiver file is automatically set or user defined In the latter case the corresponding dialog box displays at the logging start The Start Log option selects whether t
231. ens the Instrument screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used 9 59 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Ar TE Cancel Name My Conventional Type Conventional Figure 3 53 Survey Screen Instrument The Instrument screen Figure 3 54 contains typical total station parameters and communication settings Parsun E Manufacturer Topcon v Model ats Series v Figure 3 54 Instrument Screen e Manufacturer defines if a Topcon instrument is used For Conventional and Reflectorless surveys also Sokkia Nikon and Leica instruments can be defined For survey emulation Manual Mode can be used P N 7010 0492 9 53 Configuring a Job e Model sets the model of the instrument taking into account the type of the configuration For Robotic types only motorized models are displayed in the drop down menu e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Connection Mode screen for Total Stations and the Cable screen for Levels e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Table 3 2 gives Topcon instrument models and their available functionality Table 3 2 Instrument Model and Functionality Topcon Instrument Models GTS Series Conventional GTS 1 GTS 3 Conventional GTS 100N GRT 2000 Conv
232. enter any additional information about the projection if preferred 3 76 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters e Next opens another Custom Projection screen to enter the new projection specifications depending on the selected sample projection e Finish saves the changes closes the screen and returns to the Custom Projections screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings If the Transverse Mercator projection is the selected type for constructing a custom projection the Custom Projection screen displays the following fields Figure 3 74 e Central Meridian sets the longitude of the central meridian of a zone The central meridian is a line of constant longitude zero eastings at the center of a graticule of a zone of custom projection The central meridian is usually used as a base for constructing the other lines of the graticule e Scale sets a constant scale factor along the central meridian By this number a distance along the central meridian of custom projection is multiplied to obtain the actual distance on the datum of the projection LatO latitude of a point chosen as the origin on the central meridian of the zone grid Ar custom Stee Finish Cancel Central Scale 1 0000150 Lato 40 0700000 East0 10000 000 m Northo 10000 000 m Figure 3 74 New Projection Specifications P N 7010 0492 3 77 Configuring a Job e East0 Nort
233. entional and Robotic GTS 220 Conventional GPT 1000 Reflectorless GTS 230 230W Conventional GPT 2000 Reflectorless Bluetooth GPT 3100W Reflectorless GTS 600 Conventional GPT 6000 Reflectorless GTS 720 720W Conventional GPT 3000 3000W 3000L Reflectorless GTS 800 8 10 Conventional GPT 7000 7000W 7000L Reflectorless GTS 800A 810A Conventional and GPT 8000 Reflectorless Robotic GPT 8200 Reflectorless GTS 820A Conventional and Robotic GPT 9000 Reflectorless GTS 900A Robotic GPT 8000A 8200A 9000A GTS 3000 Reflectorless Reflectorless and Robotic AP L1A Conventional and Robotic IS Robot Reflectorless and Robotic AP L1 Conventional and Robotic DL 101 Level GMT 100 Conventional DL 102 102C Level Nikon instrument model is DTM SET Leica instrument models are TCR400 or TCR700 In Robotic mode the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen opens a pop up menu that contains two options Sokkia instrument models are SET3 SET4 SETS SET300 SET400 or SETSOO Monitor opens the Monitor Options screen Figure 3 55 on page 3 55 to set a Monitor survey Help accesses the Help files 9 54 TopSURV Reference Manual Monitor Options Selecting the Monitor item opens the Monitor Options screen Figure 3 55 to set the parameters for data output in the Monitor survey Available options vary depending on whether a File or a COM
234. er enter transmitter parameters Name displays the name of the transmitter ID displays the transmitter channel Ht and m sets the height of the transmitter from the ground to the mark on the transmitter s side and the method of height measurement 2m Fixed Tripod check mark this box if using a 2 meter fixed tripod e OK uploads the transmitter calibration information to the sensor P N 7010 0492 9 37 Setting up GPS Resection On the Resect mmGPS screen Figure 8 43 measure an unknown transmitter location using the Rover and three or more points The Sensor tab Figure 8 43 is identical to the title tab on the Init mmGPS screen and is used to set up the sensor a SS oa E Sensor Resect Data Receiver Port D 1 Transmitter ID Sensor Gain Auto we _ Init Time Improvement Known Trans Horz Pos Figure 8 43 Resection Sensor Tab Receiver Port sets the receiver port that connects the receiver to the sensor Transmitter ID displays the channel of the transmitter Sensor Gain select Auto to automatically control the mmGPS receiver s detection level of the transmitter s signal Init Sensor starts the initialization of the sensor Init Time Improvement enable to use the mmGPS signal to assist in initializing the GPS receiver This option is useful to decrease the initialization time when satellite visibility is limited for example trac
235. er manually or select from the drop down list e The Attributes List icon opens the list of available attributes e The menu icons next to the Attributes List icon located in the upper left corner of the screen displays the same lists as those shown on the Horizontal Angle Offset screen e HR sets the target height above the mark rod height e gee shows the battery and memory status for the controller 11 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo After the sideshot is taken the Enter Distance Offsets screen Figure 11 15 displays to enter 3 distance offsets Enter Distance ie OK Cancel Fra 10 000 m gt Ea m 1 1 000 om Figure 11 15 Distance Offset Screen Away Toward sets the distance between the current point and the projection of the offset point on the line of sight Right Left sets the distance between the offset point and its projection taking into consideration the location relative to the line of sight Up Down sets the height of the point relative to the current position e Meas performs the measurement Figure 11 14 on page 11 14 e Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode Figure 11 14 on page 11 14 The Data Map and Offsets tabs are similar to those in the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement P N 7010 0492 11 15 Total Station Survey Hidden Point The Measurement tab Figure 11 16 of the Hidden Pt screen defines a poi
236. es to Export screen first displays see Figure 4 4 on page 4 4 e Use Filters for Points and Point Lists data types check mark this field if filters by code and by range should be used for exported points In this case the Points to Export screen first displays see Figure 4 5 on page 4 5 P N 7010 0492 4 13 Exporting Data Data Format Topcon Fl 4 tc4 Select Types Of The Points Use Filters Figure 4 14 Points to File e Next opens the To lt name of Format gt screen to set the destination file e Cancel returns to the main screen The options which are available on the To File screen depend on the format selected Refer to the following sections for detail Topcon Text Custom If the Text Custom format is selected the To File screen Figure 4 15 shows the ASCII File Properties field Sint Format Topcon Text Custom tet Select Types Of The Points Use Filters ASCII File Properties Use Type for Attributes Use Quotes for Text Values Figure 4 15 Points to Text File 4 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File e ASCII File Properties this field appears only for the text format of the exported file defines the conditions of the exported file interpretation e Next opens the To Text screen Figure 4 16 On the To Text screen Figure 4 16 select a destination directory and the name of the created file ATO concer Type Text Files
237. eters on page 3 44 AS Road Settings Close amp Road Road T Road A Ess 0 00 000 a a m ligo m al Include a Point Ant Ht 2 000 000 vertica Figure 13 50 Stakeout Road Next opens the second Stakeout Road screen P N 7010 0492 13 49 Staking out e Close saves the settings and closes the screen The second Stk Road screen Figure 13 51 displays the properties of the cross section on the stakeout station and performs the stakeout of all selected points AS Road Settings Close sta f2 00 000 Ee fast Sta Interval 100 0 m Segment Pt la AE le oe 0 500 m Surface Figure 13 51 Stakeout Road Station the station where the stakeout is performed The arrow buttons change the station number by the value of Station Interval Eed Es advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station Sta Interval the interval of the station increment Segment Pt the point code of the current segment The arrow icons next to this field moves the current segment point along the cross section The result displays on the scheme at the bottom of the screen Right Left Offset the horizontal offset from the current segment point Up Down Offset the vertical offset from the current segment point Select the type of template offsets 13 50 TopSURV Reference Manual Road Centerline both the horizontal and ver
238. ext opens the Coordinate Systems screen Figure 2 5 on page 2 5 e Finish saves the settings and returns to the main screen applied only after opening a TopSURV screen which can perform and store measurements in the job file z The job settings of a survey configuration are For more information on how to work with configurations see Configuring the Survey on page 3 2 2 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Creating a New Job Coordinate System The Coordinate System screen Figure 2 5 contains coordinate system information for the new job Ao a System Cancel Projection UTMNorth Zone_37 36E fE za F Use Grid to Ground Datum wese4 v z Geoid lt none gt m Figure 2 5 Coordinate System Projection specifies the projection to be used The Browse button opens the Projections screen Use Grid Ground only available if a grid projection is selected If this box is check marked the Browse button is activated to open the Grid to Ground Param screen Datum shows the datum for the selected projection The drop down list of datums is available only when the current grid projection allows datum selection The Browse button opens the Custom Datum screen Geoid Model shows the geoid selected if any The Browse button opens the Geoids List screen see Geoid List on page 3 84 Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Units screen Figure 2 6 on page 2 6
239. ference Manual Topo e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon displays a pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e HR sets the height of the target above the mark rod height e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing seven items Adv opens the Backsight Survey screen for setting the next traverse point as the next occupation point The current occupation point becomes the next backsight point Edit Points opens the Points list Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen Notes opens the Notes screen PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Display Coord if chosen the coordinates of the previous point measured displays below the HR data Figure 11 4 on page 11 4 Help accesses the Help files e Measure Foresight Direct Check and enable Traverse Point to open the screen to set the coordinates of the point manually I If more than two points have been tagged as Traverse Points the ADV button displays a list box Pas with all tagged Traverse points from which to select the next occupation point Select OK to display the Backsight screen which automatically updates as
240. follows Name North East Elev Code String Example 101 12 3200 45 1000 23 1200 a 123 102 34 2000 9 4000 3 2200 103 2 3340 8 4500 45 0000 b P N 7010 0492 A 17 File Formats 104 78 6000 45 0000 56 6000 This format is also used for PTL coordinate system In this case the format is Name North East Elev Code String First Reference Point Name Second Reference Point Name Custom Format with Quality Control information This format contains a set of user defined fields in the user defined order The following fields are available Name E Lon N Lat Ell ht Elevation Notes Codes Codes amp Strings Codes amp Attributes FullCodes Date Solution Type VRMS HRMS Time PDOP HDOP VDOP Num of GPS Num of GLONASS Design Elevation Station North TopSURV Reference Manual Code Libraries Station East Station Elevation Delta North Delta East Delta Elevation Code Libraries The following sections describe the code formats used in the import export code libraries Topcon Data Dictionary Format TDD Topcon s Data Dictionary Format supports String Integer Float and List types as fields of the codes The Draw properties is also supported All exported codes are stored in the one file Each code is placed on a new line The format is as follows CodeName 1 lt Point R G B MStyle Line R G B DashStyle Width gt field 1 FIELD_TYPE field NCFIELD_TYPE CodeName 2 lt Point
241. g set VA Vertical Angle measurement in the corresponding set SD Slope Distance measurement in the corresponding set e Remove deletes all measurements from the set e Re Meas displays the sideshot page to measure a new angle set e Accept saves the measured point e Settings opens the Mode screen see Figure 11 2 on page 11 2 11 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Offsets The Offsets tab Figure 11 9 on the SS Dir screen contains a set of tools to define the offsets Faso Eee Meas Data Map Offsets Hz t Angle Dist Offset Hidden Point 2 Line Section Line amp Corner Line Offset Plane amp Corner Figure 11 9 Offsets e Hz Angle defines a point using the horizontal angle from one point and the distance to another see Horizontal Angle Offset on page 11 10 e Hz Vt Angle defines a point using horizontal and vertical angles see Horizontal Vertical Angle on page 11 13 e Dist Offset defines a point giving the ability to add or subtract distances horizontally and vertically see Distance Offset on page 11 14 Hidden Point defines a point on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground point see page 11 16 2 Line Section determines a point by the intersection of the two lines Each line is defined by two points or two measurements see Two Line Intersection on page 11 17 Line amp Corner
242. ger A Alpha character X Space F Real number D and E Double precision w specifies the width of the field d specifies the number of decimal places Example 3D23 17 specifies that each data line will consist of 3 double precision records representing the X Y and Z coordinates of each point Each field will be 23 columns wide and each number will have 17 decimal places 003 ORDR 4 1 1 2 3 Change Order This command changes the order of the items of information in a string element The first two dimensions of a point on a string are always Cartesian Coordinates but the other dimensions may describe different properties of the point In this example the first part of the line O03 ORDR will always remain the same The last part of the command line indicates how the data block is organized 4 1 indicates that 1 row of data in the data block is used to define each point for 3D features this is pretty straight forward but MX had more complex string types such as Geometry Strings that have 12 dimensional points that may be described over a number of lines A 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats 1 2 3 indicates the string point dimensions the data should be assigned to X Y Z for a 3D string 080 CECI 7 3 String Input This command indicates what type of string is being created The MX string label being created in this example is CECI and each point on this string will have 3 dimensions 7 3 0 86278740
243. gh the center point also called a Radius Point the radius value and the starting and ending points on the circle also called a PC Point of Curvature and PT Point of Tangency Using these values the Curve Solutions finds other Curve parameters Tap the Curve icon to access the Curve menu for various curve solutions Curve Three Points Curve PI amp Tangents and Radius amp Points 14 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve Solutions Radius amp Pts Figure 14 23 Curve Menu Calculating the Parameters of a Curve To calculate the full set of parameters for any curve given one for each of the curvature parameter and the length parameter of the curve tap the Curve icon The Curve Solution screen displays Figure 14 24 The Curve Solution tab Figure 14 24 contains the initial data and a window for the curve plan Ar TE Solution Close Curve Solution Results Map G enon Rm Figure 14 24 Curve Solution P N 7010 0492 14 19 COGO Calculations Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the curvature parameters of the curve Length Chord Tangent Mid Ord the length parameters of the curve Turn the direction of turn relative to the starting point Calc press to calculate the parameters of the curve The Results tab shows the calculated parameters Figure 14 25 Ar is Solution Curve Solution Results Map Radius 20 000 m Length 20 000 m Chord 19 177 m Degree 286 2844
244. guring the total station see Monitor Options on page 3 55 P N 7010 0492 11 45 Total Station Survey The Monitor screen is used to control the monitor survey Figure 11 48 Ar Settings Close Remote Data Map i OSes Point Cycle Time bo Secs Auto On v HA 359 5951 A 90 5407 5D 4 258 dms m t Press Start when ready Rot Start Figure 11 48 Monitor e Points the point name e Interval interval listed as the Cycle Time If a prism cannot be found after a period of 15 seconds the total station rotates to the next point in the sequence e Auto If the Auto combo box is set to ON the total station automatically rotates to the next point in the sequence and records a measurement If it is set to OFF the total station rotates to the point but allows the user to verify or correct the centering to the prism prior to taking a measurement The monitor function always completes the entire sequence even if the measurements take longer than cycle time e Start initiates the sequence of measurements which repeats at the interval you want e Qlock sends the Quicklock or Turn Around command which causes the total station to search for the RC 2 e Search causes the instrument to search for the prism 1 RC 2 is the Remote Control System 2 for optical communications For instructions of how to operate the RC 2 device consult the instruction manua
245. h0O false Easting and Northing of the origin These constant values are added to all negative eastings and northings so that only positive values of easting and northing are recorded is e Back returns to the previous screen Latitudes is entered as a positive number in the Northern Hemisphere and as a negative number in the Southern Hemisphere Longitudes are positive for Eastern directions and negative for Western directions from the GMT line e Finish creates the custom projection and returns to the Custom Projection screen with the new projection added e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings From Grid to Ground Ground to Grid Transformation A ground projection is a grid mapping projection rescaled to convert point coordinates to another reference surface up to the average project elevation to produce near ground distance values The ground system can be rotated and shifted relative to the grid system The ground coordinates can be converted back to the grid projection TopSURV has three modes to set up grid to ground parameters Select one of these modes from the Parameters field Figure 3 75 on page 3 79 Scale Factor e Average Job Height e Origin Point 3 798 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters For Scale Factor the Grid to from Ground screen Figure 3 75 sets the Combined Scale Factor for Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid coordinate transfo
246. he Attributes List icon displays the String option to switch on the String field see Topo on page 11 2 Station Chainage sets the station distance where the cross section is surveyed Interval the increment of distance towards the next station The Station Chainage and Interval fields display ONLY if the road is selected P N 7010 0492 11 25 Total Station Survey e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items Edit Roads enables the Roads screen See Roads on page 7 2 Help accesses the Help files e OK saves the changes and opens a screen to perform sideshot measurements Toggling between the sideshot modes is performed from the Measurement Method field in the two Mode screens opened by the Settings button in the XSect Dir XSect Dir Reyv screen XSection Direct The XSect Dir screen Figure 11 24 performs the usual observation work relative to the cross section Paseo ES _ Meas Data Map Point moz gY Code ibe fi HR 2 000 m Measure Foresight Direct _ Traverse Point Figure 11 24 Cross Section Direct The survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line If the road has not been set define the plane On the first station the survey is performed so that the next point has a different code for example A B C cl D E F Press the Close button to a
247. he Help files Select Points by Range In the Range of Points field on the By Range screen Figure 14 60 on page 14 48 the range can be set by enumeration of the points separated by commas or by specifying the first and the last pointincluded in the range Press the OK button to save the specified P N 7010 0492 14 47 COGO Calculations range The number of points selected display on the corresponding task screen in the Select Points field Fey Range oK Cancel Range of Points 10004 10005 Name Separator f gt a Use for Range Separator Figure 14 60 Select Points by Range Translate To translate a set of points tap the Translate icon The Translate screen Figure 14 61 on page 14 49 displays To move a group of points selected on the Translate screen select a translation method select either Coords Pts or Az Brg Dist Ht 14 48 TopSURV Reference Manual Adjusting Points Select Points Select Points By Range EA B Er Range EA ie ae 2 points selected 2 points selected Translate By Az Dist Ht v Translate By Coords Pts v Azimuth 45 0000 dms ea 2 Hz Dist 200 000 m FA translate Close Ar translate Close Translate Vert Dist 1 000 m EF Ho Figure 14 61 Translate e Select points select the points for translation from one of the following methods By Range press to display the By Range screen For a description of the By Range screen see Select Points
248. he Line task select the Line icon The Known Area Line screen Figure 14 44 on page 14 35 displays 14 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Area The Area tab Figure 14 44 contains the initial data of the Line task 3 K Area Li Close g cd nown Ared ine Close Area Results Map Point List PointList1 Line List of Poir 1 bo 3 lt 4 lt a Figure 14 44 Line Area Tab 1 For details on description of this screen see The Hinge Method on page 14 31 e Next opens the second screen of the Area tab Figure 14 45 Ara Area Line ir Area Results Map Total 746323 7244 Reqd Area 40942 F Pti of Pt2 of l pti Figure 14 45 Line Area Tab 2 e Total Area the calculated area of a polygon formed with the currently selected points of the point list e Regd Area the requested known area e Ptl of Edge Pt2 of Edge the known points of the quadrilateral P N 7010 0492 14 35 COGO Calculations e COGO Pt 1 COGO Pt 2 the calculated points on the lines emanating from the Pt of Edge and Pt2 of Edge respectively e Area the known area e Sq m Job Units Acres press to set the area units press to enter a code select a code from the drop down list or press the icon to open the list of available attributes e Calc calculates the coordinates of the line points and displays it on the Results tab For the correct oper
249. he Map tab on the Topo screen Figure 9 8 shows the stored point graphically On the Map tab Figure 9 8 just like the Topo tab you can collect topo points using the Start button Use the Sim Sim Off button to turn on off Simulation mode Ar oro Settings Close I Topo Data Map Offsets Figure 9 8 Topo Map Table 9 1 describes the stored point icons that display on the Map tab Table 9 1 Stored Point Descriptions i 2 ee Lee the code of a point attributes for the code toggles between the Start button and the status icons For a detailed description of the Map view see Viewing Map on page 15 1 9 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey Offsets The Offsets tab Figure 9 9 sets the offset point for the measurement e str cose 47 Topo Data Map Offsets lt n p eneen Laser Figure 9 9 Topo Offsets Line opens the Line screen to define a point set by the offset from a line See Figure 9 10 on page 9 10 Az Dis Ht opens the Azimuth Distance Height screen to define a point specified by the offset from a point See Figure 9 11 on page 9 12 Laser only available when a laser device has been added in the Config Survey opens either the Config Laser screen see Laser Configuration on page 9 13 or the Laser BS Meas screen to define a point specified through a backsight see For the Laser with an Encoder on page 9 14 Settings ope
250. he base station transmits its differential correction data This parameter will instruct the rover receiver to output the RTK position at the same rate at which differential corrections are updated P N 7010 0492 3 49 Configuring a Job Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous screen Figure 3 50 is used to customize the user interface using the following options FA Miscellaneous Finish Cancel Display coordinates after meast Prompt for antenna height Prompt for feature codes Beep on storing points Figure 3 50 Miscellaneous e Display Coordinates after Measurement if enabled the Store Point screen automatically displays computed coordinates after a GPS measurement is performed and the point information before the point coordinates are stored into the database e Prompt for antenna height if enabled the Antenna Setup screen appears to set the antenna parameters e Prompt for feature codes if enabled the Point Attributes screen appears to specify the code and attributes and notes before a surveyed point is stored e Beep on Storing Points if enabled makes a sound every time a point is stored Total Station Configuration On the Survey Style screen Figure 3 51 on page 3 51 select a TS configuration from the drop down list either My Conventional My 9 50 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Reflectorless My Robotic or My Level The Configurations screen displays Figure 3 52 on
251. he drop down list BS Setup returns to the Laser BS Meas screen to set up a new BS Grid Setup Tap the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Topo screen Select the Grid Setup option from the pop up menu The Grid Setup screen Figure 9 15 displays The Grid Setup screen sets up a grid for the Map to help while collecting data AS Setup oK Cancel Origin Point fluga2 amp 45 0000 dms Spacing m y North 5 000 x East 5 000 Figure 9 15 Grid Setup e Display Grid check mark this box to display a grid on the Map tab e Origin Point specifies the origin point for the grid e Azimuth Bearing Azimuth Bearing To Point sets the corresponding value to the direction of the grid lines e Spacing m specifies the intervals between the grid lines along the y North and x East axes 9 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey e OK displays the grid on the Map tab Figure 9 16 with the specified settings Ed Q I Topo Data Map Offsets JAJNE e pa ma o M Figure 9 16 Grid in Map If a grid is set up the Topo screen Figure 9 17 displays an offset of the current position from the grid origin point Ar ope Settings Close 1 Topo Data Map Offsets Fe H VY E 103 2 201 3 200 ig 2 Point fing cs k Code A M Ant Ht 2 000 T Vertical Epoch Count o Grid Offset 3476 06 7551 7 Figure 9 17 Grid Off
252. he last specified file path is retained e Next opens the Survey Style screen Figure 2 4 e Finish saves the information and returns to the main screen The new job becomes the current job and uses the settings from the previously open job unless changed Select Survey Configuration On the Survey Style screen Figure 2 4 on page 2 3 select a survey configuration for the new job Parameters for the survey configuration do not depend on the job One configuration can be used for several Jobs FA survey Style Finish Cancel Select the Configuration for the Job or create a New Configuration GPS Config Name fui v TS Config Name my conrentiona v Figure 2 4 Select Survey Configuration P N 7010 0492 9 3 Working with a Job TopSURV contains several pre defined configurations My RTK My Network RTK My Network DGPS My RT DGPS My PP Static My PP Kinematic and My PP DGPS for GPS mode My Conventional My Reflectorless My Robotic and My Level for TS mode e GPS Config shows the GPS configuration for the current job The drop down list shows the configurations available for the GPS mode e TS Config shows the total station configuration for the current job The drop down list shows the configurations available for the TS mode i opens the Configurations screen to edit a configuration see Figure 3 3 on page 3 3 for details e Back returns to the previous screen e N
253. he layer e Layer Name shows the name of the layer e Visible hides shows the layer objects on the map e Note enter any additional information on the layer if preferred e OK saves the settings and returns to the Layers screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the changes Layer Style Objects Fi Layer Mame Li lel visible A Note pr 1_100 Figure 6 29 Edit Layer Name Style Tab The Style tab plots parameters for lines and points on the layer Do the following to set parameters for the lines and points on the layer Figure 6 30 on page 6 25 6 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Edit Layers e Point Style selects a color and a symbol for the Point e Line Style selects a color a style and thickness for Line e Area Style selects a fill color a fill style and transparency for the Area e Color opens the Select Color screen to set the color for the layer see Figure 6 12 on page 6 12 Layer Style Objects Point Style A Filled Triangle aa Line Style Solid v Width 1 Pt Ww Area Style INN assuage Transparency Sol Yo Figure 6 30 Edit Layer Style Objects Tab If the layer has objects the Objects tab Figure 6 31 on page 6 26 on the Edit Layer screen appears that displays points and other objects of the current layer P N 7010 0492 6 25 Editing Job Data Layer Style Objects as Lines Areas errr Area 9 Roads Figure
254. he point number in MS long integer format This record is 1 if the point is unused sequential files only Bytes 5 12 is the northing of the point in MS double precision real Bytes 13 20 is the easting of the point in MS double precision real Bytes 21 28 is the elevation of the point in MS double precision real Bytes 29 45 is the point descriptor in ASCH MOSS GENIO Example GENIO D JO119A 001 FORMAT 3F 14 4 003 ORDR 4 1 1 2 3 080 PTO1 7 3 1002 6092 1013 9337 2 3165 1007 5266 992 8522 1 9564 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 080 PT02 7 3 991 2378 1002 7609 1 5545 993 2974 1014 3845 2 3475 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 080 CD02 7 3 1002 6079 1013 9361 2 3148 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 080 CD03 7 3 1007 5318 992 8488 1 9562 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 A 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats 080 O0CC 7 3 1000 0000 1000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 080 PT01 7 3 1002 6079 1013 9361 2 3148 1007 5318 992 8488 1 9562 991 2376 1002 7602 1 5557 993 2994 1014 3841 2 3509 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 999 FINISH NEZ NEZ format is as follows Name North East Elev Code Example 101 12 3200 45 1000 23 1200 a 102 34 2000 9 4000 3 2200 103 2 3340 8 4500 45 0000 b 104 78 6000 45 0000 56 6000 This format is also used for PTL coordinate system In this case the NEZ format is Name North East Elev Code First Reference Point Name Second Reference Point Name NEZ with strings The NEZ with strings coordinate format is as
255. he reference line through another point or azimuth e Ht Comp the type of height computations for the stakeout point 13 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Lines At of Start Pt height of starting point the stakeout point has the same height as the starting point of the line Interpolate Ht the height of the stakeout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line e Antenna Ht for GPS mode sets the height of the antenna reference point ARP above the mark Also specifies the measurement type for the height either slant or vertical e HR for TS mode the height of the rod target e Stakeout opens the second Stakeout Line screen Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen For details see Stakeout Point on page 13 2 GPS Stakeout The Stakeout Line screen Figure 13 16 displays the north direction the reference direction the movement direction and the target line The panel on the right displays the parameters of the target Ag Gee Point Close E H Y Eg 100 2201 3 200 i Point k Left of Line 938 676 m Length of Line 200 000 m Dist Along Line 289 581 m Fill 0 001 m Azimuth 181 0842 dms Figure 13 16 Stakeout Line e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point on the Add Edit point screen E opens the map of the target layout and the current position P N 70
256. his alignment and sets the name of the new vertical alignment FART OK Cancel Name E YAL Type Elements Elements Long Section Figure 7 15 Add Vertical Alignment e Name enter a name for the new vertical alignment e VAL Type the method of creating the vertical alignment which include Long Section select to create the vertical alignment by sections The vertical alignment is presented as a set of sections between the stations where the heights are known usually these are the extremes of the vertical alignment line and the interval around the station where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic shape Elements select to create the vertical alignment by element starting and finishing where you want and starting again e OK opens the next Add Vt Alnt screens similar to those for editing vertical alignments P N 7010 0492 Editing Roads Edit Vertical Alignments Select the alignment and tap the Edit button on the Vertical Alignment screen Elements For Element vertical alignment types the Start Pt tab on the Edit Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 16 sets the parameters of the point starting the vertical alignment Start Pt Vert Alnt Name E HH start pt femal EJ EG Code ea E 149 008 om Start Sta 5 00 000 m Figure 7 16 Edit Vertical Alignment e Alnt Name the vertical alignment name Start Pt the start point name Enter manually if a new point name
257. i Figure 3 90 List Menu Icons 9 99 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 4 Exporting Data To export data tap the Export icon in the main menu The Export function is used to save points codes and attributes Code Libraries Roads Cross Section Templates Point Lists Localization Road Survey and Raw Data in another job controller or file The Export menu Figure 4 1 includes options to 1 Export data from an active job to a new job 2 Export job data to another controller 3 Export data to a file 4 Export GPS session settings to the receiver Figure 4 1 Export Menu Tap the Help Icon to open a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about TopSURV for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 4 1 Exporting Data Exporting To a Job To export data to a job tap the To Job icon Select a Job The Select Job screen Figure 4 2 selects the destination job to export to e Current Job list the job that is currently open e Job List a list of jobs to open e Created Modified shows the date the file was created and when it was last modified Browse tap to select a job from the disk if there is no job in the Job List that you want Select starts the export process wizard Follow the wizard s Next button until the Finish button is available Close
258. i on POM sec Sector scene ctieen adn a 10 11 Reseccion Deira artical E 10 12 SOFON Serene eT eee a er ee ee ee ee 10 14 Resection OPUG iis ict ects scotia E EAR 10 15 Remote Benchmark 22 osiveadetevaatactidad davai ddanoed doaeneeeoateatosses 10 16 Remote Control ncczetnenaie nei R 10 18 IR OU ACG 2 se facae sas E a 10 20 Chapter 11 Total Station SUMVCY sernam 11 1 ToD oenas teeuouuntusntcatsent coer susceanccaceeusnicta sania 11 2 SIGESMNOL DIEC isan eee heen 11 4 PITE MOG sisareen an a egsaeeace iat easton 11 6 OTISCUS ocx oi eco eh i aa eae eae 11 9 Horizontal Angle Offset ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 11 10 Horizontal Vertical Angle ccccccccccceseeeeeees 11 13 Distance OEE xinstsaicacceeiocen caus easeieteraciatueciactees 11 14 Hadden PONE sack isecseicd ase eens es canv ceceseewcsaecs 11 16 WO LANG IMC ESE CUION wie teste ag entree a 11 17 Tere and Corner seneni 11 18 Herne and OMSET sourin oioatataednatee isthe 11 19 Plane and Corner ccccccccccsssececceeeeeceeeaeeeeeees 11 20 AMO TOPO esente paste asnalcediaten tide 11 22 CTOSS SCCUOMNE aaia Bates teaccorsaaseelsaeuacadtacanseeases 11 25 MOCCUON Diret secosivsccevtededsetasservasbioreedstacessweseeeyes 11 26 Pits SUAGION eeann hana pales eicacaneeeabhoctecsouiens 11 27 Tape Dimensi OMi tartan db ae tastes 11 29 Re rerence ine suse iia n A EER 11 29 Tape Dimension POINTS siseseid 11 30 Wissing Line sieniniai a ra R 11 31 POC MINIS reaa E
259. ibrary to the selected file format On the To File screen Figure 6 19 select the file format from which to export codes of the current job The Next button runs the export process Cancel Data Code Library Format Topcon XML i xml Topcon XML xml DBF dbf Figure 6 19 Export to Code Library Edit Code On the Code screen Figure 6 20 on page 6 18 set the following code parameters e Name the name of the code e Desc the description for the code e Type the type of objects the code describes Point Line or Area A Code Style of Point Line or Area can be edited Each style has an associated plotting attributes and colors Point when Point is selected in the Type field color and symbol attributes for the point displays Figure 6 20 on page 6 18 The Color button opens the Color screen see On the Select Color on page 6 11 Line when Line is selected in the Type field color symbol for node style and thickness for line attributes display Figure 6 21 on page 6 18 P N 7010 0492 6 17 Editing Job Data Area when Area is selected in the Type field color symbol for node style and thickness for boundary fill color fill style and transparency attributes display on the Area tab Figure 6 22 on page 6 19 Type Fi Layer st Point Style Filled Circle Figure 6 20 Edit Code Point Type e Layer the name of the layer in which the
260. in First Row File Style Name N Lat E Lon Elev Codes w Figure 5 18 Text File Format On the Custom Style screen Figure 5 19 use the arrows up and down to move the parameters you want from the top Available panel to the bottom Order panel of the screen in ascending or descending order e Save saves the File Style and returns to the Text File Format screen A new string appears in the Select File Format drop down menu e Close returns to the previous screen Ar custom Style close Ell ht Motes Codes amp Strings Codes Attributes FullCodes Figure 5 19 Custom Style P N 7010 0492 5 17 Importing Data On the Coord System screen Figure 5 20 select the coordinate system the coordinate type and distance units for the data in the file imported e Coordinate Type select either WGSS amp 4 Datum Grid or Ground e Dist Units recalculate to either Meters Feet or USFeet FA coord System Cancel Projection SK 1o42 one_ 3bE to 426 ie E _ Use Grid to Ground Geoid lt none gt v Coord Type Grid Dist Units Meters Figure 5 20 Coordinate System e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Lat Lon Record Format screen if a type of geodetic coordinate is selected Figure 5 21 on page 5 19 e Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process See Import Status on page 5 8 e Cancel closes the screen w
261. includes options to 1 Start a base station or static occupation 2 Perform a localization of the current job 3 View current status information on positioning 4 Perform an initialization at a known point 5 Perform an initialization of mmGPS only for mmGPS aided RTK fy Setup GPS Localization Status Known Pt Init mmGP S Init Figure 8 1 Setup GPS Menu The Help gglicon opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 9 1 Setting up GPS Starting the Base To start a Base tap the Start Base icon The Start Base screen contains information about the Base receiver and can be used for the Base Receiver setting in an RTK survey wE H y ogg 2 201 3 200 10 ale ALE 1 200 m Slant v Local m North 14104 087 East 12118 012 Eley a8 711 i Start Base Figure 8 2 Start Base e Point select the name of the point of the Base receiver location from a map or list icon or enter manually The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Code the code of the point select from the list or enter manually Also the attributes can be selected with the help of the Attributes List icon 3 The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the list of additional f
262. ine is defined by the End point of the line or the azimuth to another point either enter manually or select from the map or from the list P N 7010 0492 14 39 COGO Calculations End Point Azimuth the ending point of the line the azimuth to another point either enter manually or select from the map or from the list Ht Comp select the type of height computations for the calculated points from one of the following Interpolate Ht the height of the calculated point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line At of Start Pt height of starting point the calculated point will have the same height as the starting point of the line Num Subs check and enable to designate the number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line For instance a value of 3 indicates a calculation of four points by subdividing the line into three equal segments SS Start Sta enter the starting station chainage of the line Next opens the Station Chainage amp Offsets screen Station amp Offset The Sta amp Ofst screen Figure 14 52 contains the settings for the calculated stations with offsets from the line Ar EENE Close EF 0 00 000 Ee f eg Sta Interval 10 000 m ight OFet 000 m CO m o COGO Point 10000 Ew Code ow Figure 14 52 Station amp Offsets 14 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Line Offset e Station enter
263. ing a repeater set the signal strength that the Base transmits Figure 8 30 Select either 700 mW 250 mW 500 mW or IW power Ar C Radio OK Type Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Connected to Radio Port Channel Power 1 WwW Protocol simplex Modulation DBPSK Get Freq Set Radio Figure 8 30 Config Base GR 3 Digital UHF Radio P N 7010 0492 9 27 Setting up GPS For UHF Modems the Internal HiPerXT UHF and Internal Map HP UHF the Config Radio screen Figure 8 31 sets the following parameters AS en Radio OK Type Internal HiPerXT UHF Connected to CGT Radio Port Protocol Channel Disconnect Connect Figure 8 31 Config Internal HiPerXT UHF e Connect opens a daisy chain and sends commands to setup the UHF radio and get correctional data for the rover For the base radio this button changes into Set Radio A confirmation message displays if the modem was setup successfully e Disconnect turns off the UHF modem e OK returns to the Status screen For the FH915 Modem Internal HiPer Lite set the operating channel for the modem on the Config Radio screen Figure 8 32 on page 8 29 8 28 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status Ao Radio OK Type Internal HiPer Lite Connected to TCa Radio Port Channel Disconnect Connect Figure 8 32 Config Internal HiPer Lite For FH 915Plus Modems the Internal GR 3 FH915Plus the Internal Hiper Lite FH915
264. ings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Solution Type Fis Only Auto Accept Mum Meas to Avg 3 Precision im Hz o 0150 Vert 0 0300 Auto Topo Method By Hz Dist v Interval 15 00 m Figure 3 42 Survey Parameters When configuring PP Kinematic or PP DGPS survey the Survey Parameters screen sets the following parameters Figure 3 43 asem Fish cancel Topo Number of Epochs E Auto Topo Method By Time ad Interval 5 00 sec Figure 3 43 Survey Parameters for PP Kinematic and PP DGPS e Topo enter the number of epochs to log on each location for stop and go survey e Auto Topo sets the time interval between locations for continuous kinematic survey The only method currently available P N 7010 0492 9 49 Configuring a Job Point Numbering The Point Properties screen sets a user defined value to increment decrement the survey point number Figure 3 44 Point Increment by vw Figure 3 44 Point Numbering Stake Parameters The Stk Parms screen Figure 3 45 sets the parameters that are used by a job during a stakeout These parameters can be changed with the help of the Settings button from any Stakeout screen in GPS mode Hz Dist Tolerance p 0500 m Reference Direction Moving Direction v Solution Type Fix Only Auto Accept Mum Meas to Avg f _ Precision im Hz o 0150 Wert 10 0300 Figure 3 45 Stake Parameters Hz Dist Tole
265. int the Point of Tangency either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points Radius Deg Curve Deg Chord the radius parameters of the curve Num Subs check and enable to designate the number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the curve For instance a value of 3 indicates a calculation of four points by subdividing the curve into three equal segments Turn the direction of turn relative to the PC Point SS the starting station chainage of the curve Next opens the Station Chainage amp Offsets screen Close saves the changes and closes the screen 14 42 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve Offset The Sta amp Ofst screen Figure 14 55 contains the settings for the calculated stations with offsets from the curve Ar EENE close Ee peegel Sta Interval 10 000 m G Right ontset m _ i m l COGO Point 10000 Ee Code eon Figure 14 55 Station amp Offsets Station the station along the curve The two arrows to the right decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Sta Interval shown in the next field Ee E left right arrows decreases increases the distance by the station interval uses the right left arrow keys of the keyboard to increase or decrease the station Sta Interval the station interval calculated Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the computed point with respect to the curve a
266. int Blocks e Line Style selects the style for lines either TopSURV Line Blocks AutoCAD Lines or AutoCAD Lines with Text Fields P N 7010 0492 4 23 Exporting Data e Use 3D coordinates check mark this box to use 3D coordinates e OK saves the settings and returns to the previous screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings FAcettinas oK Cancel Point style TopSURY Point Blocks Line style TopSURV Line Blocks na Use 30 coordinates Figure 4 27 Settings ESRI Shape If the ESRI Shape format type is selected the To File screen has the Store Description as Attribute option for point export available Enable this option to save point descriptions as attributes in the file Figure 4 28 on page 4 25 e Store Description as Attribute check mark this box to save point descriptions as attributes in the file 4 94 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Ari File Cancel Data Points v Format SRI Shape shp Select Types Of The Points Use Filters Do not export code attributes Store Description as Attribute For each feature code three shape fles will be generated within the selected directory Figure 4 28 ESRI Shape e Next with the help of the export wizard follow next screens to export points Note that while exporting TopSURV creates three files for every code in the selected directory Figure 4 29 ArH Teang ok GJ
267. int Lists Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets or Roads e Back returns to the previous screen e Next becomes available depending on the data selection and opens the screens Point Type s To Import if the points are filtered By Type see Figure 5 4 on page 5 4 Points To Import if the points are filtered By Range and Code see Figure 5 5 on page 5 6 Point List s or Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets Roads To Import if the corresponding data are check marked in the From Job screen Ar an 06 224 Cancel Points fall Paints ad Code Library Localization Horizontal Aligments Vertical Aligments _ Section Sets Roads Figure 5 3 Import From Job P N 7010 0492 5 3 Importing Data e Finish starts the import process if only Code Library and or Localization items are selected and All Points is selected Otherwise the option becomes available after all data are selected by the Next button e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Select Point Types To Import On the Pt Type s To Import Figure 5 4 select the types of points to be imported only if the Code Library Localization or Roads box is check marked and if the points filter by type has been enabled in the Import From Default screen Place a check mark next to the point type that you want Figure 5 3 on page 5 3 e Point Types check mark
268. ionera ne a E E 13 15 TS StAKCOU serenan 13 16 O E a anon ue ation eens stents 13 17 PS OMES ara actos son ae taaa 13 17 Saone O eS e 13 19 CIPS Staket coianrn inea ienai 13 20 Initial Point Name sassneninencd dinone hs 13 21 TS Sakeus essh ee cekiatieet ecaste ieee 13 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents Stakeout Intersections amp Offsets wo eeecceecec sees 13 23 GPS SIA COME wie ocaldcc cxatitowin core deeats 13 25 TS Stak COU Gaiisseskeie osetia A 13 26 Three Point Curve amp Offsets oo cceccceecceeeeceeee 13 27 CUES Co OTIS CUS enia sented ten uae beh uene 13 29 Spral CUMS saioe diesel dduncacooeesetioaes 13 30 Digital Terrain Model Stakeout ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 32 OPen DEM rre aa 13 33 CIPS SIAC OU aea E 13 34 TS SAC OU ce sceetece toacee dh Pas eatn ott asatdasten iat 13 34 Pontin Direction sors eis ei ee A 13 35 GPS Stakeout sescesatoncesss sasensdeiecies det geciveeatersenntertengsendss 13 36 TS DLAC OUL 25 sin tec ata a cate eee oun eee ces 13 37 Point Eet xeatraskth ti aGenacsenics acts athe shabas es Roatcena taints 13 38 Stakeout GPS and ES sasoira ii 13 40 Select Point for the Stakeout eee 13 40 Disital We vel StaAkKGOUl mesinin 13 41 DL Stakeout of Elevations 20 00 cece eeeccceccceeecceeeseeee 13 42 CUES Sane oh teeth oa antag A usiesa ah seeee os ehae ueenel 13 43 CPSP SlakGOUl caian 13 44 TS SUA COU ircscess ses dosasendenoseh T E 13 45 Neal aie Oa oa
269. ions ABER Figure 15 2 Toolbar Viewing Options Table 15 1 describes the toolbar icons Table 15 1 View Menu Toolbar Options Toolbar Icon Icon Description Zooms the plot inwards a Zooms the plot outwards Selects a frame of objects for zoom in display draw from left to right to get the object you want Displays all points in the job a Opens the Points screen to select a point to center the plot Opens the Properties screen Dy 15 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Toolbar Select Point The Select Point screen selects a point from the list to center the plot ArH Point oK 1 mE 6649 3 fa 1 4 fgl L l4 1 fgf 1 L l4 2 fg 1 Figure 15 3 Select Point Properties The Properties screen Figure 15 4 customizes the map view by adding properties to the points or setting the application to adjust the scale automatically _ Codes _ Icons _ Heights _ Auto Topo Scanned Show Alignments Station _ Templates Show Lines Current Position Autoscale Figure 15 4 Map Properties Place the check mark in the corresponding boxes to P N 7010 0492 15 3 Viewing Map Display along with the points their names codes icons and heights Show Auto topo and scanned points Display roads turn on the linework on the map Perform autoscaling the Autoscale field Autoscaling works to display the 30 most recent points of a survey on the map screen Start each ti
270. ions can be accessed from the main menu by selecting the Elevation icon Figure 13 42 or from top left menu in the Level Run screen for details see Level Run on page 12 2 On the Stakeout Elev screen Figure 13 42 select a backsight point and the elevation to determine the elevation e BS Point ja Elevation 150 m Stakeout Figure 13 42 Stakeout Elevation 13 42 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve e BS if not already measured takes a BS measurement before staking e Stakeout opens the level Stakeout screen for the elevation you want This screen is identical to that shown in Figure 13 13 on page 13 13 Curve To stakeout along a horizontal curve select the Curve icon Figure 13 43 The Curve screen displays to select two points of the Curve Curve Ar ie Settings Close PC Point 100 100_stk aa m PT Point Turn Right wi HR Curve Small aa 2 000 m Stakeout Figure 13 43 Curve e PC Point PT Point manually enter or select from the list or the map the starting PC Point of Curvature and ending PT Point of Tangency points on the circle e Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the radius parameter of the curve at the ending point e Turn specifies whether the curve turns right or left The radius and the PC PT points define two curves one with delta less than or equal to180 small curve the other with delta greater than or equal to 180 large cu
271. ious screen e Stakeout starts stakeout process GPS Stakeout The Stake screen Figure 13 21 shows the north direction and the relative position of the antenna and the target The panel on the right displays the parameters of the target Close I E H vY gt gt 100 2201 3 200 i194 0 10 000 k Hz Dist 1083 821 m Left 11 513 m Back 1083 760 m Fill 0 499 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 015 m Azimuth 180 3631 dms Figure 13 21 Stakeout e NextSta advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit point screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Line screen e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu of options For details see Points on page 13 2 In addition the Initial Point Name option is available to name the first staked point see Initial Point Name on page 13 21 13 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets Initial Point Name The Init Pt Name screen Figure 13 22 specifies the starting name for the points calculated for the stakeout task FA mit Pt Name oK Cancel Initial Design Point First 102 E Code O M Figure 13 22 Calc Point Names e First the name of the first point e Code the code of the points either select from the list or enter manually e E accesse
272. is entered the point is created with the height entered in the Ell ht field or in one of two other ways EA select from the map select from the point name list The Photo Notes icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point if preferred Code the point code enter either manually or select a point code from the drop down list The code of an existing point cannot be edited The Attributes List icon opens the Code 7 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Vertical Alignments Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the code selected e Ell ht the point height The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles the String field The sign icon also appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e Start Sta Start Chn the starting station number with distance to the station or the starting chain distance depending on a selection made in the Display screen for details see Display on page 2 8 The Vert tab on the Edit Vt Alnt screen Figure 7 17 displays a list of vertical alignment elements the vertical alignment plot and the ending station or chainage of each element Peo ve ane E Start Pt Vert Parabola A Vertical aa wat ATC
273. is the case when one TP point is available P N 7010 0492 11 5 Total Station Survey e BS opens the Backsight Survey screen to set the backsight point The information displays on screen e Meas takes the sideshot to the point The results display in the information window e Settings opens the Mode screen for a description of parameters on this screen see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 PTL Mode On the Point To Line PTL Mode screen the coordinates are defined through two reference points Figure 11 5 The line traced through these points is set as one axis and is as perpendicular as another FA Mode oK Cancel Start Ref Point 101 End Ref Point 105 Figure 11 5 PTL Mode e Start Ref Point End Ref Point the start number and the end number of the reference points select from either the map or from the list of points e PTL Mode On enables the PTL mode e OK saves the changes and returns to the previous screen 11 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo The Data tab on the SS Dir screen Figure 11 6 contains the results of the measurements along with the initial data Faso EA 4 Meas Data Map Offsets et k occpt HI 1 000m a Az 0 0001dms 5 occpti Code pm Hote HR 2 000 m North 485 780 m East 387 152 m Height 97 664 m Angle Right 230 0003 dms _ Azimuth 230 0004 HA 230 0005 dms J fe non NNA Ae s Figure 11 6 Sideshot Direct Data
274. is used to calculate Traverse and Sideshot points based on horizontal and vertical offsets along a direction which is defined by an azimuth or right left or deflection angles To start a Traverse task tap the Traverse icon Figure 14 68 The Traverse Calc screen displays The Traverse Calc Figure 14 68 tab displays the initial data for the traverse task Ww Ar ree Calc close Traverse qq 1 From Point f EAB i 45 0000 dms Hz Dist 15 000 m Vert Dist 0 500 m To Point 10007 3 v moe E Figure 14 68 Traverse Calc e From Point indicates the occupation the traverse point either enter manually or select from the map or list e Azimuth Angle Right Angle Left Deflection determines the azimuth from the known point to the calculated point To Point The azimuth can be entered as is or can be computed from the right or left angles or deflection entered in this field and Backsight information Azimuth sets the azimuth by value Angle Right angle to the right is the angle at the known point from the backsight point to the calculated point in a clockwise direction 14 56 TopSURV Reference Manual Traverse Angle Left angle to the left is the angle at the known point from the backsight point to the calculated point in an counter clockwise direction Deflection the angle at the known point between the prolongation of the line from the backsight point and the line to the calc
275. ists in the stakeout process Close Ag Gee Close gg Fi H vV ge Fmd H Y 2 201 3 200 103 2 201 3 200 k Point 101 fi j Store 20 m Left Left 2 539 m Back 12 497 m Back 127 206 m Cut 0 001 m Cut 0 000 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 016 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 015 m Azimuth 181 0916 dms Azimuth 181 0837 dms Figure 13 3 Stakeout The graphic shows the north direction the reference direction and the target point if the distance to the target is less than the horizontal distance tolerance If the distance is greater than three meters the arrow points to the target showing the direction of movement When the target is closer than the Horizon Distance Tolerance value the graphic shows a bull s eye target point on the screen The panel on the right displays the parameters of the target opens the map of the layout of the target and current position e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Store Point Information screen see Figure 13 8 on page 13 9 e Next Pt moves to the next point in the list e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Point screen e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu with the following options Status opens the Status screen see GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 13 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Rover Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to
276. itching Instruments Notes 16 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Appendix A File Formats The following sections describe the formats used to import export different file types Point Coordinate Formats The files used to import export point data can be in different formats text formats such as DXF MOSS and many others or binary formats such as DWG and CRS Text Custom Format This format contains a set of user defined fields in the user defined order This format can contain points and lines Lines are defined by continuous list of the points with the same name The following fields are available Name N Lat E Lon Elev Ell ht Notes Codes Codes amp Strings Codes amp Attributes FullCodes Four variants of code fields are available to support all code features in TopSURV 1 Codes includes only codes Codel Code2 CodeN P N 7010 0492 A 1 File Formats 2 Codes amp Strings includes only code names and strings Codel amp code string1 CodeN amp code stringM 3 Codes amp Attributes includes only code names and attributes Code1 attribute name type of the attribute Vvalue of the attribute Codel attribute nameN type of the attribute value of the attribute 4 FullCodes includes code names attributes code strings and control codes Code1 attribute name type of the attribute value of the attribute amp code string control code Code1
277. ithout saving the settings On the Latitude Longitude Record Format screen Figure 5 21 on page 5 19 select the format you want to represent the degrees of Latitude and Longitude in the exported file from the drop down list e Back returns to the previous screen e Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the Export process Figure 5 21 on page 5 19 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 5 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Ar Ee Nemec Finish Cancel Ar import Status ddd mmsssssss 1 point list imported Import successfully finished close Figure 5 21 Select Latitude Longitude Format On the Import Status screen Figure 5 21 tap the Close button to return to the main screen AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD Drawing If the AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD Drawing format is selected the From File screen has the following additional options for point import Figure 5 22 on page 5 20 P N 7010 0492 5 19 Importing Data Data Points v Format Point Type Design Points Figure 5 22 AutoCAD DXF TopSURV only imports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG files e Settings opens the Settings screen to select point and line styles e Next with the help of the import wizard follow next screens to import points e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings TopSURV imports layers from DWG D XF files along with the appropriate data types
278. ithout saving the settings P N 7010 0492 7 11 Editing Roads Add a Curve To add a curve select the Curve option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Horizontal Alignment screen The Curve screen displays Figure 7 11 Ar ie oK Cancel Radus Je00 000 m EF Length 250 000 m Azimuth 341 0229 dms Turn Right na Figure 7 11 Curve The plot illustration at the bottom of the Curve screen shows the element s appearance e Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the radius of the curve or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius degree of chord or degree of curve Using the degree of chord DCH or degree of curve DCV parameters the radius can be calculated as follows z 50 p 100x180 1 in BCH oy DCV xXxX sin 7 I8 Length Chord Tangent Mid Ord External Delta the length of the curve element or one of five parameters unambiguously defining the curve length chord tangent middle ordinate the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding curve external the distance from the midpoint of the curve to the tangent or delta the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve 7 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment e Azimuth by default the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element This field is editable only for the starting element of the road To change the azimuth of all other element
279. k The Elevation Mask screen Figure 8 13 sets the value for the minimum threshold data from satellites below this elevation angle are not used P Elevation Mask Cancel Elevation Mask for Rover ba Elevation Mask E deg Figure 8 13 Elevation Mask e Elevation Mask for sets the device of elevation mask application e Elevation Mask the value of the elevation mask e Set sends the current elevation mask to the base or rover receiver as selected above 1 RMS Root Mean Square a factor that characterizes the precision of the collected coordinates 8 14 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status System The System tab Figure 8 14 displays the information about the current state of RTK measurements P status Settings Pos S s Plots svs A Position Type Fixed g common Sats 13 initialized Sats 13 Radio Link 100 Rtk Age sec o fl Receiver Me 124152 Receiver Power 90 Controller Me 204041 a Controller Po 100 Figure 8 14 Status System Position Type the type of the position calculation method Autonomous Fixed Float or Code Differential Common Sats the number of satellites common to the Base and Rover used in RTK solution Initialized Sats the number of satellites contributing to the solution e Radio Link a check sum reading from the radio as the Base generates packets 100 means all packets have been received e RTK
280. k Light off 4 Scan Range wide Range dms Figure 3 61 Search Track Parameters e Sensitivity sets the detection sensitivity of the accepted signal either low medium or high e Track Light enables disables the light on the line of sight 1 For details refer to the Automatic Tracking Total Stations GTS 800A Series Instruction Manual P N 7010 0492 3 61 Configuring a Job Scan Range sets the width of the tracking signal either narrow middle or wide Available only in the AP L1A and GRT 2000 total stations Range dms sets the range of searching or tracking in degrees for vertical and horizontal planes Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Config Survey Parms screen Figure 3 62 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Select Survey Config screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Survey Parameters The Survey Parms screen Figure 3 63 on page 3 63 contains the default parameters that are used during the survey They can be changed with the help of the Settings button from any Survey screen Figure 3 62 Fsurvey eas EEN Exe Meas Method Sideshot Direct na Angle Sequence psf FS Plunge FS BS Num Sets Tolerances mg Dist VA Auto Advance Set Auto Accept Meas Distance Averaging Measure Reyerse Dist Figure 3 62 Survey Para
281. king only four or five satellites Known Trans Horz Pos if enabled then after pressing the Init Sensor button the Known Point screen Figure 8 42 on page 8 37 displays Select the point over which the transmitter is setup 8 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Initialize mmGPS The Resect tab Figure 8 44 is used to calculate the resection calculation from the Rover point to the point over which the transmitter is set up ee ES E CE Sensor Resect Data ER ifs Fixed H y Eg io 0 021 002i 7 0 Meas 1 F Known Point E Ant Ht 2 170 m Vertic Figure 8 44 Resection Resect Tab The icons on the status bar of the screen displays information about the current state of measurement the mmGPS icon displays the sensor receives the transmitter s beam the quality of the radio link the type of the position calculation method the RMS errors for horizontal and vertical coordinates respectively the number of satellites tracked and used in position calculation respectively Meas the number of the measurement Known Point check mark this box when occupying a known point and select a point to occupy using the map and list icons Ht and m the antenna s height and method of height measurement P N 7010 0492 9 39 Setting up GPS e Start starts the measurement process After pressing the button toggles to Stop and the counter of the epochs collected appears
282. l for RC 2 11 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Monitor e Lock lock onto the prism or track it Turn opens the Rotate screen which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points e Start Stop makes the total station start or stop tracking the prism and go into Standby mode The Data Indicator above the Qlock button shows the current state of the robotic total station with one of the following icons listed below no data turning querying status z receiving data The Data tab lists the differences between the coordinates of the reference point and the measured point The Map tab shows all points in graphic mode For details on map properties and customizing See Viewing Map on page 15 1 P N 7010 0492 11 47 Total Station Survey Notes 11 48 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 12 Digital Level Survey The Survey menu Figure 12 1 for Level survey opens by the Survey icon in the main menu and allows to perform e Level Run e Two Peg Test AS Tren z T Survey wio Peg Test Figure 12 1 Level Survey Menu The Help Icon a opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 12 1 Digital Level Survey Level Run To set up a Level survey in running mode
283. l tracking for motorized total stations Parameter values and accessibility depend on the selected total station model e Turning Speed sets the turn speed of a total station in revolutions per minute e Start Search After sets the delay between signal loss and the start of searching e Pattern sets the program for tracking and searching 3 60 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Normal for AP L1A and GRT 2000 or Pattern I mode searches for the prism at the point where the prism was lost The instrument gradually searches in up and down directions and continues until the prism is found High for AP LIA and GRT 2000 or Pattern 2 mode searches for the prism for a set amount of time The instrument searches from up to down and continues until the prism is found or after a maximum of six attempts Auto tracking mode changes to manual mode when the prism cannot be found within six attempts and returns to the point where the prism was lost e Trk Speed sets the speed for tracking either slow medium or fast For TS models with Auto Tracking sets the speed mode according to the purpose of measurement Survey for fixed point observation Machine Control I 2 to control construction machinery or real time surveying of various traveling objects Oo Turning Speed 10 i rpm Start Search After 5 Y sec Pattern Pattern 1 Trk Speed Survey Sensitivity High lt x Trac
284. lculates the coordinates and displays the results on the Results tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files The Results tab Figure 14 15 on the Point in Direction screen Figure 14 15 on page 14 13 shows the initial data and results of the calculation Tap Save to save the results of the calculation 14 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Point in Direction Ar in Direction Results Map EE F Point in 10009 North 6169188 East 412697 7 Eley 155 014 m From Point 105 Azimuth 127 0000 Hz Dista 100 000 m Vert Dis 5 000 m Save Figure 14 15 Point in Direction Results Tab The Map tab Figure 14 16 shows the results graphically Ar E in Direction Results Map gt Figure 14 16 Point in Direction Map Tab P N 7010 0492 14 13 COGO Calculations Compute the Intersection Point To compute the intersection point or points when given two known points and either the directions or distances from the known points tap the Intersection icon The Intersection screen displays Figure 14 17 The Intersection tab contains initial data for the intersection task Figure 14 17 Fi P intersection s o l Intersection Results Map Intersection Point 1 E E Azimuth s0 0000 dms Point
285. le 1 gt lt Params gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 dashStyle 1 width 1 gt lt Params gt lt Attributes gt lt Code gt lt CodeDictionary gt Data Base Format as Storage of the Code Library DBF This format supports String Integer Float types as fields of the codes The List type is unsupported Each exported code is stored in a separate file The format uses DBF syntax This is a binary format Roads Formats The following sections describe the road formats used in the import export of road data SSS Road Alignments are uploaded as elements and begins with the START definition which includes the starting chainage and a coordinate The elements are PT STRAIGHT ARC or TRANSITION The general format for each record 1s KEYWORD nnnn nnnn nnnn where START chainage easting northing STRAIGHT bearing distance A 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats ARC radius length SPIRAL radius length PT easting northing radius Al A2 clothoid length Example 1 START 1000 000 8 8888 199 1200 STRAIGHT 25 0000 48 420 SPIRAL 20 000 20 000 ARC 20 000 23 141 SPIRAL 20 000 20 000 STRAIGHT 148 3000 54 678 Example 2 START 1000 1050 1100 PT 1750 1300 100 80 80 PT 1400 1750 200 PT 1800 2000 TDS Road TDS road file has a file extension of RD5 This format is divided into eight sectio
286. lect Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 North East the local coordinates of the point Start Sta Start Chn the starting station number with distance to the station or the starting chain distance depending on a selection made in the Display screen for details see Display on page 2 8 The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit points see Edit X Section Template on page 7 27 Help accesses the Help files The Horizontal tab displays a list of horizontal alignment elements the horizontal alignment plot and the ending station or chainage of each element The selected horizontal alignment element is highlighted in the plot displayed to the right of the screen Figure 7 6 on page 7 8 P N 7010 0492 7 7 Editing Roads Peo ve an 0 on Start Pt Hz Element End Sta 0 05 000 Figure 7 6 Edit Horizontal Alignment Elements On the Hz tab the element list has the following columns Element the icon and the name of the element either line spiral curve or intersection point Length the length of the element Azimuth the azimuth at the beginning of the element Radius the radius of the curve spiral or intersection point the radius of the spiral is the radius at the end of the incoming
287. les module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 P N 7010 0492 9 1 Working with a Job Creating a New Job To create a new job tap the New Job icon The New Job screen Figure 2 2 starts the new job creation process which is performed with the help of a Wizard _ ra New Job il TPS TopSUR Jobs Name SITE 1 Pren erea Created By survevor Comments Current Date gj2 2008 0 15 AM Browse Next gt gt Figure 2 2 New Job Fill in the fields on the New Job screen only the Name is mandatory On controllers with pop up soft keyboards place the cursor in the field to have the soft keyboard open on screen Figure 2 3 E x 000300000 0003001000 0 009901010 0 3090323996 SELITI Figure 2 3 On screen Soft Keyboard 2 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Creating a New Job e Name the name of the new job Created By the name or some other identifier of the surveyor e Comments any additional information about the project for example the conditions of survey Current Date displays the current date and time e Browse changes the directory in which to look for a job By default job files are stored in the Jobs folder in the directory where the application was installed The path to the job file displays in the upper part of the screen T
288. lp accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 8 7 Setting up GPS Localization To set up a survey with localization tap the Localization button Localization is used for transforming coordinates between a local system and a WGS84 system The basic approach of calculating the mathematical conversion is to provide pairs of coordinates for each point used for localization in the job The Localization screen Figure 8 7 contains a list of points used for localization called control points Their coordinates are known in both systems Local and WGS84 Each point has a level of reliability specified with the values of the residuals along the horizontal and the vertical axes and the Control parameters that shows the status of the point The horizontal and vertical use of any of the control points can be changed by selecting the line and then tapping on the header of the H Control or V Control This toggles the display between used and not used H FA cocaiization Settings Close gt mame Tr resia v Resta Localization 0 000 0 126 0 000 1 0 143 0 000 A we Keep scale 1 000 Figure 8 7 Localization e The Help icon at the upper left corner displays a pop up menu containing two items Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen Help accesses the Help files e Keep scale 1 000 preserves localization from a scale transformation 1f enabled 8 8 TopSURV Reference Manual L
289. maFS 1644 142205 Figure 1 10 Security Port Data Logging To view incoming and outgoing traffic information of a controller port connected to TopSURV and to save this data to a file select the Port Data Logging option The Port Logging screen displays Figure 1 11 on page 1 10 but initially shows no data Tap the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen to view data The Help icon opens a pop up menu that contains the following options e Show incoming port data check mark to view incoming data e Show outgoing port data check mark to view outgoing data P N 7010 0492 1 9 Introduction e Pause logging to screen check mark to freeze showing port traffic e Help gives access to Help files Help Icon Kx Fe Port Logging Port traffic PUsOLE ia TaoBao L a Oyd haa B DPOOE W r Pa So012 P Jal edr R GTo0 5 7 Append Append Figure 1 11 Port Logging e Log to file check mark this box to save the data to a file The Save File screen displays Figure 1 12 Assign a name and select a desired directory in which to save the file on the controller Type Text Files txt 3 Storage Card TPS a LdTopsury Hame comm log txt Figure 1 12 Save File 1 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Main Screen e OK returns to the Port Logging screen to view the data being saved to file The file name is also shown on the screen Figure 1 13 Piron ooon CaN
290. me Design Pt Suffix design point with a pre defined prefix that is stk_O1 where stk_ is the prefix design point with a pre defined suffix or design point with a specified numerical constant added automatically for details on staked point name generation see page 3 45 Note sets the rule for defining Notes for the staked out points either Design Point Design PT Prefix Design PT Suffix or Station amp Offset for details see page 3 45 e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Miscellaneous screen Figure 3 68 on page 3 70 Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous screen is used to customize the user interface Figure 3 68 on page 3 70 e Prompt for Rod Height if enabled prompts you for a height of a Rod Target before a point is stored 2 68 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Prompt for BS Check if enabled prompts to check the backsight e Prompt for Feature Codes if enabled the Code Attributes screen displays to specify the code and attributes before a surveyed point is stored Stakeout Sound if enabled makes a sound each time a point is staked out Manual Stakeout Update Robotic Only the Meas button on a Stakeout screen must be pressed to make a measurement to the Robotic Total Station If this option is disabled the measurements are recorded continuously This applies to Stakeout screens only e Beep on Storing Points if enabled
291. me from the current position If the current position moves off the edge of the map it will automatically snap back to the center if you place a check mark in the Current Position box Actions on the Map The main Map screen not only displays spatial job overview but also provides access the job database by actions on the map view It is realized by pop up menus which offer the relevant actions on particular objects On the main Map screen you can e Tap on the desired object point line road to select deselect objects on the map e Press the button and draw a frame from right to left to highlight selected objects e Press Alt on the controller s keyboard and tap the object or press and hold the stylus on the selected object to display map options A pop up menu displays the options available for the selected object Figure 15 5 on page 15 5 Stakeout performs stakeout of the selected point point in direction line vertices and road Edit changes properties of a single selected object point line road Delete deletes selected objects Add to Layer places selected objects on a selected layer Create a Road creates a new road 15 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Actions on the Map Stakeout a Road Stakeout Point In Directio Bestia Rodd lt M E 4 Slope Stakeout ay Stakeout Vertices Delete Edit Edit Add To Layer Delete Delete Add To Layer Add To Layer Create a Road Figure
292. ment Double tap in the plot area to open the greater Map screen Figure 7 19 for vertical alignments PYT PVC AANA Figure 7 19 Alignment Map For vertical curves the Map screen displays the PVC point where the curve begins the PVI point of intersection of two tangents and the PVT point where the curve ends P N 7010 0492 7 21 Editing Roads Vertical Grade To add a vertical grade select the Vertical Grade option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Vertical tab of the Edit Vertical Alignment screen The Vertical Grade screen Figure 7 20 displays Ar GE Grade OK Cancel MjLength fay m Grade 5 00000 Figure 7 20 Edit Vertical Grade The plot at the bottom of the screen shows the element s appearance e Length the length of the vertical grade element e Grade the grade percentage of the element If the grade is falling the value should be set to negative e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Vertical Alignment screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 7 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Vertical Alignments Edit a Curve To edit a curve select the Curve option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Vertical tab of the Edit Vertical Alignment screen The Curve screen Figure 7 21 displays Ar is oK Cancel at Curve Type a aia Length 200 000 m Start Grade 15 End Grade f Yo Figure 7 21 Edit Vertical Curve
293. meters First Screen e Meas Method sets the mode of side shot measurements either Sideshot Direct Sideshot Direct Reverse or Angle Dist Sets Dir Rev See Topo on page 11 2 for a description of these methods 2 62 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey In the Contractor Module the only measurement supported is Sideshot Direct Figure 3 63 FAsurvey eas EEN Exe Meas Method Sideshot Direct Tolerances Figure 3 63 Survey Parameters in the Contractor Module e Angle Sequence sets the sequence of measured angles Available in the Angle Dist Sets Dir Rev mode Here BS is backsight point the previous occupation point FS is foresight point the next occupation point and Plunge stands for flipping and rotating the total station telescope by 180 degrees These are used for the reduction of the angle errors Possible sequences are BS FS Plunge BS FS BS FS Plunge FS BS FS BS Plunge BS FS FS BS Plunge FS BS BS Plunge BS F S Plunge FS and FS Plunge FS BS Plunge BS Num Sets the number of measurement sets participating in the average Here the Num Sets defaults to 1 and cannot be changed if Sideshot Direct or Sideshot Direct Reverse is selected in the Meas Method field Selecting Angle Dist Sets Dir Rev in the Meas Method field allows NumSets to be greater than 1 Tolerances the admissible deviation values of the horizontal and zenith angles and the distance e Auto Advance Set
294. mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking P N 7010 0492 13 5 Staking out Next Pt switches to the next target Next Pt Store Cur Pos 0 112 m Right 0 112 m Away From TS 0 034 m Away From T5 0 034 m Cut 7 894 m Cut 7 894 m Turn Right 0 0027 dms Turn Right 0 0027 dms Figure 13 4 Stakeout Map Store opens the Store Point Info screen to store the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on screen Search for robotic Total Stations starts autotracking and instructs the TS to search for the prism This function is useful for setting the stake and measuring the final position Stop for robotic Total Stations stops autotracking This function is useful for moving the pole to set the stake in the ground Close closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu with the following options Rod Height opens the Enter Rod Height screen to change the rod height during stakeout Remote Control for Robotic mode only opens the Remote Control screen see Remote Control on page 10 18 Config Link for Robotic mode only opens the Configure Link screen For the other options see the GPS stakeout 13 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Configure Link The Configure Radio screen Figure 13 5 displays parameters for the radio modem Opti
295. n Figure 4 18 using the arrows move items at the bottom of the Available column to the Order column and arrange in the preferred order with the Up and Down arrows to the right of the Order column Ar custom Style Available Eley Motes Codes Strings Codes Attributes Figure 4 18 Custom Style e Save saves the custom file format and returns to the Text File Format screen A new entry appears in the File Style drop down menu e Close returns to the previous screen without changes being made On the Coord System screen Figure 4 19 on page 4 18 select the coordinate type and distance units for the data in the file exported P N 7010 0492 Exporting Data FA coora system EERE CEE Projection Localiz ation Use Grid to Ground WGS84 lt none gt Coord Type Dist Units Figure 4 19 Coordinate System e Coord Type select either WGSS4 Lat Lon Ht Datum Lat Lon Ht Grid or Ground e Dist Units recalculate to either Meters Feet or USFeet This screen also displays information about the coordinate system in the job whose data is exported e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Lat Lon Record Format screen if the type of geodetic coordinates is selected Figure 4 20 on page 4 19 e Finish opens the Export Status screen and starts the export process See Figure 4 21 on page 4 19 e Cancel close the screen without saving the settings
296. n North Disp Dir As Azimuth I Disp CL Pos As Station Full Station 100 000 m Figure 2 7 Display Coord Type selects the coordinate type for the coordinate system selected Coord Order selects the Northing Easting order and displays the height type for the coordinate system selected Azimuth Origin selects the reference direction of azimuth Disp Dir As selects whether to display the direction as bearing or azimuth Disp CL Pos As selects how to display the position on the center line select either station or chainage Full Station available if Station is selected for Disp CL Pos As sets the measurement units used for the full station value and is usually 100 units Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Alarms screen see Figure 2 8 Finish saves the settings and returns to the main screen 9 3 TopSURV Reference Manual Alarms Creating a New Job The Alarms screen sets sound alerts for situations of low power low memory poor radio link and loss of fixed float solutions These alarms may occur for the controller GPS receiver or Total Station P N 7010 0492 eaae ome Audible Alarm Instrument Controller GPS TS Power Alarm Memory Alarm Radio Link Fix Float Track Figure 2 8 Alarms Audible Alarm check mark this box to automatically sound an alert when an alert situation occurs Check mark available boxes to select aler
297. n 7 27 Cross Section SE SMeNtS sicisiciieinviciniees eis 7 28 TOSS SECON SOLS unae tadecrs cae e a e OaS a 7 29 Edit Cross Section Sel ts sucszs ees ecto nteete econo nestustes 7 30 COS SECON eacatnece dataset e a e 7 32 Calculate Road Points ess cece ai eai 7 33 Centerline Points Parameters ccccccecceecceeece econ 7 34 Right Offset Points Parameters cccccccceeeeeeeseees 7 35 Left Offset Point Parameters cc cece eeecceeecceeees 7 37 Chapter 8 Seting UP GPS sasea aa ai ania 8 1 Starine Ne ASC eaaa cae eactateanweseosnietienseetearsece eas 8 2 Correc Me o 12 ce eee ea a Be Ce PR 8 4 M ll ASS sek ts cte cose tence ieee asi iude net thee wetness 8 5 GAO GOUN oroa O 8 6 Starting Static Occupation ossosssoooooesoeeteeererresssssssssss 8 6 Eocahzatioi eree e a a 8 8 Add Localization Point 233 8 nets eno 8 10 Localization DetanlS ccce s 2 EE 8 11 GP Sa SUNE y SIUS eiii E EEE 8 13 PoslGOee a A 8 14 Elevation Mask vedrete aia dbestenascereeas 8 15 SYS a A A E 8 16 Lor FAVS OLY eaa E S 8 17 MOIDI e oaa N 8 17 POST OI NOUS erea A A A SA 8 18 PRODE CS odie eis eetli cai site ian aio aie 8 19 RS TCS Fe a ne ne ee ne One eon SORE re Pe 8 20 Help Icom Options sosesc a 8 22 Configure OmnISTAR cccccceccecceeeeeeeeeseeeees 8 23 Contieure Beacon svi ce es 8 25 BRC Oni uration sassi eens 8 26 P N 7010 0492 vii Table of Contents Configure Radio cetacean hesdertasa
298. n in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items P N 7010 0492 6 27 Editing Job Data e Edit Points displays the Points screen For details see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files Edit Line On the Edit Line screen Figure 6 34 you can edit the points and the layer of the selected linework Points in Line The Point in Line tab displays a list of existing points in the selected Linework on the left side of the screen and the general view of the linework on the right side Figure 6 34 The hand symbol on the plot indicates the point highlighted in the list of points To view the current selected linework on a large map tap on the map plot Points in Line Layer Style ine 31 73 Linework Mame e List of Points lt gt m H Point Info Sel Pts ha Figure 6 34 Edit Points in Line e Linework Name the name of the Linework e List of Points points and their codes if any in the selected linework e The up and down arrows to the left of List of Points move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points in the linework 6 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Linework toggles on off the keyboard arrow keys that duplicate the arrows on the screen deletes the highlighted point from the linework E closes the plot of the point list Only the list of points table will be available e Point Info displays informa
299. n one set Ar LE Cancel Meas Type HA VA SD na EDM Mode Fe E Prism Constant mm Point Guide Prism Figure 11 3 Mode Type of Measurements For a description of other parameters on the Mode screens see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 for more information P N 7010 0492 11 3 Total Station Survey Sideshot Direct The Meas tab on the SS Dir screen Figure 11 4 contains the initial data for performing single sideshots and displays the following information during a survey EE sts cose _ Meas Data Map Offsets Point 5 occpt2 EW code pm BO Bee fi HR 2 000 m HA 230 0005 VA4 90 1003 5D 800 005 dms m Measure Foresight Direct _ Traverse Point Figure 11 4 Sideshot Direct Measurement Tab e Point sets the current point name During the survey the numerical part of the name increments automatically by one The icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code sets the Code for the current point enter either manually or select a code from the drop down list accesses the attributes of the selected code and opens the Code Attributes screen for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 shows battery status for the total station e amp shows the status of communication between the controller and the total station e shows battery and memory status for the controller 11 4 TopSURV Re
300. n the Alignment Element Info screen Figure 7 9 then double click to display information for the selected horizontal alignment element from the map either Start End Station Start NOrth Start East End North or End East FAaiignment SAA Close Start Sta 0 98 785 End Sta 1429 275 Start North 61 76856 0 Start East 415375 3802 61768545 9 415362 72 Figure 7 9 Alignment Element Information 7 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment Add a Line To add a line select the Line option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Horizontal Alignment screen The Line screen displays Figure 7 10 AST oK Cancel M Length FETT m Azimuth 341 0229 dms Figure 7 10 Line The plot illustration at the bottom left corner of the Line screen shows the element s appearance Figure 7 10 e Length the length of the line element e Azimuth by default the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element This field is editable only for the starting element of the road To change the azimuth of all other elements remove the check mark from the Tangent to Previous Item box on the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen azimuth since road elements are usually tangential z Caution should be exercised when setting the to each other e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Horizontal Alignment screen e Cancel closes the screen w
301. n these screens see Survey Parameters on page 3 41 10 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Resection Resection The method of resection computes the coordinates of an occupation point where the instrument is set up using measurements to two or more points with known coordinates To access the Resection option tap the Resection icon The Occupation Pt screen displays first to set the occupation point Figure 10 11 To perform resection for the occupation point selected in the BS Survey screen press the menu icon next to the Map icon in the Occ Point field of this screen and select the Resection item Figure 10 2 on page 10 2 Occupation Point The Occupation Pt screen sets the name of the point the heights of the instrument and the target Figure 10 11 Er Occ Point 5 occpt ANH HI 1 000 m HR i m p Resection Next gt gt Figure 10 11 Occupation Point e Next opens the resection screen to take measurements to known points P N 7010 0492 10 11 Setting up TS Survey Resection 3D The Resection 3D screen calculates a three dimensional resection of the occupied point Figure 10 12 Use the 2D 3D option to select performing either a two or three dimensional resection FAresection j Settings Close Meas Data Map Set Point Eoo jOsg EG Code fi HR 2 000 m HA 0 0000 V4 90 3000 5D 500 000 dms m Measure Foresight Direct Figure 10 12 Resection 3D
302. nce Manual Chapter 14 COGO Calculations To calculate a COCGO task tap on the COGO icon in the main menu The COGO menu Figure 14 1 on page 14 2 allows calculation of the following tasks Inverse Point in Direction Intersection Calculator Curves Area Corner Angle Line Offset Curve Offset Road Offset Adjust Traverse Also it provides a Calculator for various calculations and conversions P N 7010 0492 14 1 COGO Calculations a coGo Pt in ede Intersection A Calculator ZL Area ER Corner Ange Line Ea Curve Pe IT Road Offset Adjust Traverse Figure 14 1 Cogo Menu i If the menu options you need are not visible Pas available tap on the Configure Menus icons to enable these options in the Config Menus screen The Help Icon a opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about the TopSURV used for detail see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 The thumbnail image icons to the left of the tabs for every COGO screen displays the type of task being performed Tap this image to open a larger map see Figure 14 4 on page 14 5 Tap the large image to hide it 14 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Inverse Inverse To perform an Inverse task tap the Inverse icon Figure 14 2 The P_res screen displays P a m A f Inverse t th J amp Ft To Line Pt To List
303. nd displays the result on the screen Close saves the changes and closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout Point List To stakeout points from a list select the Point List icon Figure 13 39 on page 13 39 The stakeout of points from the list can be enabled from the Main View see Actions on the Map on page 15 4 Press Alt on the controller s keyboard and tap the linework The Stakeout Vertices item from the pop up menu appears 13 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Point List The Point List screen Figure 13 39 performs a stakeout of existing points from a point list selects the starting stakeout point and lists stakeouts in direct or reverse order g AS Tae Settings Close Point List Reverse Order HR 2 000 m Stakeout Figure 13 39 Stakeout Point List Point List the preexisting points list either select from the list or enter manually List of Points the list of currently selected points Up and down arrows moves the highlighted point s up and down in the order of the points if activated uses the up down arrows on the keyboard to move the highlighted point up and down deletes the highlighted point from the list gt closes the scheme of the polygon Only the list of points are available Ant Ht for GPS mode sets the height of the antenna reference
304. nd fill slopes To create a template for a cross section view of the road tap the Templates icon The X Sect Templates screen Figure 7 25 displays a list of the existing templates in the upper part of the screen and a plot of the highlighted template in the lower part D Ar x sect Templates close Templates Num Segs Cut Sloj a 1 000 1 2 000 A we ZL 0 5 m Figure 7 25 X Sect Templates 7 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Cross Section Templates The list contains four columns Name the name of the template Num Segs the number of segments Cut Slope and Fill Slope values Delete deletes the template from the list Edit opens the properties of the selected template in the next X Sect Templates screen Figure 7 26 Add opens the blank X Sect Templates screen to enter the properties for a new template Close returns to the main screen Edit X Section Template To edit an existing template highlight it and tap the Edit button in the X Sect Templates screen Figure 7 25 on page 7 26 The next X Sect Temp screen Figure 7 26 displays the parameters of the highlighted template to edit Ar x sect Temp OK cancel Name i Slope Cut 1 000 Fill 1 000 1 000 0 000 0 500 0 500 CL ai 0 5 m Figure 7 26 Edit X Sect Template e Name the name of the template e Slope the cut and fill parameter values ratio of run values for cut and fill for a unit ri
305. next Stake Parameters screen sets the rule for naming staked points Figure 3 46 on page 3 46 e The Store Staked Point As field defines Point sets the rule for defining names for the staked out points either design point name next point name design point with a pre defined prefix that is stk_O1 where stk_ is the prefix or design point with a pre defined suffix The choice of the prefix or suffix appears only when the P N 7010 0492 3 45 Configuring a Job corresponding item is chosen from the drop down menu Also a specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the staked point name For instance if the constant specified is 1000 and the design point is 100 the staked point would be named 1100 that is 100 1000 If the design point is alphanumeric the constant is appended to the name For example for the design point ALPHA the corresponding staked out point is named ALPHA1000 Note sets the rule for setting Notes for the staked out points either design point name design point with a prefix or design point with a suffix Also it can be Station amp Offset information If the Station amp Offset option is activated an edit box for entering alphanumeric prefix appears For the United States this prefix is Sta for the international markets the prefix is Cha and for the Korean Japanese markets the prefix is No With this option activated depending on the ch
306. next point in the survey The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code the code of the point either enter manually or select from the drop down list the Attributes List icon opens the list of available attributes see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 for more details e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon contains the String Layer and Note items e Dist Left toggles between Dist Left and Dist Right values These set the direction of the next movement relative to the previous direction The field below sets the distance to move e Accept applies the taped distance to the perimeter line e Finish opens the floating menu of two items Close Polygon connects the first and the last two points with a line 11 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Missing Line Calc Closure calculates the difference between the last and the first points e The icon in the lower left corner of the screen shows the plot of the already taped perimeter The Data tab shows the initial data and current results of the measurements The Map tab displays the plot of the already made measurements Missing Line To start working select the Missing Line icon The Missing Line screen displays Figure 11 28 The Missing Line screen emulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw Data database Ar ea
307. nfig RE S1 Repeater available if RE S1 is configured as a repeater opens the Configure Radio screen to setup the RE S1 repeater see Configure RE S1 Repeater on page 8 31 e Reset RTK or Reset DGPS reinitializes the receiver P N 7010 0492 8 21 Setting up GPS e mnGPS Options opens the mmGPS Options screen see mmGPS Options on page 8 32 Help accesses the Help files Configure OmniSTAR TopSURV references two OmniSTAR services either Virtual Base Station VBS or High Performance HP To set up a DGPS survey with OmniSTAR select the Config OmniSTAR option from the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner of the Status screen D gt The same option is accessible from the Topo and Auto Topo screens If the job is configured to use the OmniSTAR VBS service with GPS receivers that allow using only VBS the OmniSTAR screen Figure 8 22 opens to select the satellite Satellite EA_SAT Lon 25E me OmniSTAR SH 00153 Subscription 11 29 2007 Figure 8 22 OmniSTAR information e Satellite selects the satellite that the receiver subscribes to e OmniSTAR SN shows the OmniSTAR serial number e Subscription shows the OmniSTAR subscription number e Status opens the OmniSTAR screen to view information on the OmniSTAR link and the receiver OmniSTAR board Figure 8 23 on page 8 23 9 99 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status If the job is configured to use the OmniS
308. nfigure the radio for data output depending on the job configuration Figure 3 11 on page 3 13 1 CDPD stands for Cellular Digital Packet Data CDPD is an open packet data service defined as an autonomous overlay network specified for the cellular TDMA network 3 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Ar ase Radiol Finish Cancel Ar E Radio Finish Cancel Radio Modem i Radio Modem v Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port hyt Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port A Baud 36400 Data 8 C ort comectd ta rack p i Baud 38400 Data 8 Parity None Parity None Stop 1 ih Stop 1 Defaults Defaults Figure 3 11 Base Radio Output Base Radio Configuration Depending on the radio modem selected one of the following screens display after pressing Next on the Base Radio screen Figure 3 10 on page 3 12 e For Cell Phone Modems Internal HiPerXT GSM Internal HiPer GSM Internal GR 3 GSM Internal GR 3 Satel GSM Motorola V60 Cell Phone Motorola V710 Cell Phone MultiTech GSM GPRS Modem Siemens TC35 Modem Siemens M20 Modem Nextel i5 sr Cell Phone Nokia Cell Phone and Wavecom Fastrack GSM The Next button on the Base Radio screen opens the Base Radio Parameters screen see Figure 3 12 on page 3 15 e For Digital UHF Modems Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Internal HiPer Digital VHF TRL 2 and TRL 35 External Digital UHF The Next button on the Base Radio scr
309. ng formats Land XML xml SSS Road hal val rd TDS Road rd5 Topcon 3D Road rd3 TopSURV Road thl tvl trd CLIP Road PLT ALZ TRV ISPOL Road ALI RAS SC1 Tekla Roads vgp MX GENIO Road txt or SBG Road LIN In LandXML file X Sections are stored as Zones when the Use Zone elements for x sections box is check marked Figure 4 35 andeMiL xml _ Use Zone elements for x sections Figure 4 35 Roads to LandXML In TopSURV or TDS Road format also select the desired distance units Figure 4 36 on page 4 31 4 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Ari File Cancel Data Roads aa Jus Feet v Figure 4 36 Roads to TopSURV Road The header of the TopSURV Road format contains the starting azimuth if the Road is not a straight line X Section Templates For X Section Templates data you can export the following formats SSS X Section Templates xtl TDS X Section Templates tp5 or TopSURV X Section Templates xst When exporting to TopSURV or TDS Road format also select the desired distance units Figure 4 37 on page 4 32 P N 7010 0492 4 31 Exporting Data Cancel Data x Section Templates Format TopSURY X Section Templates x Dist Units Jus Feet v Figure 4 37 X Section Templates to TOpSURV Templates Localization For Localization data you can export the following formats Topcon 3D Localization g
310. ngth bearing SPIRAL first radius second radius length bearing PT easting northing radius Al A2 Al A2 clothoid length e If the horizontal alignment starts with ARC or SPIRAL the direction field is used to define the start bearing of the horizontal alignment e If the spiral isn t a avoid clothoid the corresponding not used radius equal zero Example START 1000 000 8 8888 199 1200 STRAIGHT 25 0000 48 420 SPIRAL 20 000 20 000 ARC 20 000 23 141 SPIRAL 20 000 20 000 STRAIGHT 148 3000 54 678 Example 2 START 1000 1050 1100 PT 1750 1300 100 80 80 PT 1400 1750 200 PT 1800 2000 2 tvl contains a vertical alignment with long sections LS Every LS requires chainage level and curve length Starting and ending curve lengths should be zero The format is chainage level length Example 1000 000 100 000 0 000 1100 000 125 000 50 000 1250 000 100 000 60 000 3 trd contains cross sections set A 28 TopSURV Reference Manual The format is Roads Formats Chainage Template name Turn Left or Right Cut Fill Segment name Horizontal Offset Vertical Offset CLIP The CLIP file format is a europe road format Example ALZI Calzada Derecha Ajustada 16512 029 18374 058 19101 891 19693 957 20010 319 20322 145 21305 065 21629 230 21770 000 22000 000 22100 000 22230 000 22380 000 22500 000 22800 000 22970 000
311. ns Each section 1s started with a line that has a two letter code and is followed by exactly 50 characters These section header lines have to be included in the file even if there is no definition under them For example super elevation and widening are not required but their header lines must exist Each header line may be followed by component definitions of that section Section codes HR VR XR XL SR SL Start Horizontal alignment Start Vertical alignment Start Right Template Start Left Template Start Right Super Elevation Start Left Super Elevation P N 7010 0492 A 23 File Formats WR Start Right Widening WL Start Left Widening Example HRH HHHH HL 25 49380 630 000 HS 1 000000 1000 000 200 000 R T HC 1 000000 1000 000 895 900 R HS 1 000000 1000 000 200 000 R C HL 1 00000 250 000 V RAFAFEEEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEFEEEFEEEFEEEEEEEEEEEEEEPEH VG 271 840 2 000 VC 500 000 2 000 1 800 VG 1254 060 1 800 VG 150 000 1 800 XRAEEEEEEFEEEEEEEEFEEFEEEEEEEEEAEEEEEEAEFEFEEEEEPEEPEF RT 100 0 000 NORMAL XLE HHHH LT 100 0 000 NORMAL SRAFEEEEEEEEEFAEEEEEEAEEEEFEEEEEEFEEEEEEEFEEEEEPEPET RS 106 30 000 108 30 000 2 000 6 000 0 0 0 000 0 000 RS 117 25 900 119 25 900 6 000 2 000 0 0 0 000 0 000 SLAFHEEEEEEFAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ET LS 104 30 000 108 30 000 2 000 6 000 0 0 0 000 0 000 LS 117 25 900 121 25 900 6 000 2 000 0 0 0 000 0 000 W RAFAEHAEEFAEEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEFEEEFEEEEEAEEEEE
312. ns the Survey Parameters screen See Survey Parameters on page 3 41 P N 7010 0492 9 9 GPS Survey Line The Line screen Figure 9 10 is used to enter the parameters defining a point that are not available physically relative to some reference line ar AST Settings Close gt Reference Line Start Pt C I Offset Point ei sr End Pt Offsets From End Pt m A Chom fo 300 o 0 200 Figure 9 10 Line Screen e Reference Line a line specified by two known or measured points select either from the map from the list or measure directly e Meas starts measuring the current location point e Offset point sets the parameters of the offset point the name of a point the code of a point can be typed manually or chosen from the drop down list the attributes of the code can be entered through the Attributes List icon see On the Point Attributes on page 6 9 for details e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles the String field Also the sign appears 9 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey Layer opens the Select Layer screen to select the layer in which to locate the point see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen see Topo Survey on page 9 2 Offsets From End Pt m the offset values include Figure 9 10 on page 9 10
313. nt on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground point The rod has two targets PE F Meas Data Map Offsets Point 5 occpt4 EM Code m Oe fi HR 2 000 m Take measurements in any order Figure 11 16 Hidden Point Measurement Tab e Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code code for the offset point to be stored Can be entered manually or chosen from the drop down list the Attributes List bitmap opens a list of available attributes e The menu icons next to the Attributes List icon and the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen display the same lists as for the Horizontal Angle Offset screen Single toggles between the Single and Repeat sideshot modes Fine toggles between the Fine and Coarse sideshot modes Prism1 measures the first target on the rod Prism2 measures the second target on the rod e Settings opens the Mode screen for setting the sideshot mode 11 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Two Line Intersection The Measurement tab Figure 11 17 on the 2Line Intersection screen contains data for determination of a point by the intersection of two lines Each line is defined by two points or by two measurements BEI ens cose _ Meas Data Map Offsets pont Gee Ew Code m ORs fi HR 2 000 m
314. ntaining five items Import Road s From Job starts the import of roads from the job selected Importing From Job on page 5 2 Import Road s From File starts the import of roads from the file of the selected format Importing From a File on page 5 13 Export Road s To Job starts the export of roads to the job selected Exporting To a Job on page 4 2 Export Road s To File starts the export of roads to the file of the selected format Exporting to File on page 4 12 Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 7 3 Editing Roads Edit Road The Edit Road screen Figure 7 3 displays the general properties of the road Start Stn 0 00 000 m Stn Interval 100 000 m Figure 7 3 Edit Road Name enter a name for the road Layer selects the layer on which the road is located The List ea button opens the Layers screen to edit layers for details see Edit Layers on page 6 23 Hz Alnt selects a pre defined horizontal alignment to use in designing the road The List button opens the Horizontal Alignment screen to edit horizontal alignments for details see Horizontal Alignment on page 7 5 Vt Alnt selects a pre defined vertical alignment from to use in designing the road The List button opens the Vertical Alignment screen to edit vertical alignments for details see Vertical Alignments on page 7 16 e X Sect Set select
315. nter manually or select from the map or from the list e End Point the point that defines the second side of the angle either enter manually or select from the map or from the list e Calc calculates the corner angle The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing three items e Edit Points opens the Points screen see Points on page 6 2 e Calculator accesses the calculator see Calculator on page 14 17 e Help accesses the Help files The Results tab shows the results of the calculation calculation of various angles distances and azimuths to the start and end points FA comer Angle Angle Results Map Angle Left 306 0109 Angle Right 53 5851dms 180 left 126 0109 StartPt Id 1 Dist to Star 1062 766m Az to St 343 5618 EndPt Id 2 Dist to End 655 659m Az to End 37 3509dms Figure 14 49 Corner Angle Results Tab The Map tab Figure 14 50 on page 14 39 shows the view of the angle 14 38 TopSURV Reference Manual Line Offset Angle Results Figure 14 50 Corner Angle Map Tab Line Offset To calculate the coordinates of points along a line tap the Line Offset icon Figure 14 51 The Line amp Offsets screen displays amp fd Point Ht Comp Interpolate Ew F Num Subs o SS m 0 00 000 Figure 14 51 Line amp Offset Start Point the starting point of the line The l
316. o ERE EE Point Lists PointList1 t Pointlist2 Check Uncheck Figure 4 7 Select Point List to Export e Point Lists the list of available point lists in the job e Check marks the highlighted entries e Uncheck removes the mark from the highlighted entries e Back returns to the previous screen e Next available if other data is chosen to export on the To Job screen Figure 4 3 on page 4 3 Opens the next screen to select other objects horizontal alignments vertical alignments roads or X section sets which are similar to the Point List to Export screen Once the button becomes grayed out tap the Finish button to start the export process e Finish if available opens the Export Status screen and starts the export process e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 4 7 Exporting Data Export Status The Export Status screen Figure 4 8 reflects the export process and contains a progress bar and a comments window The progress bar displays the percentage of the data being exported aeons LLL LLL 1 code exported No points exported 1 point list exported Export successfully finished Cancel Close Figure 4 8 Export Status e Cancel cancels the export process e Close returns to the main screen 4 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting To a Job Duplicate Objects If the existing job contains objects with the s
317. o communication RC2 Only for optical communication using the remote controller RC 2 Bluetooth TS for establishing a Bluetooth connection e Optical selects the connection course either RC2 Cable RC2 Bluetooth or None between the field controller and the remote controller RC 2 in case carrying out optical communication with the Total Station e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Cable screen 9 56 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Edome MAEA Initial TS Connection Optical None v Note The connection mode can be changed in any of the measurement screens Figure 3 57 Connection Mode Cable The Cable screen contains the parameters of the cable connection see Figure 3 58 on page 3 58 e Cable Comm Settings the parameters for the cable connection Baud baud rate Parity Data number of the data bits and Stop number of the stop bits e Default restores settings to default values if they have been modified e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Radio screen for Robotic surveys the Mode screen for motorized Conventional or Reflectorless surveys or the Survey Parameters screen for Conventional Reflectorless or Level surveys e Finish saves the changes and returns
318. o select alignments Figure 4 33 FF alignments to Exp Cancel Horizontal Slignmentts Check Uncheck Figure 4 33 Select Horizontal Alignments e Horizontal Alignment s lists the available horizontal alignments in the job 4 93 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File e Check marks the highlighted entries e Uncheck removes the mark from the highlighted alignment e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Select directory screen Figure 4 34 to select the directory to save the file The file will have the same name of the exported alignment to select other objects vertical alignments roads z When exporting TopSURV opens similar screens x section sets or x sections templates e OK opens the Export Status screen and starts the export process e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Figure 4 34 Select Directory Vertical Alignments For Vertical Alignments data you can export the following formats SSS V Alignment val TopSURV V Alignment tvl CLIP V Alignment ALZ or ISPOL V Alignment RAS P N 7010 0492 4 29 Exporting Data X Section Sets For X Section Sets data you can export the following formats SSS Cross Section Set rd TopSURV Cross Section Set trd CLIP Cross Section Set TRV ISPOL Cross Section Set SC1 or Custom X Sections cxs Roads For Roads data you can export the followi
319. o set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio for RTK mode opens the Configure Radio screen For details see Configure Radio on page 8 26 Config RE S1 Repeater opens the Configure Radio screen to setup the RE S1 radio as a repeater see Configure RE S1 Repeater on page 8 31 Multi Base for RTK survey type opens the Multi Base screen Figure 8 4 on page 8 5 to set the multi base mode This mode allows the base station to use a single frequency for transmitting data Setting a transmission delay for each station prevents signals from colliding Grid to Ground opens the Grid to Ground Params screen see Grid to Ground on page 8 5 P N 7010 0492 3 3 Setting up GPS Correct the Base If the Base starts in autonomous mode and an observed Topo point has known coordinates stored in the job you can correct the base position Use the Duplicate Points screen in this case Figure 8 3 ox cance 105 Already Exists Offsets m dN 12 024 dE 0 001 dH 0 001 Overerite Store As Check Point Use in Weighted Average Correct Base Figure 8 3 Duplicate Point e Overwrite overwrites the existing point e Rename if enabled the point is renamed The new name is noted in the field and is the point with observed coordinates e Store As Check Point if enabled the observed point is stored as a check point of the existing point e Use in Weighted Average
320. o start logging manually or automatically as data are being collected This option is absent for PP Kinematic and PP DGPS surveys the selection of manual start of logging is not allowed Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Rover Receiver screen Figure 3 22 on page 3 24 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Prover PP E Finish Cancel Raw Data Logging File Name v Log To Receiver ha Logging Rate 5 00 secs Start Log Manual w Figure 3 24 Rover PP Setup 2 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Modem Connection The Config Modem Connect screen Figure 3 25 displays for the Rover receiver configuration in Network RTK or Network DGPS surveys Fonts noae EERE CET Modem Connect AeceVver Figure 3 25 Config Modem Connect e Modem Connect select either Receiver or Controller to connect the modem to e Next opens the Rover Radio screen Figure 3 27 on page 3 29 as Laser Config The Config Laser screen contains typical laser parameters and settings Figure 3 26 on page 3 28 Refer to the TopSURV User s Manual for details on configuring a Network RTK survey e Manufacturer the manufacturer for the laser device e Model the model of the laser device e Type the type of laser measurement system Laser Port Setting the settings port parity data baud rate the num
321. ob History TINs Layers or Multiple Format select the file type to export data to e Next opens the To lt name of Format gt screen to specify the file name and the directory where the file will be saved e Cancel returns to the main screen Follow up the export process with the help of the export wizard 4 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Points and Point Lists For Point and Point Lists data the following exports are allowed for the formats Topcon Text Custom txt Text Custom Report txt Topcon Text Custom QC txt Topcon FC 4 fc4 Topcon FC S5 fc5 Topcon GTS 6 gts6 Topcon FC 6 GTS 7 pnt Topcon GTS 7 with strings txt Topcon GT pnt Topcon GT Finland gt MOSS GENIO mgn AutoCAD DXF dxf AutoCAD Drawing dwg ESRI Shape shp Cut Sheet Standard txt Cut Sheet User Defined txt Check Sheet txt TDS Coordinates cr5 PTL Sheet txt LandXML xml NEZ txt NEZ with strings txt CMM cor MMH360 360 KOF kof MMH360_Z000 360 Microstation 95 ISFF dgn MicroStation VS dgn SBG Pxy PXY or SBG Geo Geo For Points or Point Lists data and for most formats the To File screen Figure 4 14 on page 4 14 has the following options Select Types of the Points for Points and Point Lists data types check mark this field if not all types of points should be exported In this case the Point Typ
322. ocalization Details opens the Localization Results screen e Remove removes the highlighted points e Edit creates localization parameters using the localization points e Add opens the Add Point screen Figure 8 8 on page 8 9 to add a point to use in localization e Settings opens the Survey parameters screen For details see Survey Parameters on page 3 62 The more localization points used the more precise am the localization is The localization is updated recomputed every time a new point local and WGS84 coordinates is added to the localization list of points The new parameters of the localization are available through the Details button Add Localization Point The Add Point screen Figure 8 8 contains the coordinates of the control points AS Point oK Cancel Fa H v ge 100 2201 3 200 1043 Local Point Point Lni_1 Use Horiz WGS84 Point Point Figure 8 8 Add Localization Point The Local Point panel contains the name and coordinates of the point in the local coordinate system P N 7010 0492 8 9 Setting up GPS Point sets the name of the control point either enter a point name manually select a point from the map A icon or from the list icon Use Horizontal check and enable if the point should be used for horizontal localization Use Vertical check and enable if the point should be used for vertical localization The WGSS
323. ock sends the Quicklock or Turn Around command which causes the total station to search for the RC 2 e Search makes the instrument search for the prism e Lock locks onto the prism or tracks it e Turn opens the Rotate screen Figure 10 21 on page 10 21 which allows the total station to turn to various angles or points e Stop makes the total station stop tracking the prism and go into Standby mode The Data Indicator above the Qlock button shows the current status of the total station There are four status types no data querying status turning and receiving data e All the observations can be done in remote mode as well if the instrument chosen is robotic e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing seven items Edit Points opens the Points list Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen Notes opens the Notes screen see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 PTL Mode opens the PTL Mode screen see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Remote Settings opens the Search Track screen Config Link opens the Configure Link screen for details see Configure Link on page 13 7 Display Coord if selected the coordinates of the previous point measured displays below the HR data 1 RC 2 is the Remote Control System 2 for optical communications For instructions of how to operate the RC 2 device consult the ins
324. ock 42 BaseName is the point name of the base Feat Code is feature code X Y and Z is coordinate of base in WGS84 geocentric coordinates Nr should be left blank Ant H is antenna height Bk should be left blank and Comm is a freetext comment Block 43 GNSS vector DB PointName Feat Code dX dY dZ Ant H Bk Comm 2 A10 A8 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F6 3 2 A7 Example A 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats 43 Pl 4 5619 230 4119 47 0982 2 054 This is the vector DB is data block 43 PointName is the rover occupation name point name Feat Code is feature code dX dY and dZ is the vector components in WGS84 geocentric coordinates Ant H is antenna height of the rover Bk is not used and Comm is a freetext comment Block 44 GNSS RMS and correlation coefficients geocentric DB sX sY sZ rXX rXY rXZ rYY rYZ rZZ Comm AT2 F8 4 4F8 44 F8 44 F7 44 F7 44 F7 44 F7 44 F7 44 F7 4 A7 Example 44 1 4314 0 6481 4 5640 1 0000 0 4382 0 8757 1 0000 0 4811 1 0000 This block follows block 43 with additional data on the vector DB is data block 44 sX sY sZ is the vector components standard deviation or RMS values The r fields are correlation coefficients between the vector components rXX rY Y rZZ are all equal to 1 Block 45 Coordinates in geocentric system WGS84 DB PointName Feat CodeX Y Z _ Ant H Bk Comm AT2 A10 A8 F12 4 F12 4 F12 4 F6 3 2 A7 Example 42 P1048 1234 2210658 5530 618726 6390 5
325. odetic horizon plane at the height of the To Point Delta Ell ht the difference in ellipsoidal heights P jT w0 Point Inverse P Inverse Results Map From Point 100 To Point 104 Forward 0 0000 dms Backwar 180 0000 Geodesi 16587 20 Ground 16587 59 Delta Ell ht 0 001 m Figure 14 6 Two Point Inverse Results in Geodesic Display System 14 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Inverse The Map tab shows the illustration for the results Figure 14 7 P T w0 Point Inverse P Inverse Results Figure 14 7 Two Point Inverse Map For a description of the icons to the left see Toolbar on page 15 2 Point to Line To calculate the station of the known point inverse to the known line select the Point to Line icon The Inverse Point to Line screen displays Figure 14 8 On the Inverse Point to Line tab enter the following parameters Ar UGE Point to Line Close Inverse Pt to Line Resull lt gt Point 100 Start Pointo amp 120 0000 dms Start Stn 0 00 000 Figure 14 8 Inverse Point to Line P N 7010 0492 14 7 COGO Calculations Point sets the current point name either enter manually or select from the map or from the list Start Point the starting point of the reference line Azimuth Az to Pt sets the azimuth of the reference line Rotates through selections when tapped Azimuth sets the azimuth from the starting point by
326. of observation and comm is comment Block 05 Coordinates DB Pointname Feat Code North East Height Type Comment MO SAIO AS WEI23 EOAR ARD AAT Example 05 P101 1000 134741 349 9881 834 21 514 DB is datablock 05 Pointname is occupation name point name Feat Code is feature code North East Height is coordinate in selected system Type is type of calculation measurement and comment is a free text comment P N 7010 0492 A 9 File Formats Block 09 Program information DB PI Connection Free text I2 I2 AlO A50 Example line coding 09 91 05 P100 1000 134654 123 9800 123 21 000 05 P101 1000 134741 349 9881 834 21 514 09 99 DB is datablock 09 PI is program information which is a code that can give extra information to the program reading the KOF file and can be used to start end lines in a coordinate export Connection is sometimes used and is a point number of an existing point Block 41 GNSS base no coordinate DB BaseName Feat Code Bk Spaces Ant H Type Comm J2 AIO A8 S18 x31 F6 3 2 A7 Example 41 Bauta 1 341 This block brings on base point name and antenna height It has the same layout as block 42 fields are described there except that the coordinates are replaced by spaces Block 42 GNSS base with coordinate DB BaseName Feat CodeX Y Z Nr Ant H Bk Comm AI2 A10 A8 AF12 44F12 44F12 44184F6 3 412 A7 Example 42 Bauta 2210658 5530 618726 6390 5930812 0680 1 341 DB is data bl
327. oice for the prefix TopSURV automatically generates one note for each stakeout point Sta5 5 5R5 0 Cha505 5R5 0 or No 5 5 5R5 0 respectively Eren cancel Store Staked Point As Point Design Pt Constant Figure 3 46 Design Point Name Constant e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Advanced screen 2 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Staked Point Icon The Staked Point Icon screen selects options to display the icon for the staked point on the map Figure 3 47 e Use icon for staked point displays the icon for the staked point on the map e Staked point specifies a colored icon for the staked point e OK saves the changes and returns to the Stakeout Parameters screen F2stakes Pont o EE Staked point Icon Triangle Flag cor Ca P Figure 3 47 Staked Point Icon P N 7010 0492 3 47 Configuring a Job Advanced The Advanced screen sets several additional parameters for the GPS mode Figure 3 48 Eaa ash conc _ Co Op Tracking Satellite System GPS GLONASS w RTK Position Extrapolation v Figure 3 48 Advanced The Multipath reduction enable when a signal received includes multiple reflections from nearby objects Check mark the Multipath Reduction field to use this mode during survey Co Op tracking enable to involve additional resources fo
328. oints e Prefix Suffix when selected sets the prefix or suffix to be added to the generated point name e Save points to Point List enable if you want to save the generated points to a separate points list If it is selected a field appears where the name for the list can be set e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Right Offset Points Params screen Right Offset Points Parameters The Right Offset Points Params screen Figure 7 33 displays the parameters of points to be computed to the right of the center line R First 101 aee P Ee Prefix Suffix None aa F Save Points To Point List Offset Type Surface Offset v Right SUL E up 0 000 i Figure 7 33 Right Offset Points Parameters e First Point the name of the first point The 4 icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point e Code the code of the points being generated either enter manually or select from the drop down list The Attributes List icon accesses the attributes of the chosen code and opens the Code Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the selected code e The icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items P N 7010 0492 7 35 Editing Roads String toggles on the String field The sign also appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10
329. ols from the first tab The Set tab if available displays the result of the sideshots being done during one set 11 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Tape Dimension Tape Dimension To start working select the Tape Dimension icon The Tape Dimension screen displays The Tape Dimension screen calculates the periphery of structures such as buildings that have features perpendicular to each other This is done using tape measurements relative to the two known points that belong to one side of the structure wall of the building forming a so called reference line Reference Line The Ref Line tab contains information about the two points comprising the reference line ASE Dimension Ref Line Tape Dim Data Map Start Pt Start Point 100 E Code a End Pt End Point 101 Ew Code a Figure 11 26 Tape Dimension Ref Line Tab e Start Point End Point contains properties of the starting and ending point the name can be entered manually or selected from the map or list and code Also the point can be measured by pressing the Meas button P N 7010 0492 11 29 Total Station Survey Tape Dimension Points The Tape Dim tab contains the following settings for performing the survey ASE Dimension Ref Line Tape Dim Data Map Point E E Code A aa 5 103 104 100 m W Dist Left 0 000 rsh Ji Figure 11 27 Tape Dimension Tape Dim Tab e Point the name of the
330. om the azimuth line H g Ar Tae Settings Close i p From Point 100 Pt in Direction p Angle Offset 5 0000 dms Hz Dist 150 000 m Yert Dist 3 000 m Store Pt 104 Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertic v Stakeout Figure 13 36 Stakeout Point amp Direction e From Point the starting point Enter the name manually or select a name either from the list or from the map e Az to Pt the azimuth can be set by value or as the direction to another known point P N 7010 0492 13 35 Staking out e Angle Offset the angle offset from the azimuth line Hz Dist the distance offset along the angle offset line Vert Dist the height offset Store Pt enter a point in this field to store the computed point to the data set Ant Ht for the GPS mode sets the height of the antenna reference point ARP above the mark Also specifies the measurement type either slant or vertical AR for the TS mode the height of the rod target Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen to perform the stakeout Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stakeout Parameters on page 3 66 e Close saves the changes and closes the screen See the Points stakeout for a description on the options that display by the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen GPS Stakeout The Stake out screen Figure 13 37 on page 13 37 shows the status of the stakeout displaying the current
331. on page 3 7 To setup the simulation mode tap the Set Simulator icon The Simulation Setup screen Figure 6 52 sets a reference position for GPS simulation Set the reference position by selecting the point either from the map or from the list or enter manually FAsimuiation ey OK Cancel Select point WGS564 m Lat 55 303960000 Lon 37 363960000 Ell ht 152 100 Figure 6 52 Simulation Setup P N 7010 0492 6 47 Editing Job Data Notes 6 48 TopSURV Reference Manual Chapter 7 Editing Roads To edit road data in a job tap the Edit Roads icon in the main menu The Edit Roads menu opens Figure 7 1 which includes options to edit road data in the current job Roads Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments Templates X Sections P road roof Es A amp as Horizontal Vertical Templates Sections Figure 7 1 Edit Roads Menu The Help Icon g opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about TopSURV for details see Help Icon s Pop up Menu on page 1 8 To edit object properties double click on the object Fas or select the object and tap the Edit button P N 7010 0492 7 1 Editing Roads Roads The road as an object can be described through the horizontal and vertical projections of the center line called alignments and the line describing the surface of the road and lying in
332. on receiver being used for survey Select either GR 3 GMS 2 GMS 2 Pro GMS X NET G3 or Topcon Generic for any other Topcon receiver e Elevation Mask data from satellites below this elevation are not used P N 7010 0492 9 7 Configuring a Job RTK Format DGPS Format the format of the Base receiver corrections transmitted to the Rover Ant Type the type of the Topcon antenna being used for survey Select either CR 3 CR 3 with Cone CR 3 with SCIGN CR 4 CR 4 RD CR 4 with cone CR G3 CR G3 TPSH G3 A1l G3 Al with ground plane G3 Al with ground plane RD GMS 2 GkR 3 HiPer Ga Gb HiPer GD GGD HiPer Lite Lite HiPer Pro HiPerXT HiPer Legant 2 Legant E Legant L1 Legant3 with UHF MapAnt B MG Al MG A2 MG A5 MG B5 Odyssey PG Al PG A1 with ground plane PG A1 with ground plane RD PG A2 PG A5 Regant DD Regant SD Regency DD Regency SD or Unknown Ant Ht the height of the antenna and the type of antenna height measurement either Vertical measured to ARP antenna reference point or Slant measured to the edge of the antenna The screen also illustrates the measurement type Peripherals if needed check and enable the Multiple Ports option to configure the Base to transmit data from different ports used for peripherals Figure 3 7 Figure 3 7 Peripherals Back returns to the previous screen 3 9 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Next opens the Base
333. on the middle wire for Level survey Distance the horizontal distance between the Level and the rod for Level survey Ctrl Code control code for the point Notes additional information on the point Local Time the local time when the point is collected First and Last moves the cursor to the first or last point Edit opens the Edit Raw Data screen to edit user entered raw data P N 7010 0492 6 37 Editing Job Data Recompute recomputes the point coordinates after editing the point s raw data Find by Point finds a point by its name or a part of its name Find by Code finds a point by its code or by a part of the code Find Next finds the next point that satisfies the same conditions as the previous found point Close closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen enables the menu of four items Job Info displays the Job Info screen For details see Viewing Job Information on page 2 12 Show Raw GPS TS toggles between displaying GPS raw data and TS raw data String displays strings for points among raw data Help accesses the Help files Edit Raw Data The Edit Raw Data screen Figure 6 43 on page 6 39 is used to edit the name and code of the surveyed point and the antenna instrument height at this point Also you can edit the antenna type for GPS measurements The title of the first tab is the survey type for
334. onsists of lines and points whereas the imported linework contains no points It includes positions only names start with a question mark Points in Line Layer Style Linework Mame ae List of Poin b 7 00000 7 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Ais gt Point Info Sel Pts ha Figure 5 25 Edit Imported Linework Code Library For Code Library data you can import the following formats Topcon Text tdd Topcon XML xml or DBF dbf Code Library is a set of codes with attributes used in the job Once created it can be saved as a file with tdd xml or dbf extensions 5 292 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Horizontal Alignments For Horizontal Alignments data you can import the following formats SSS H Alignment hal TopSURV H Alignment thl CLIP H Alignment PLT or ISPOL H Alignment ALI Vertical Alignments For Vertical Alignments data you can import the following formats SSS V Alignment val TopSURV V Alignment tvl CLIP V Alignment ALZ or ISPOL V Alignment RAS X Section Sets For X Section Sets data you can import the following formats SSS Cross Section Set rd TopSURV Cross Section Set trd CLIP Cross Section Set TRV ISPOL Cross Section Set SC or Custom X Sections cxs Roads For Roads data you can import the following formats Land XML xml SSS Road hal v
335. or change a configuration for a job For details on the options see Configuring a Job on page 3 1 The icon changes its appearance and reflects the instrument set for use in the current job Export opens a submenu to export job data to a new job controller or a file For details on the options see Exporting Data on page 4 1 Import opens a submenu to import data from a job controller or a file For details on the options see Importing Data on page 5 1 Edit Job opens a submenu to edit the job data For details on the options see Editing Job Data on page 6 1 Edit Roads opens a submenu to edit roads For details on the options see Editing Roads on page 7 1 Setup Base is used to set up GPS surveying For details on the options see Setting up GPS on page 8 1 Setup is used to set up backsight and occupation points to start a Total Station survey For details on the options see Setting up TS Survey on page 10 1 Survey opens a submenu to conduct a survey For details on the options see GPS Survey on page 9 1 Total Station Survey on page 11 1 and Digital Level Survey on page 12 1 P N 7010 0492 1 7 Introduction Table 1 2 Main Menu Icons Continued Stake opens a submenu to stake out objects For details on the options see Staking out on page 13 1 COGO opens a submenu to calculate cogo tasks For details on the o
336. ory The processing of the collected data is performed later the same as it is for the PP Static type PP DGPS Post Processing Differential GPS implies that the raw observations made by the Rover and the Base receiver has to be written to files for further processing e Post Processing check mark this box for additional screens to become available for post processing options in RTK Network RTK RT DGPS and Network DGPS see Figure 3 9 on page 3 11 Figure 3 24 on page 3 26 and on page 3 41 mmGPS available only in a RTK configuration check mark this box to enable a mmGPS aided RTK survey Simulation mode check mark this box to run TopSURV GPS mode in a GPS simulation mode When the mode is selected the Simulation Setup icon appears on the Edit Job menu see Simulation Setup on page 6 47 Corrections available only in a Network RTK select either VRS FKP Single Base or External Config Network DGPS or Real Time DGPS configuration select the service to receive differential correction data either a User Base Beacon SBAS CDGPS OmniSTAR VBS or OmniSTAR HP Figure 3 4 P N 7010 0492 9 5 Configuring a Job To use the differential corrections receiver BR 1 select the Beacon differential service Cancel Name style 1 Type Real Time DGPS w Corrections E _ Post Processing Simulation Mode Figure 3 4 Survey Real Time DGPS The Help Icon on the upper left corner of
337. ow the HR data see Figure 11 4 on page 11 4 Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 11 11 Total Station Survey The following three tabs are similar to the Offset options e The Data tab Figure 11 11 on the Horizontal Angle Offset screen contains the data collected during the offset measurement A Tend Settnas cose g 5 occpt pm 2 000 m 436 636 m 336 268 m 97 470 m 230 0500 dms 90 1053 dms Mnn onc en Figure 11 11 Horizontal Angle Offset Data Tab e The Map tab Figure 11 12 on the Horizontal Angle Offset screen contains the graphic view and duplicated controls from the Measurement tab For the details on viewing and customizing properties see Viewing Map on page 15 1 Ar TE Mie Settings 4 Meas Data Map 1 f occpt Zz g occplt 3 ERASTA s pm Figure 11 12 Horizontal Angle Offset Map Tab The Offsets tab toggles to another offset option 11 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Horizontal Vertical Angle The Measurement tab Figure 11 13 on the H VAng screen contains data for definition of a point using horizontal and vertical angles pp ETE e _ Meas Data Map Offsets pont Gee EM Code m Oe fi HR 2 000 m Measure To Prism Figure 11 13 Horizontal Vertical Angle Measurement Tab Point name for the offset point to be stored The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point
338. p i Defaults Figure 3 32 Output Radio Config Output NMEA The Config Output NMEA screen Figure 3 33 on page 3 34 contains a list of NMEA messages Select the types of messages to issue via the specified receiver port at the interval set in seconds up to 0 1 sec e GGA outputs data on time position and positioning e GLL outputs data on the current latitude longitude and positioning state e GNS outputs data on time position and positioning of GPS GLONASS GNSS P N 7010 0492 9 39 Configuring a Job GRS outputs the residual error of distance is used to support RAIM GSA outputs the operation mode of the GNSS receiver the satellite used for positioning and DOP GST outputs the statistics of position errors GSV outputs the number of satellites satellite number elevation angle azimuthal angle and SNR HDT outputs the direction heading RMC outputs time date position course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver VTG outputs the traveling direction and velocity ZDA outputs UTC day month year and local time zone NMEA Me Gov he Interval 1 00 Sec Figure 3 33 Config Output NMEA Config Beacon The Config Beacon screen Figure 3 34 on page 3 35 contains settings for a radio beacon source of differential GPS corrections e Country the country where the radio beacon differential service is located
339. p up menu containing two items e Receiver Setting check mark the box on the Receiver Settings screen to turn the charger mode off e Help accesses the Help files e Next opens the Base PP Setup screen Base PP Setup On the Base PP Setup screen raw data logging parameters for the base are set up Figure 3 9 on page 3 11 e Raw Data Logging set raw data logging parameters File Name select a file name Log To select if the name of the receiver file is automatically set or user defined the corresponding dialog box is displayed at the logging start Logging Rate enter a logging rate e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Base Radio screen Figure 3 10 on page 3 12 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings e Finish saves the settings and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 3 10 TopSURV Reference Manual gt Configuring the Survey Ar PP Setup Cancel Raw Data Logging File Name Default w Log To z Logging Rate 5 00 Secs Figure 3 9 Base PP Setup Raw data always records into the receiver memory TopSURV allows logging data to the controller when in PP DGPS survey mode only Base Radio The Base Radio screen Figure 3 10 on page 3 12 contains the settings for configuring the radio modem connected to the Base receiver for RTK and RT DGPS user base surveys e Radio Modem select a modem type from
340. per left corner of the screen opens the pop up menu that contains the following two items Point Properties opens the Point Properties screen to define the point increment value for Survey points Point Numbering on page 3 44 Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 9 65 Configuring a Job Edit Prisms The Edit Prisms screen Figure 3 65 allows the user to change the prism constant selected in the list e Prism list of prisms e Prism Info displays editable information on the prism selected Name enter a name for the prism Constant enter a constant value for the prism e Delete removes the prism from the list e Update updates for new information on the prism Feit Prisms OK Cancel Prism x Prism Info Name fo Offset Constant fo mm Figure 3 65 Edit Prisms Stakeout Parameters The Stkt Parms screen sets the default stakeout parameters These parameters can be changed using the Settings button from any Stakeout screen in TS mode Figure 3 66 on page 3 67 Hz Dist Tolerance enter a time to set for when the graph switches to a bull s eye in Stakeout e Reference Direction sets the direction assumed to be the referenced direction during the stakeout Select Instrument Reference only 9 66 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Turn TS to Design Pt controls the way the total station turns toward the design point Search After T
341. play Show SumBS SumF S displays SumBS SumFS measurement Inverse opens the Two Point Inverse COGO screen see Inverse on page 14 3 Help accesses the Help files The Data tab on the Level Run lt run name gt screen Figure 12 4 displays information related to the current measurement pL Data 150 652 1 1289 152 183 43 310 Sum BS Dist 150 370 SumBS SumFS 5 190 Motes FS 1 5316 FS Dist 35 970 Sum FS Dist 145 180 Accumulated 0 001 Figure 12 4 Level Run Data P N 7010 0492 12 5 Digital Level Survey Display Settings The Settings screen Figure 12 5 selects the columns to display The Up Down arrows are used to change the order of the selected column Sum BS Dist Sum FS Dist SumBS SumFS x Figure 12 5 Display Settings Two Peg Test The Two Peg Test is performed to check 1f the line of sight of the level telescope is horizontal when the instrument is leveled To perform the Two Peg Test tap the Two Peg Test icon 7 The Two Peg Test screen Figure 12 6 on page 12 7 guides you through a series of measurements to help determine any errors First it prompts you to take shots to the first point assuming the level is fairly centered between the two points Then the instrument should be moved to one of the pegs and the shots are taken again to Pegs 1 and A 12 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Two Peg Test AEE Peg Test close As Peg Test Close Measure to
342. plicate lt Objects gt The Duplicate Objects screen issues a warning that prevents the loss of points roads or point lists when names of these imported objects coincide with existing ones Select from the following options e Overwrite the imported object overwrites the existing one Rename the imported object is renamed The new name should be noted in the corresponding field Prefix Suffix the imported object differs from the existing object by prefix or suffix The prefix suffix should be noted in the corresponding field e Yes accepts the decision Yes To All accepts the same decision for all similar cases e Skip skips the object without importing Skip All skips all the objects with names that coincide with the names of existing objects without importing e Close disables the import process and opens the Import Status screen to remove all the objects already imported Figure 5 10 P N 7010 0492 5 9 Importing Data Ar import Status po Imported objects were successfully removed Close Figure 5 10 Import Status for Removed Objects The import process cannot skip duplicate templates These objects must be renamed Importing From Device To import a job or any other file from a controller device tap the From Device icon Figure 5 11 on page 5 11 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From Device Selecting Port The Settings screen Figure 5 11 selects
343. po Data eee SP13 Atk Figure 9 21 Auto Topo Map P N 7010 0492 9 71 GPS Survey Table 9 2 lists and describes the fields for stored points Table 9 2 Stored Points eee ee the name of a point the code of a point the Attributes List icon opens the Code Attributes screen for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 toggles between the buttons and status icons on the right part of the screen When pressed changes its appearance to the second icon For a detailed description of the Map view see Viewing Map on page 15 1 X Section To perform X Section function tap the X Section icon The X Section function is similar to that of the Total Station mode except for the measurement screens which are the corresponding GPS measurement screens For details see Edit Cross Section Set on page 7 30 and Topo Survey on page 9 2 Find Station To perform Find Station function tap the Find Station icon La The Find Station function is similar to that of the Total Station mode except for the measurement screens which are the corresponding GPS measurement screens For details see Find Station on page 11 27 and Topo Survey on page 9 2 9 22 TopSURV Reference Manual Tape Dimension Tape Dimension To perform Tape Dimension function tap the Tape Dimension icon The Tape Dimension function is similar to that of the Total Station mode except for
344. point ARP above the mark Also specifies the measurement type for the height either slant or vertical AR for the TS mode the height of the rod target Reverse Order check mark and enable to start a stakeout from the end of the Point List Stakeout opens the Stake out screen P N 7010 0492 13 39 Staking out See the Points stakeout for a description of the options on the Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen Stakeout GPS and TS GPS and TS stakeouts are performed in the same way as described in Stakeout Point on page 13 2 The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout Here points can be staked out in any order by selecting the next stakeout point using an additional option from the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner Select Stakeout Point opens the Select Point screen to select a stakeout point from the list Select Point for the Stakeout The Select Point screen Figure 13 40 on page 13 41 displays the Point List being staked from which points can be randomly selected to continue the stakeout The new starting point can be selected from the list or by double tapping a point on the map to the right of the list e Show Remaining Points check mark and enable to show all the points that have not yet been staked out e Show Staked Points check mark and enable to display points in the list that
345. point coordinates after editing the point s raw data if the recomputation was not performed in Raw Data Help accesses the Help files e Settings opens the Display screen Figure 6 3 on page 6 4 Display Settings On the Display screen Figure 6 3 select the display parameters to customize the software interface then press OK to save the settings and return to the Points screen Ar CE OK Cancel Coord Type around round a Coord Order Northing Easting Elevation Azimuth Origin North x Disp Dir As Azimuth i Disp CL Pos As Station Full Station 100 000 m Figure 6 3 Display For details on the display settings see Display on page 2 8 Finding Point by Name The Find by Point screen Figure 6 4 on page 6 5 contains settings for searching for a point by its name e Point the name of a point or a part of the name Match entire name set if the whole name was entered in the Point Name field 6 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Match partial name set if a part of the searched name was entered in the Point field Ar DE by Point close Foint 520l Match entire name C Match partial name Figure 6 4 Find by Point Name e Search starts the search process and returns to the Points screen highlighting the point found Finding Point by Code The Find by Code screen Figure 6 5 searches for point information by its code Ar DE by Co
346. point is staked out e Beep on Storing Points if enabled makes a sound each time a point is stored Hold Vertical Offset if enabled the vertical offset is added automatically to each measurement Available only for the digital level e Back returns to the previous screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings FFAriscellaneous Finish Cancel Display Coordinates after Meas Apply Earth Curvature and Refr Prompt for Feature Codes Stakeout Sound Beep on Storing Points Hold Vertical Offset Figure 3 69 Miscellaneous Level P N 7010 0492 9 71 Configuring a Job Setting Coordinate System Parameters To set coordinate system parameters for the job tap the Coord System icon The Coord System screen displays coordinate system information for the job Figure 3 70 on page 3 74 Projection specifies the projection used The List button opens the Projections screen see Figure 3 71 on page 3 75 where active projections can be manipulated added from a list of pre defined projections deleted Use Grid Ground when a grid projection is selected this box is available If enabled the List button is activated to open the Grid to from Ground Param screen where transformation parameters are set to place grid
347. processing RTK 8 16 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status aeons Ee ee Figure 8 16 Status Multi Base Tab Position Plots The Plots tab Figure 8 17 displays the current receiver position S0secs Horizontal position plo Figure 8 17 Status Scatter Plots P N 7010 0492 9 17 Setting up GPS Table 8 1 lists and describes the plot icons for the current position receiver Table 8 1 Plot lcons Current Receiver Position Ploticons Receiver Position Description Zooms the plot inward Zooms the plot outward Switches the horizontal position plot to the vertical one gt Opens the Properties screen Figure 8 18 from which to set graphical features for the scatter plots Properties a Switches the vertical position plot to the horizontal one On the Properties screen you can set graphical features for scatter plots Figure 8 18 Time Window secs I Vertical position plot FAproperties OK Cancel Auto Zoom Horizontal position plot Figure 8 18 Scatter Plot Properties 8 18 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status On the Properties screen Figure 8 18 on page 8 18 for the vertical position plot enter the duration in seconds for the time axis Time Window secs On the Properties screen Figure 8 18 on page 8 18 for the horizontal position plot enter the following parameters e Show Grid if enabled displays the local coordinate axes e Auto Zoom
348. ptions see COGO Calculations on page 14 1 Map opens the map for the current job For details on the options see Viewing Map on page 15 1 Mode switches between GPS and Total Station instruments for a survey For details on the options see Switching Instruments on page 16 1 Help Icon s Pop up Menu The Help Icon opens a pop up menu giving access to the help files module activation codes port data logging changing menu interface and information about TopSURV Help The Help option opens the TopSURV Help topics screen Figure 1 9 FAsire_1 A Oe TopSURY Help Su eso A TopSURV Help Job Edit View Help TS Survey GPS Survey 0 Figure 1 9 Help Topics 1 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Main Screen Activate Modules To view or to add the ID s for activating the main features in TopSURYV select the Activate Modules option The Security screen Figure 1 10 displays the following device numbers and the Ds that have been entered e Key Value 1 2 the default key values of the controller e Activation IDs the codes needed to enable observation modes and usage of roads in TopSURV e OK saves the ID values and if allowed provides access to the observation modes and creating and using roads Key Value 3220602745 Activation IDs TS 1644166766 Contractor 1539972601 Robotic 1639440 123 GPS 1630964539 GIS 1643642874 Roads 163043 1506 m
349. r acquisition of the signal phase lock and delay lock loops Satellite system defines the system of satellites to use RTK Position only for real time surveys selects the method of RTK corrections definition either Extrapolation or Matched Epoch sometimes described as asynchronous or synchronous respectively Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Miscellaneous screen Figure 3 50 on page 3 50 Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used The Help Icon in the upper left corner contains two items 3 49 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey RTK Settings opens the RTK Settings screen Figure 3 49 to set ambiguity resolution parameters for RTK engine Help accesses the Help files RTK Settings The RTK Settings screen Figure 3 49 sets parameters to govern the RTK engine Ambiguity Level KEMM Resolution Period 1 00 Expected Correction 1 00 Figure 3 49 RTK Settings e Ambiguity Level select Low Medium or High The higher the specified level the longer the ambiguity search time e Resolution Period defines the period at which the ambiguities estimation is performed e Expected Correction Period sets differential correction update interval for base station effective only in the RTK Matched Epoch mode The value should be set to the exact rate at which t
350. r fracDenominator displays as the next format feet inches fracNumerator fracDenominator where the fracDenominator can be either 2 4 8 or 16 e Angle units of angle measurements and parameters select either DMS degrees minutes seconds Grads Gons Radians for Cogo use only or Mils for Cogo use only 360 degrees 400 grads 2x radians 6400 mils Fa e Temperature for TS mode only units of temperature used only for the raw measurements select either Celsius C or Fahrenheit F e Pressure for TS mode only units of atmosphere pressure used only for the raw measurements mmHg hPa inHg or bbar Azimuth and distances can be entered as two points 66 99 66 99 separated by or Certain angles can be entered as three points separated by or For instance a value of 100 101 indicates the Azimuth or Distance from Point 100 to Point 101 e Back returns to the previous screen e Next opens the Display screen Figure 2 7 on page 2 8 e Finish saves the settings and returns to the main screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 9 7 Working with a Job Display The Display screen Figure 2 7 customizes the software interface Set the following parameters and press OK to save the settings Coord Type Coord Order Northing Easting El Ht x lt Azimuth Origi
351. r more points with known coordinates H Ara Eley Settings Close amp Meas Data Map Set jogs E Code m Remote Bi fi HR 2 000 m HA 230 0005 VA4 90 1003 5D 800 005 dms m Measure Foresight Direct Figure 10 17 Elevation e Point Elevation the known point name select either from the map or from the list the known elevation 10 16 TopSURV Reference Manual Remote Benchmarks e Code the known point code e HR the height of the rod target Measure Foresight Direct press the Meas to take the sideshot to the point Settings opens the Mode screen see Set Measurement Mode on page 10 9 The Help Icon on the upper left corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Resection task except the Options item displays The Data tab shows the results of the current measurement and the scale factor and standard deviations of the coordinates The Map tab shows all points in a graphic mode For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 The Meas Set tab displays the results of the sideshots being done during one set the same as for the Resection task Ara S Settings 4 Meas Data Map Set Point Res VA Res Ht 1 0 0001 0 002 0 0000 0 001 0 0001 0 003 S Ke Figure 10 18 Elevation Meas Set Tab The table Figure 10 18 represents the result list of the measurements being made the residuals of the ve
352. r with another controller P settings Com Port Figure 4 10 Select Port e Com Port selects the Communication port select either COM COM2 Ethernet or Bluetooth e Next opens the Select File screen Figure 4 11 on page 4 11 4 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to Device Select File To Export On the Select File screen you can navigate to the file to export Figure 4 11 Type Text Files txt OJ TPS TopSURVEFiles ee comm log txt Marne comm log txt Figure 4 11 Select File to Export e OK opens the Export File screen reflecting the status of exporting the selected file Figure 4 12 then returns to the main screen if successful e Cancel returns to the main screen Export file File name comm log txt File size 68568 bytes Uploading Figure 4 12 Export File P N 7010 0492 4 11 Exporting Data Exporting to File To export data to a file tap the To File icon The To File screen selects data type from the current job to export to files of either pre defined or custom formats For a description of these formats see Appendix A Figure 4 13 Format Topcon 3D Linework In aa Figure 4 13 Export To File Data select the data type to export either Points Lines Point Lists Code Library Raw Data Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets Roads X Sect Templates Localization Scanning Data Roads Survey J
353. rStyle K Layer TN Point Style A Filled Triang na Line Style Dash Dot aa a Width lt By Layer gt vi Layer w Area m p Lines ba Transparency 50 Do Figure 6 38 Edit Area Layer Style Point Lists The Point List is a group of points that can be simultaneously processed and is tightly intergrated throughout TopSURV Depending on the context the points may or may not be connected with a line A Point List with its points connected forms a polyline To use the Point Lists tap the Point Lists icon The List of Point Lists screen displays Figure 6 39 List of Point Lists The List of Pt Lists screen Figure 6 39 on page 6 34 contains a list of existing Point Lists on the left side of the screen and the two windows on the right side that displays a general view of the selected list in the horizontal and vertical planes To view the current selected point list on a larger map double click one of the map plots P N 7010 0492 6 33 Editing Job Data Atk of Pt Lists Close AS Figure 6 39 List of Point Lists e Delete deletes the Point List from the list e Copy creates a copy of the selected List e Edit edits the properties of the selected List The Edit Point List screen displays Figure 6 40 on page 6 35 e Add creates a new point List The Add Point List screen displays e The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing two it
354. rance sets when the graph switches to a bull s eye in Stakeout 9 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Reference Direction sets the reference direction for stakeout The reference direction can be North moving direction moving direction North the direction to the reference point or a reference azimuth Moving Direction North is similar to the Moving Direction option but displays the North direction when the user is within three meters of the design point Solution Type for real time surveys only defines the type of position solutions that should be used for the stakeout Fix Only Fix and Float Fix Float DGPS DGPS Auto or All e The Auto Accept field sets the parameters for automatic acceptance during a stakeout Num Meas to Avg sets the number of measurements used for averaging as needed Precision m Hz sets Horizontal and Vertical precision values if taken into account If both the Precision and Num Meas To Avg boxes are checked both these conditions must be satisfied before the coordinates are accepted e Next opens the next Stake Parameters screen see Figure 3 45 on page 3 44 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen e The Help Icon in the upper left corner contains two items Display opens the Staked Point Icon screen Figure 3 47 on page 3 47 to set an icon for the staked point Help accesses the Help files The
355. rations for TS mode are available from the drop down list My Conventional My Reflectorless My Robotic and My Level In the Contractor Module only My Conventional and My Reflectorless are available The List button opens the Configurations screen to edit parameters for the each configuration OK sets the selected configuration for the current job and returns to the main screen FA survey Style oK Cancel Select the Configuration for the Job or create a New Configuration GPS Config Name my RTK v TS Config Name Default k a Figure 3 2 Survey Style Configurations are stored in a file called Styles tsstyles in the TopSURV directory 3 9 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey The job settings of a survey configuration are D gt applied only after opening a TopSURV screen which enables you to perform and store measurements in the job file GPS Configuration To configure a GPS survey press the List button in the GPS Config field of the Survey Style screen Figure 3 3 On the Configurations screen a new configuration is performed with the help of a Wizard The Configurations screen Figure 3 3 contains a list of pre defined configurations Either edit an existing configuration or create a new configuration e Delete deletes the highlighted configuration e Edit opens the Survey screen to edit the configuration settings e Add opens the Survey screen to create
356. ree aan cre near cnt nee eccerenn reer at 14 39 SEAN OM GC OMSL Zeena 14 40 Cui Vie QUIS CL ie cresareaeeaei T pateabecameas 14 42 Calculating a Road Offset ccccccccssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 44 ACjUSUINS POMS easi tia hoses a sets 14 46 ROLE ee A cua dm cestieuin abaneamiareetetanatet 14 46 select Points by Range s nccsceniaennion 14 47 Tran WAVE sre SS 14 48 DC Ale apa S 14 50 LDL AO a E nen nrc at eerie Troe 14 51 Pomt Pair Ifo sas seccsdscecadasedestadecsresdedeonnsssercauieees 14 53 Traverse AUJUstinent dorinrae nene an 14 53 Adjustment Parameters cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 54 AUSE Nn R sal 14 55 Ea e A E EE ETE E EEEE 14 56 BSF ONE goara T 14 58 Chapter 15 Viewing Map ssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 15 1 DOOD Ale seein ia iap acta nie a rewaniredslataed 15 2 DC IEC GP OM ts ies sich asasatodadalscnatanieuneaaaunessascmeabicee 15 3 PROPCrules ceannann aa oan 15 3 Actions on the Map ccccccccccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeessseeees 15 4 xii TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents Chapter 16 Switching Instruments ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 16 1 Observa non IOS sanee 16 1 Appendix A PUIG FONMalS sssini baa A 1 Point Coordinate PoOrnats sacraire a A A 1 TeC ton FOMA heer A 1 CAA eae E aa oun A 2 PCD EA E canteen ae ee eens A 3 GTS Orena AN A 3 O C Ta TO A 4 GTS 7 with SUNOS caristce sie A ancidst cet ivan enieattbdede A 4 6 Lee rarer ero
357. reen Figure 4 4 selects the types of points to export 1f Code Library Localization or Roads are checked if points filter by type has been enabled in the Export screen Place check marks near the desired point types PaP os ro ee Fos oor Point Types Design Points Control Points cogo Points Base Station Topo Points Offset Topo Points Auto Topo Points w amp Check Uncheck Next gt gt Figure 4 4 Select Point Type s to Export e Point Types the point types available for import either Design Points Control Points Cogo Points Base Station Topo Points Offset Topo Points Auto Topo Points Sideshot Offset Remote Reflectorless BackSight Stake Points Stake Line Check Points Manually Typed or Tape Dimension e Check marks the highlighted entries e Uncheck removes the mark from the highlighted code e Back returns to the previous screen e Next if available opens the next screen to select objects once the button becomes grayed out tap the Finish button to start the export process e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 4 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting To a Job Select Points to Export The Points to Export screen Figure 4 5 filters the exported points FApoints to Export y Filter by Codes i FO F3 FO y Filter by Range ii 105 Mame e for Range eee Figure 4 5 Points to Export Filter by Codes export all poin
358. ress to Add field to the list of IP addresses below e Back returns to the previous screen 9 90 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Next opens the Rover Receiver screen Figure 3 20 on page 3 22 For PP enabled surveys the Rover PP Setup screen displays first Figure 3 24 on page 3 26 In the PP Static case the Occupation Times screen is opened Figure 3 41 on page 3 41 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Base Radio Parameters screens displays the pop up menu containing the Help item to access the Help files Rover Receiver The Rover Recyr screen contains Rover settings Figure 3 20 on page 3 22 For RTK surveys the screen contains the following parameters Figure 3 20 on page 3 22 for configuring a Rover receiver and antenna e Receiver Model the model of the Topcon receiver being used for survey Select either GR 3 GMS 2 GMS 2 Pro GMS X NET G3 or Topcon Generic for any other Topcon receiver Elevation Mask data from satellites below this elevation are not used RTK Format the format of the corrections received from the Base Ant Type the type of the Topcon antenna being used for survey Select either CR 3 CR 3 with Cone CR 3 with SCIGN CR 4 CR 4 RD CR 4 with cone CR G3 CR G3 TPSH G3 A1 G3
359. rmat Scanning data includes an orientation file control points for orientation and Camera calibration file for DI 3000 DI 3000 Project Header FIELD_SCAN_FSC_FILEVER1 0 Text Format Orientation Information File Name of Image Size of Image Width pixel Height pixel Number of Image Coordinates of Orientation Points A 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning Data Format Image coordinates of Orientation point Point Name X Y Text Format Control Point Terrain For Orientation File Point Name X Y Z CSV Text Format Results of Orientation Calculation Single Orientation ERR MAX X Maximum Error Y Maximum Error 0 000000 ERR RMS X Standard Dev Pixel Y Standard Deviation Pixel 0 000000 Discrepancy of each orientation point Pixel Text Format Camera Calibration For Digital Camera 7 955772 focal length mm 1 866217 x of principal point m 1 375943 y of principal point m 2 distortion model 4 number of distortion parameters 3 596956e 003 distortion parameter 1 1 414950e 004 distortion parameter 2 1 786501e 004 distortion parameter 3 4 303863e 004 distortion parameter 4 0 005600 x resolution mm pixel 0 005600 y resolution mm pixel QO number of fiducial marks QO number of radial distortion values Text Format Setting Information Instrument Point X Y Z Backsight Point X Y Z mh 0 0000 0 0000 H Unstrument Height P N 7010 0492 A 47 File Formats
360. rmation Ao to from ok Cancel Parameters Sim Euan Direction Grid to Ground w Combined SF 1 0000000000 Az Rotation 2 00000 dms hal hl Offsets m Morth 1000 000 East 1000 000 Figure 3 75 Grid to from Ground Scale Factor e Direction switches between the Grid to Ground and Ground to Grid coordinate transformation types e Combined SF sets the combined scale factor e Az Rotation sets the angle between the North directions of the grid and the ground coordinate systems This angle defines the reference direction for ground azimuths e Offsets enter offset values of the grid origin along the North and East axes to reduce ground coordinates to manageable values For Average Job Height the Grid to Ground screen Figure 3 76 on page 3 80 sets the Average Height of the job points for Grid to Ground coordinate transformation P N 7010 0492 3 79 Configuring a Job Ao to eeu Ok Parameters Awg Job Ht Avg Job Ht 150 000 m Map Scale 1 00000000 Az Rotation 2 00000 dms Offsets m Morth 1000 000 East 1000 000 Figure 3 76 Grid to Ground Average Job Height e Avg Job Ht sets the average job height to compute the elevation scale factor An elevation factor is determined by using a constant value for the mean radius of the earth An approximation of the earth s radius used in TopSURV is 6 371 000 meters e Map Scale sets the value of the zone scale factor how man
361. rom the drop down list or enter a new code e Offset horizontal and vertical offsets Press the Down Up Grade button to select the type and value of the vertical offset The hand symbol means the function is selectable Although the value is input as Grade in percents the vertical offset is recalculated to meters or another selected unit after pressing the OK button e OK saves the changes and closes the screen Cross Section Sets To edit cross section sets in the current job tap the X Sections icon The X Sect Set screen Figure 7 28 on page 7 30 contains a list of cross section sets and a general scaled view of the highlighted cross section set P N 7010 0492 7 29 Editing Roads Figure 7 28 Cross Section Set e Delete deletes the cross section set from the list e Edit opens the Edit X Sect Set screen displaying properties of the selected cross section set Figure 7 28 e Add opens a blank Add X Sect Set screen to create a new set of cross sections Edit Cross Section Set The Edit X Sect Set screen Figure 7 29 on page 7 31 contains a list of stations where cross sections are applied and a scaled plot of a cross section at the highlighted station 7 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Cross Section Sets Ar B ATES Ok Cancel Name Ix Station Left X Sect 0 00 000 1 0 25 000 2 0 60 000 2 Figure 7 29 Edit X Section Set Parameters e Name the name of the cross se
362. rtical and horizontal angles the measured and initial parameters HR HA VA and so forth The Ht Diff column represents the difference between the calculated height and the height of that measurement e Remove deletes highlighted measurements in the elevation P N 7010 0492 10 17 Setting up TS Survey e Re Meas replaces the current measurement with a new measurement e Accept stores the new coordinates in the database e Settings e Close Remote Control To set up a survey with remote control tap the Remote Control icon If one person performs the survey process with a motorized instrument the remote control transmits commands from the controller to the total station The radio modems need to be set and connected to the controller and the instrument The Remote Cntrl screen Figure 10 19 controls the total station through the radio P remote Crtrl Remote Data Map SOBs Bs Remote Ctrl HA 33 2511 V4 91 0543 50 19 070 ae Figure 10 19 Remote Control o the Total Station The Remote tab shows the current values of the total station measurements and provides a set of tools for control shows the battery status for the total station shows the status of communication between the controller and total station 10 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Remote Control switches the keyboard control on off shows the current status of the switch e Ql
363. rts check mark this box to set the number of ports to input data from peripherals External Laser check mark this box to use an external laser When selected the Laser Connect field displays to set the device the laser is connected to either Receiver or Controller The Parameters button opens the Laser Config screen to 9 99 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey configure the laser device Figure 3 26 on page 3 28 Ar EEEE oK Cancel NMEA Ports Multiple Ports External Laser Receiver wl Parameters Figure 3 21 Rover Receiver Options The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Rover Receiver screen displays the pop up menu containing four options e Receiver Setting check mark the box on the Receiver Settings screen appear to turn the charger mode off Relative calibrations on Base only for RTK surveys select the option if needed to use Relative antenna model at the base station that transmits CMR data By default TopSURV 7 2 uses Absolute calibration offsets for antennas Also you can select this option when editing the base e RTK Protocol adds the RTK Protocol field to the Rover Receiver screen to set the CSD Data protocol through a cellular phone used as modem e Help to access the Help files For Real Time DGPS survey type the screen allows a selection of DGPS correction format e DGPS Format the format of the differential corrections received either from
364. rve The value of Small or P N 7010 0492 13 43 Staking out Large can be selected from the Curve drop down box to indicate which of these two curves should be used for staking e Antenna for GPS the antenna height e HR for TS the rod target height e Stakeout opens the Stakeout Curve screen e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 The Help Icon in the upper left hand corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Line amp Offset screen see Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 GPS Stakeout The Stake Point screen Figure 13 44 shows the GPS antenna position graphically and display the distance along the curve and offset values FAstate Point Close Feel H Vv Eg 100 2201 3 200 i Point k Right of Curve 1 916 m Length of Curve 1 993 m Dist Along Curve 0 573 m Fill 0 000 m Azimuth 73 2100 dms Figure 13 44 Stakeout Curve e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit point screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the Stakeout Line screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout 13 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Curve TS Stakeout The Stake Point screen Figure 13 45 displays the rod position graphically and reports the necessary direction and the values of the distances to the c
365. s remove the check mark from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap icon in the upper left corner of the screen Caution should be exercised when setting the E gt azimuth since road elements are usually tangential to each other e Turn the direction of turn Select either the Right value clockwise direction or the Left value counter clockwise direction e OK saves the element to the road and returns to the Add Horizontal Alignment screen Add a Spiral To add a spiral select the Spiral option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Horizontal Alignment screen The Spiral screen displays Figure 7 12 Ar RIE oK Cancel EF Radius Start 0 000 m E Length 250 000 m Azimuth 341 0229 dms Turn Right v Dir Figure 7 12 Spiral The plot at the bottom of the screen displays the element s appearance e Radius Deg Chord Deg Curve the radius of the curve or one of two parameters unambiguously defining the radius the degree P N 7010 0492 7 13 Editing Roads of chord or the degree of curve see Add a Curve on page 7 12 e Length Sp Const the parameter is the square root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral as defined above Consequently the spiral constant has the units of length e Azimuth by default the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element This field is editable only for the starting element of th
366. s A A 5 Cele UN eee ae ee A 5 MMH OO eae eia A TE A 6 BS EE E EEEE E TA AE A E T A 7 FOP onnaa a OA A 7 SS EEE oran raa A A A A 12 Cut Sheet Standard 3 s2iei coincident Maia ndeos A 13 Cut Sheet User Defined seiren a A 13 CHECK ONGC acces ia rcunetcaeseiencentendeesacuesi EN A 14 ai IMS 6 E EE EE E E A 15 CMM suse crests tusuiet dvinste decanicatvaaiaevemiadiennnien said nestindoes A 15 Ld AM E ree terre tare eet en oe ene rere ert nee A ee A 15 GORD gan ERT E EA A A 15 MOSS GENIO ccc ones eonaean ee eee A 16 NEZ ear ae Re nee ec a Te eer me eee eee A 17 NEZ Wi SUAS cee tesco A A 17 Custom Format with Quality Control information A 18 Code Libraries nciecse te ee ees A 19 Topcon Data Dictionary Format TDD A 19 XML File as Storage of the Code Library XML A 20 Data Base Format as Storage of the Code Library PDB TY aap cds oh eetctete saree aeictood eenenceataie hacesss A 22 Roads Formals cssevssnosemsalnadsnes u A A 22 S90 ROd aea eer E A A 22 TDS ROU reaa a a na tat ae ents A 23 P N 7010 0492 xiij Table of Contents MECE ROA ea Ana he cases A A 27 Lnd AXME ROS eais E rer tee net rere A 27 TopSURV Road format V 2 0 oo cccceccessennteneeeeees A 27 CTP oraa T E e A 29 TS PO De seei E A A 30 MX GENIO sree a a A 31 Tekla XRoad amp XStreet VGP ceecee A 33 Horizontal Elements 00 0 0 cccceseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeaes A 33 AV Ertical Element eene i A 35 X sect Templates Formats cccccces
367. s a set of cross section templates to use in designing the road 7 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Horizontal Alignment The List button opens the X Section Set screen to edit cross section sets for details see Cross Section Sets on page 7 29 e Start Stn Start Chn the starting station number with distance to the station or the starting chain distance depending on a selection made in the Display screen for details see Display on page 2 8 Stn Interval Chain Interval the interval between the points where road related computations are made After the Road is created calculate the road points The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items e Calculate Road Points opens the Calculate Road Points screen see Calculate Road Points on page 7 33 e Help accesses the Help files Horizontal Alignment To edit a horizontal alignment tap the Horizontal icon The Hz Alnt screen Figure 7 4 displays a list of the horizontal alignments and the map area displaying the plot of the highlighted horizontal alignment Figure 7 4 Horizontal Alignment P N 7010 0492 7 5 Editing Roads e Delete deletes the horizontal alignment from the job e Edit opens the Edit Hz Alnt screen displaying the parameters of the selected horizontal alignment e Add opens the Add Hz Alnt screen with empty parameter fields to set a new horizontal
368. s format allows selection of parameters of Quality Control in the Custom Style screen Figure 4 25 FAcustom Style Available Ell ht Notes Codes amp Strings Codes amp Attributes Solution Type Num of GPS Figure 4 25 Custom Style with QC AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD Drawing If the AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD Drawing format is selected the To File screen has the following additional options for point export Figure 4 26 on page 4 23 4 2 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File Cancel Data Points v Format AutoCad DXF dxt Select Types Of The Points Use Filters Co not export code attributes Figure 4 26 AutoCAD DXF TopSURV only exports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG files Do not export code attributes enable to not export code attributes e Code Style opens the Code Style screen to set a format for point properties codes control codes strings and notes to export to the file For details refer to On the Code Style on page 4 20 Settings opens the Settings screen to select point and line styles e Next with the help of the export wizard follow next screens to export points e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings On the Settings screen you select desired drawing styles to represent points and lines e Point Style selects the style for points either TopSURV Point Blocks AutoCAD Points AutoCAD Points with Text Fields or Carlson Po
369. s if available Use sat only if avail use only the satellites for which ionospheric corrections are available For GMS 2 SBAS PRN and Ionospheric NOTE corrections are available As ssas Setup Cancel PRH Name GPS Type 120 AOR E 2 EGHOS 121 122 AOR W WAAS 123 124 Artemis EGNOS 1396 i lt JE Iono Corr Use sat only if avail a Figure 3 37 SBAS Setup P N 7010 0492 3 37 Configuring a Job e Next opens the Survey Parameters screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 CDGPS Radio The CDGPS Radio screen Figure 3 38 contains settings for the receiver port connected to the CDGPS radio AOE Eee Finish Cancel Radio Modem Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port Baud 38400 Data Parity None Stop 1 e o a Defaults Figure 3 38 CDGPS Radio e Receiver Port Connected to Radio contains parameters for the connection port port parity number of data bits baud rate and the number of stop bits e Next opens the Survey Parameters screen e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Config OmniSTAR The Config OmniSTAR screen Figure 3 39 on page 3 39 contains settings for an OmniSTAR source of differential correction data e Satellite the satellite that delivers differential GPS corrections e Back
370. s sence eeotenee staat cneaa 6 30 FIG PTC A hie a sit ee ee ee eee 6 31 POS A PAC el suree 6 32 Git a lay Ct Sly le acon caterer cee ae ae 6 32 PODELI Oa alike biceeceghtinea E A 6 33 EIStCOEPOm LISS ieee 6 33 Edit Pont LIST rania N 6 34 RW DUT easa a a E Sonstanreatinass 6 36 Edt Raw Dati ouennn a a 6 38 Backeroond Image S iste oss Surat nanan A 6 41 Add Image sraciiinio cran eee 6 43 BC CCU S ee N 6 44 SESSIONS aae a mien at eR asheheeat 6 45 SESSIONS UUs yates eesstceel a a 6 46 SUI AMON SOUP aiea N 6 47 Chapter 7 EANN ROAS sisisi 7 1 Roade a a a Riana 7 2 ETERO ena ent Meer prt rena ere t men teen ton re wrne te 7 4 Horizontal Al OnMenel sicc3 sisepasadicdateceiataseepalddekacdedietete dias 7 5 Edit the Horizontal Alignment cccccceeceeeeeeees 7 6 Adda LNs enr a sel Satatplrasstuices 7 11 Add a CUVE seissiseinni E 7 12 Adda Spiral esci ees cotats casei tentebe senses 7 13 Intersection Point sccxiciicnctnnerenawaieuaied 7 14 Vertical Alignments va cracsectietennsvesanaseseadeeebadedsacidedeasaccnas 7 16 Add Vertical Alignments ccscssseeccceeeeeeneeeeees 7 17 Edit Vertical Alignment ccccceecsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 18 Vi TopSURV Reference Manual Table of Contents Element ennan ate tates ade Bi eu teioes 7 18 N erica Grade eien 7 22 EMEA UNE a 7 23 kono SCCM OMNS siririn EE 7 24 Cross Section Template S araram e 7 26 Edit X Section Template erose
371. s the attributes of the chosen code opens the Code Attributes screen see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Layer opens the Select Layer screen to put the point For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 Note opens the Notes screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 e OK saves the changes and opens the Stakeout screen Figure 13 21 P N 7010 0492 13 21 Staking out TS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 23 reflects the progress of the stakeout displaying the current station in the upper left corner of the screen the layout of the target and the current position the necessary direction and the values of the distances to the target Towards TS 0 052 m Fill 2 900 m Turn Left 0 0024 dms Figure 13 23 Stakeout e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking e Stop instructs the Robotic Total Station to stop tracking and go into Stand By mode Search instructs the Robotic Total Station to start searching for the prism Ee sj advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station Store takes a measurement and opens the Store Point screen to stor
372. s the currently selected file from the list e Add opens the Add Image screen Figure 6 48 on page 6 43 to browse the controller s directories for the desired file e Up Down arrows moves the selected images up or down in the list e OK opens the selected file If no World File exists for the background image file selected a warning displays and the Background Images screen appears again to select another file Multiple background images can be selected but is limited by the amount of free space in the controller memory 6 42 TopSURV Reference Manual Background Images Add Image The Add Image screen Figure 6 48 selects an image file to add to the Background Images list I TESTGEOTIEFF tif Name TESTGEOTIFF tif Figure 6 48 Add Image e Type selects the type of the image to be added either GeoTIFF TIFF JPEG or BITMAP e Name displays the name of the selected file e OK opens the Properties screen Figure 6 49 on page 6 44 for the selected file P N 7010 0492 6 43 Editing Job Data Properties If the selected image uses a World File select the projection in which the coordinates in the World File are given either Current job projection or UTM FAproperties oK Cancel Filename TESTGEOTIFF File Path Storage Card TESTGEOTIFF File Type GeoTIFF Units v Projection Current Use World File Figure 6 49 Properties of Background Image e OK returns
373. s the survey process After pressing the button changes it name on Accept and a new button Cancel appears along with the counter of the epochs collected Figure 9 4 Point fos E Code A ti Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertical Epoch Count 1 Cancel Figure 9 4 Topo Accept e A mmGPS icon displays on the Topo screen when the receiver calculates mmGPS heights e Settings opens the Survey Parameters screen See Survey Parameters on page 3 41 If you set precision constraints for a Topo survey TopSURV accepts some averaged point coordinates which are the first to meet the precision requirements e Start Log for PP enabled RTK PP Kinematic and PP DGPS starts logging file in the receiver When pressed the button toggles to Stop Log Instead of an icon displaying the RTK solution the symbol displays showing the status of the log file If the file 1s opened it changes its appearance to p When file logging starts the Status screen also displays the Log History tab see Log History on page 8 16 P N 7010 0492 9 5 GPS Survey If an observed Topo point has a name existing in the job the Duplicate Points screen Figure 9 5 displays Overwrite overwrites the existing point Rename the point is renamed The new name is noted in the field and is the point with observed coordinates Store As Check Point if enabled the observed point is stored as a check point of the exi
374. s to be staked out Can be entered manually or chosen from the list SS Start Stn the starting point of the stakeout the distance from the beginning of the road Antenna for GPS the antenna height HR for TS the rod target height Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stakeout Parameters on page 3 66 Close saves the changes and closes the screen 13 46 TopSURV Reference Manual Real Time Road e Next opens another Stk Road screen Figure 13 47 to enter Cut Fill Slope parameters AS Road Settings Close Cut Slope 1 000 Fill Slope p 500 Figure 13 47 Stakeout Road Cut Fill e Back e Stakeout opens the Stakeout screen The Stakeout screen reports the cut fill values computed for the current observed point The design elevation of the road is automatically calculated for the observed point using the alignment and the templates GPS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 48 on page 13 48 shows the relative position of CL and antenna The screen displays the parameters of the antenna Northing Easting and Elevation if the antenna is not on the road and a Station an Offset and Cut Fill values once on the road e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in the Add Edit Point screen P N 7010 0492 13 47 Staking out FAstakeout Close lll Fixed H v g 100 2201 3 200 1043 Point 107 i a py CS
375. s to the Survey Parameters screen For RTK and Network RTK surveys with enabled post processing and PP Kinematic surveys the Init Times screen Figure 3 41 on page 3 41 displays e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen All the settings will be transmitted only when the configuration is used Ar tees ue Finish Cancel Receiver Port D a Sensor Gain auto i Height Difference Limit fo 300 m Figure 3 40 mmGPS Parameters Initialization Occupation Times The Init Times Occupation Times screens Figure 3 41 on page 3 41 contains timing settings for receiver loggings used in automatic mode during a PP Static Survey and depends upon the number of satellites available and the number of frequencies used e Initialization Occupation Time in minutes these are time values dependent upon numbers of satellites and frequencies For example the default for six GPS GLONASS 6 dual frequency satellites is ten minutes This means that for PP enabled RTK and PP Kinematic surveys the complete Rover file should be at least this long Individual occupations can be different For Static surveys this means that each station Occupation should be occupied for at least ten minutes e Back returns to the previous screen 3 40 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Next proceeds to the next screen for PP Static Stakeout Parameters for PP enabled RTK and PP Kinematic
376. sE sU rNN rNE rNU rEE rEU rUU Comm AT2 F8 4 4F8 44 F8 4 F7 44 F7 44 F7 44 F7 4 F7 44 F7 4 AT Example 50 Point2345 1000 134741 349 9881 834 21 514 62 643 2 054 This block follows block 05 or 50 coordinate with additional data on the measurement DB is data block 51 sN sE sU is the coordinate components standard deviation RMS values and the r fields are correlation coefficients between the coordinate components rNN rEE rUU are all equal to 1 SHP SHP is an ArcView GIS data format used to represent a set of geographic features Refer to the following website for details http dl1 maptools org dl shapelib shapefile pdf A 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Point Coordinate Formats Cut Sheet Standard Cut Sheet Standard format is as follows Header Date Time Job Name Dist Units Meter US Feet Int Feet US Inches Int Inches Design Point Record Point Name Code North East Elev Stakeout Station Record Station Name North East Elev deltaNorth deltaEast deltaElev Cut Cut Sheet User Defined This format contains a set of user defined fields in the user defined order The following fields are available Design Point Code Staked Point Cut Fill Cut Fill Time Stamp Station P N 7010 0492 A 13 File Formats Offset Direction Offset Distance Design North Design East Design Elevation Station North Station East Station Elevation Delta North Delta East Delta Elevation
377. screen For a description of the By Range screen see Select Points by Range on page 14 47 Select points for rotation from the map or the list using the icons to the right 14 50 TopSURV Reference Manual Adjusting Points Tap the Layer icon to rotate all points on a layer selected in the Layers screen e Base Point sets the reference point for the scale transformation either enter manually or select from the map or from the list e Scale Factor the scale factor for the coordinate transformation e Scale Heights check mark and enable this box if the height values should be scaled also e Calc press to scale the selected points A successful message displays 2D Transform To perform a linear two dimensional transformation of a set of points tap the 2D Transform icon The 2D Transform screen Figure 14 63 displays The 2D Transform screen contains a list of point pairs used for getting the transformation parameters Initially this screen is empty a Ar E Transform close L hak Fromet N 1 1499 981 1000 000 2 1000 000 1699 893 lt Figure 14 63 2D Transform e Add press to enter pairs of points or coordinates in the Point Pair Info screen Figure 14 65 on page 14 53 e Edit press to change the information about the point pair highlighted P N 7010 0492 14 51 COGO Calculations Delete press to erase the point pair selected e Close closes
378. se These values represent the horizontal increment of the slope for a unit vertical increment P N 7010 0492 7 27 Editing Roads Cut the cut slope is used when the road surface is below the terrain Fill the fill slope is used when the road surface is above the terrain The X Sect Temp screen Figure 7 26 on page 7 27 also contains a list of segments comprising the template and a plot of the template A list of segments consists of three columns Code the code of the segment Hz the horizontal offset Vert the vertical offset Edit opens the Segment screen Figure 7 27 on page 7 29 with the parameters of the highlighted segment Insert opens a blank Segment screen The inserted segment is inserted in the list above the currently highlighted segment Add opens a blank Segment screen The added segment is attached after the last segment in the list Delete deletes the segment from the template e OK saves the changes and returns to the X Sect Templates screen Figure 7 25 on page 7 26 Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Cross Section Segments The Segment screen Figure 7 27 on page 7 29 contains the parameters of the highlighted segment 7 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Cross Section Sets FAseament oK Cancel k Code cf v Offset Horizontal 1 000 m 0 500 m Figure 7 27 Segment Screen e Code the code of the segment Select the code f
379. set P N 7010 0492 9 17 GPS Survey Auto Topo Survey To set up a survey with automatic topo points tap the Auto Topo icon The Auto Topo screen Figure 9 18 initiates a kinematic survey Ffauto Topo Settings A Auto Topo A Auto Topo pata map Map sade Gel H Vv gg ig iii 2201 3200 10 3 g Point 5112 c E Code E Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertical na Figure 9 18 Auto Topo The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the Auto Topo screen displays the following pop up menu items Status opens the Status screen See GPS Survey Status on page 8 12 Topo opens the Topo screen See Topo Survey on page 9 2 Rover Antenna Setup opens the Antenna Setup screen to set the antenna for the current survey Config Radio opens the Configure Radio screen See Configure Radio on page 8 26 e Config OmniSTAR opens the OmniSTAR screen to start the OmniSTAR service See Configure OmniSTAR on page 8 22 e Reset RTK resets the ambiguities and sets the receiver in the Rover RTK mode The settings are based on selections made in the survey configuration 9 18 TopSURV Reference Manual Auto Topo Survey Reset DGPS sets the receiver in the Rover DGPS mode The settings are based on the selections made in the survey configuration mm GPS Options opens the mmGPS Options screen in RTK survey See mmGPS Options on page 8 32 Note opens the Notes screen
380. sets the interval between the generated points By default it 1s the Station or Chain Interval set in the Start Pt tab on the Roads screen Next opens the appropriate screen depending on the selection made in the Points to Generate panel The last screen contains the Calc button to calculate the road points along the line P N 7010 0492 7 33 Editing Roads Centerline Points Parameters The Centerline Points Params screen Figure 7 32 displays the parameters of points to be computed along the center line fe First iu goe p v Pretix Suftix None aa Save Points To Point List Figure 7 32 Centerline Points Parameters e First Point the name of the first point The photo notes icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Code the code of the points being generated either enter manually or select from the drop down list The Attributes List icon accesses the attributes of the chosen code and opens the Code Attributes screen to set the values for the attributes available for the selected code e The icon next to the Attributes List bitmap displays the pop up menu containing three items String toggles on the String field Also the sign appears Layer opens the Select Layer screen see On the Select Layer on page 6 10 Note opens the Note screen For details see The Topo Menu on page 9 3 7 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Calculate Road P
381. ssseseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 36 S33 Lempi eosi E A 36 TDS X section Template cccccccccscccseeeeenssserseees A 36 TOpSury Template nuien eee A 37 Locahzanom FORiat orae a A 38 GO e T E EE EGE A 38 Roads S rvey FEornmmaty mrica a A 38 XOCH OUr VE VS kiaia a a E A 38 Bind Staton REPO arisia a isc A 38 Raw Data FOr ats sesira asavenitenands A 39 ROE S E A E A a E S TE E A 39 Ee E AE EE EE AE A A A Cran ee ee rar A 39 OHO TSF Sisesnies dena tits cirsisiaiohaainleie clei leecadees A 40 LOT IVAN uenea aoa tneensh ies aacscaneaeaeomeet ciate A 43 TDS RaW Dat eus E eaten A 43 MOSS SUNE hasara hence canes eaisentohacemoiatee A 43 Field BOOK sarnasena an e E aE A 44 Bern GNS anaia a e A 46 Scannine Daa FONA es a A 46 BDE SOOT sorrera e E A 46 VOD TUS CORY gera a EE A 48 OS Vora EE taller ciala laa A 48 IRCDOLE aer alan eiacw ie sive anata nade ela edeoens A 48 Index XIV TopSURV Reference Manual Preface Pretace Thank you for purchasing your Topcon receiver survey product or accessory the Product The materials available in this manual the Manual have been prepared by Topcon Positioning Systems Inc TPS for owners of Topcon products This Manual is designed to assist owners with the use of software the Software to be used with the Product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions the Terms and Conditions E gt Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully Terms
382. sting point Use in Weighted Average available if the Store As Check Point radio button is selected The OK button opens the Weighted Average screen see Weighted Average on page 6 14 for details Correct Base if enabled the existing coordinates of the observed point are not replaced by the coordinates of the observed point Instead the known coordinates of this point are used to correct the Base coordinates After pressing the OK button a warning message displays that recomputations are being performed Then the coordinates of all points are updated using the new Base coordinates ox cance 105 Already Exists Offsets m dN 12 024 dE 0 001 dH 0 001 Overwrite Store As Check Point Use in Weighted Average F Correct Base Figure 9 5 Duplicate Point The Weighted Average screen Figure 9 6 on page 9 7 displays coordinate residuals of the check point e The WA tab lists the names of the coordinate residuals 9 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Topo Survey e Use In WA uses the check points in weighted averaging positions FA weighted Ave ox Cancel WA E Resid 6 012 6 012 0 001 Figure 9 6 Weighted Average Data The Data tab on the Topo screen Figure 9 7 shows the results of the survey Betting cose Data map Offsets 7k DEMO_BASE 1 106 22 304160514 37 3639600 12 150 014 Figure 9 7 Topo Data P N 7010 0492 9 7 GPS Survey T
383. sults Tab The Map tab shows the inverse point to point operation results graphically 14 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Point in Direction Ar UER Pt to Pt List Figure 14 13 Inverse Point to Point List Map Tab Point in Direction To calculate the coordinates of a point using a known point the azimuth the angle offset from the azimuth line and the distance offsets from the From Point tap the Point in Direction icon The Point in Direction screen displays Figure 14 14 On the Point in Direction tab enter the following parameters F z z z Point in Direction close 4 Close el Point in Direction Result Ft in Direction e From 105 ta 125 0000 dms Angle 2 0000 dms 100 000 m Vert Dist 5 000 m coco fioo a vy p Code v Figure 14 14 Point in Direction P N 7010 0492 14 11 COGO Calculations From Point the starting point either enter manually or select from the list or from the map Azimuth Az to Pt sets the azimuth of the line from the From Point Rotates through selections when tapped Azimuth sets the azimuth by value Az to Pt sets another known point to which the direction is calculated and input as azimuth Angle Offset the angle offset from the azimuth line Hz Dist the distance offset along the angle offset line Vert Dist the height offset Cogo Pt the computed point name Code the computed point code Calc ca
384. system the field name changes with the coordinate type selection e Note enter any additional information about the point if preferred e OK saves the changes and returns to the Points screen Points that have no codes or have codes but no strings associated with the codes are simply stored as points On the Point Attributes screen Figure 6 7 you can set a code control code string and attributes values for the point on the Code Attributes tab Ae exes OK cancel Code Attributes Layer Phota gt 7 Code In_gbr w Multiple Codes Figure 6 7 Point Attributes e Code select a code By default the lower panel shows the control code list available for a Code Type of Line or Area The Control Code is a special type of code that is used by the graphic tool for the interpretation of survey results P N 7010 0492 6 7 Editing Job Data The supported control codes AS AE C R control line behavior when creating arcs closure of lines and rectangles respectively The AS control code indicates the start of an arc and the AE control code indicates the end of the arc Arc parameters are determined using additional points in the line TopSURV will not use this linework package if the Allow Custom Control Code box on the Global screen is check marked In this case the user can enter any string to mark it as a control code TopSURV will not interpret these control codes The field marked by
385. t Point PTL Photo Note The Photo Note tab on the Add Point screen displays a photo note a picture of the situation at the point if a picture has been taken and added using the Add button Figure 6 14 Figure 6 14 Add Edit Point Photo Note Tab e Delete erases the picture for the point e Add opens the Select Image File screen to browse for the picture to attach P N 7010 0492 6 13 Editing Job Data Check Points The Check Points tab appears on the Edit Point screen if the point has duplicate points and these points are saved as check points Figure 6 15 The Check Points tab displays the check points coordinates and the deviations from the original coordinate points 4 763 12 275 Figure 6 15 Edit Point Check Points Weighted Average The WA Weighted Average tab appears on the Edit Point screen if the point has check points which are used in a weighted average Figure 6 16 on page 6 15 The Weighted Average tab displays coordinate residuals of the check points used in a weighted average 6 14 TopSURV Reference Manual Points SR oc or Check Points WA Lafe N Resid E Resid 0 000 i00 4 763 H00 12 275 Figure 6 16 Edit Point Weighted Average To exclude a station from a weighted average highlight the station Tap the Exclude from WA Use in WA button to delete include the highlighted station in averaging Figure 6 17 P jEdit Point OK cancel Check
386. t location or the direction to it The menu icon next to the BS Point field E amp displays the pop up menu to set the backsight point From List opens the list of points Station Offset opens the Station and Offset screen to add an arbitrary occupation point near a road Properties opens the Add Edit Point screen that displays the properties of the current point or creates a new point if no point is chosen yet Multiple BS opens the Multi Point BS screen to involve several Backsight points for performing a survey see Multi Point Backsight on page 10 6 BS Circle displays the horizontal circle reading corresponding to the backsight point The menu icon next to the BS Circle field 35 displays the pop up menu that sets the BS Circle value to zero azimuth input value obtains the value from the instrument or changes the value by 90 or 180 degrees P N 7010 0492 10 3 Setting up TS Survey e Measure dist to BS set if the distance to backsight point should be measured Turn To BS available only for the Robotic mode select to turn the total station to the Backsight Point Fixed HR at BS set if the height of the backsight point is fixed for the whole set of measurements If the box is check marked an additional HR box displays This is useful when one target is mounted at the BS for the duration of an occupation and another is used for the sideshots Check BS opens
387. t the station shown on the Station field Up Down the Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the curve at the station COGO Point sets the starting name for the points calculated Code the code of the point Back returns to the previous screen Calc calculates the points along the curve A successful message displays P N 7010 0492 14 43 COGO Calculations Calculating a Road Offset To calculate the coordinates of points along a road tap the Road Offset icon Figure 14 56 The Road Offset screen displays The Road Offset screen selects the road to calculate the offset points and displays the plan of the chosen road KA camee Road Offset Ess 0 00 000 0 A N m lioo m Figure 14 56 Road Offset e Road H Alnt HV Alnt the road horizontal horizontal and vertical alignments to calculate the offset points either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points e SS Start Stn the starting point of the calculated points the distance from the beginning of the road Next opens the Station Chainage amp Offsets screen Figure 14 57 on page 14 45 The Sta amp Ofst screen contains the settings for the calculated stations with offsets from the road 14 44 TopSURV Reference Manual Calculating a Road Offset FAstasotst Close Ee Ea ege Sta Interval 10 000 m Right OFet 000 m tO u E m coco Point i0000 Ea Code zae
388. t to Pt List Res gt Point 5 Point List PointList1 List of Poi b i lt 4 Figure 14 11 Inverse Point to Point List e Point sets the known point name either enter manually or select from the map or from the list P N 7010 0492 14 9 COGO Calculations Point List the Point List name either enter manually or from the list of Point Lists e List of Points the list of currently selected points For details see Point Lists on page 6 33 closes the plot of the polygon Only the list of points is available e Calc calculates the inverse and displays the results on the Results tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing three items e Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 e Edit Point Lists opens the List of Point Lists screen to edit the point lists see Point Lists on page 6 33 e Help accesses the Help files The Results tab Figure 14 12 shows the initial data and the results of the calculation closest point azimuth distance height slope and grade parameters Ar inverse Pt to Pt List Results Map BE From Point 5 To Point 4 Azimuth 211 0536 HDist 1186 707 m dNorth 1016 209 m dEast 612 856 m dHeight 2 036 m Grade Sl 0 17 Slope di 1186 708 m To Point 3 Azim ith 1673 3017 ww Figure 14 12 Inverse Point to Point List Re
389. t ui oa sd seth att a cae settee 13 46 GPSF SAKEO aeiee a e 13 47 UES DLAKCOUE aesae EE EREA 13 48 POI eE E 13 49 GPSF Stak COW orccain ee ae aes 13 51 DS Sta KC OU anann EE es 13 52 0 8 0 oa ene entre E rere ee nee ere arte greets 13 53 GPS StAKe OE ourin ene ceases eae 13 56 TES eS CACC OU aeea a 13 56 Ei haten c K ea eon REA RTI DEP a RTE Ste enTE SPURS et re 13 58 Chapter 14 COGO Calculations cccccccsessessseeneeseseneenensenees 14 1 DUE E E EEI A E EA E E TANA AET ENE E T E T 14 3 Pomt o PON esses a 14 3 Point to LNE erensia a a eee eae 14 7 Porntto Points LIS erdan oes 14 9 P N 7010 0492 xi Table of Contents POmt iit Dire Ch On arrose a 14 11 Compute the Intersection Point 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 14 Be GIUE fe cpeeneeerentnanre niet re nneneat on trie nT rene anne nee anne Tener 14 17 CUNE SOMMUIONS eraser aE 14 18 Calculating the Parameters of a Curve 06 14 19 Three Points CUVE saatepictat cosuaatcctinset caevret cdavsatedeviaieaats 14 22 PL amp Fan Sens sssssansersscnsen eerie esis 14 24 Radius S PoS as esata co s ita t ntact inant oo R 14 27 ATOE ses vassicudneds a ieietsl lence eS eda Diath nh Oia namie rehe 14 29 BV EOD arene tren en Perea CNet Ree ete Cn Tneen re nent tr ne 14 29 The Hinge Method reirast a 14 31 The Line Method oi Sececea cease sasesrasssepeausenesotssaeseaacaecees 14 34 COMED ANGE rrura a tant aaa aay 14 37 ENEO kclei ee eenomren rent eter Mac th
390. ters depends upon the type of the radio selected For detailed description of the radio parameters see Base Radio Parameters on page 3 14 For a Digital UHF Modem Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Internal HiPer Digital UHF TRL 2 and TRL 35 External Digital UHF the Config Radio screen Figure 8 29 on page 8 27 after querying the radio for the frequency sets the radio channel to the frequency on which to receive or transmit correctional data Script file with Frequency list Pac Crest gt Channels ccx must be loaded using the Modem TPS software before any frequencies will be displayed in TopSURV Please do this BEFORE configuring the radio e Radio Connected to selects the modem from the configured ones to setup Rover selects the modem connected with the Rover receiver Base selects the modem connected with the Base receiver e Channel selects the frequency that the radio broadcasts and or listens to 8 26 TopSURV Reference Manual GPS Survey Status Ar C Radio OK Cancel Ar C Radio oK Type Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Type Internal GR 3 Digital UHF Connected to Rover Connected to Rover v Radio Port e Radio Port c Channel Channel 0 450 0000 v Protocol R lex Protocol Simplex v Modulation DBPSK Modulation DBPSK v T Radio Frequency Get Freg Set Radio Get Freg Set Radio Figure 8 29 Config Internal GR 3 Digital UHF When using the GR 3 Digital UHF as the Base radio or when us
391. ters for Line 1 P N 7010 0492 13 23 Staking out 7 Ar ELENE Settings close g Ns Ss iiine i Intersection From Point 100 amp aztopt Joor EAA d Rant Offset TIT m Figure 13 25 Intersection amp Offsets Line 1 e From Point starting point of Line 1 e Az to Pt Azimuth the direction of the line set through the azimuth of the line the azimuth from the start point to the point selected Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line e Next opens the second 2Line amp Ofst screen Figure 13 26 on page 13 25 Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the same options as for the Line amp Offsets screens The second screen contains the parameters of Line 2 Figure 13 26 on page 13 25 13 24 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets AS ELEWA Settings Close Line 2 i From Point oos EA B n Intersect Ht 150 014 m Store Point 102 Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertical Figure 13 26 Intersection amp Offsets Line 2 From Point starting point of Line 2 Az to Pt Azimuth the direction of the line set through the azimuth of the line the azimuth from the start point to the point selected Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the corresponding line
392. the 4 sign is intended for entering a string to generate a line for a Code Type of Line or Area Code Type is set when editing the code The lower panel shows the available attributes Tap on the attribute to display a field to enter its value Properties opens the Attrib Ranges screen Figure 6 8 on page 6 9 to view the ranges for the attributes Repeat erases the entered values Default sets default values Multiple Codes opens the Point Attributes screen with multiple codes to edit Figure 6 9 on page 6 9 e OK saves the changes and returns to the Edit Add Point screen The program displays a message prompt if the attribute value is not within the range specified The Help icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays the pop up menu containing three items Show Second Control Code switches on the field to enter another control code Help accesses the Help files On the Attribute Ranges screen Figure 6 8 on page 6 9 you can view the ranges for the attributes 6 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Points Ar B Ranges close Code gb Reguired eight Figure 6 8 Attribute Range Attributes can only be added on the Code Attributes screen Figure 6 18 on page 6 16 On the Point Attributes screen Figure 6 9 tap the Multi Code Attrs tab You can edit multiple codes and strings Multiple codes and strings associated with a point make the point a part of numerous lines
393. the Backsight Survey screen to check the Backsight point see Check Backsight on page 10 8 HC Set sets the horizontal circle as defined in the BS Circle field and opens the Data tab Settings opens the Mode screen see Set Measurement Mode on page 10 9 The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing seven items Edit Points opens the Points list screen see Points on page 6 2 Edit Raw opens the Raw Data screen see Raw Data on page 6 36 Remote Control for Robotic mode only opens the Remote Control screen which controls the total station through the radio see Figure 10 19 on page 10 18 Config Link only for the Robotic mode opens the Configure Link screen see Configure Link on page 13 7 Inverse opens the Inverse COGO screen see Inverse on page 14 3 Intersection opens the Intersection COGO screen see Compute the Intersection Point on page 14 14 Help accesses the Help files The Data tab on the Backsight Survey screen Figure 10 3 on page 10 5 displays the available values of the backsight point 10 4 TopSURV Reference Manual Backsight Survey parameters HR Height of Rod target HA Horizontal Angle VA Vertical Angle and SD Slope Distance BS Setup Data Map E Mi HI 1 000m Az 45 0000dms HD Error YO Error HA Error 0 0000 dms BS Azimuth 45 0000 dms 0 0000 dms 9
394. the Calibration screen to set the transmitter to calibrate that is to fix errors in incline in the self leveling mechanism of the transmitter e Known Point Offset opens the Known Point screen Figure 8 42 on page 8 37 e Help accesses the Help files Transmitter Data The Data tab Figure 8 39 on page 8 35 calibrates the transmitter with the correct channel and communication port e Name the name of the transmitter e ID the ID that corresponds to the channel of the transmitter e Data the status of calibration data e Add opens the Transmitter screen Figure 8 40 on page 8 36 to get the transmitter data 8 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Initialize mmGPS e Edit opens the Transmitter screen Figure 8 40 on page 8 36 to change the information on the transmitter e Delete removes the transmitter from the list e OK saves settings and returns to the previous screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings AACE OK Cancel Data Pos Sensor Name m bata mmGPS Init Figure 8 39 Initialize mmGPS Data Tab Transmitter On the Transmitter screen Figure 8 40 on page 8 36 set the following parameters e Name the name of the transmitter e Com Port the communication port of the transmitter e ID the channel of the transmitter e Calibration Data the status of calibration data e Clear Data clears the ID and Calibration Data fiel
395. the File menu and tap Exit Indicates the button or key labeled Enter Indicates a field on a dialog box or screen or a tab within a dialog box or screen Indicates the name of a dialog box or screen Supplementary information that can help you configure maintain or set up a system Supplementary information that can have an affect on system operation system performance measurements personal safety TopSURV Reference Manual TopSURV What s New What s New with The chapter briefly describes new features and functions for version 7 2 of TopSURV IS Robot IS Robot is added to the list of Robotic instruments in the TS configurations For details on TS configurations see Total Station Configuration on page 3 50 Point Line Area Editing of codes is updated to include a Code Style of Point Line or Area For details on editing codes see Edit Code on page 6 17 Option to Select Receiver Type Option to select receiver type for GPS survey For details on GPS configurations see Base Receiver on page 3 7 P N 7010 0492 Manufacturer Topcon we Michel lis Robot yr lt lt Back Next gt gt Aer tp Deasc Iype F Lary al l s Poirt l Style riled Circle Eger Aas f Roci Moodie Tap cm Gost s Elevation Matk 10 deg RTE Format em l Antann hee ite Lite Lity Art Hi gt Peripherats ag Back XIX What s New with TopSU
396. the Srv screen Figure 3 5 displays a pop up menu that contains the Help item to access the Help files Ea gt AS Finish Cancel Help Icon _ Post Processing _ mmGPS Simulation Mode Figure 3 5 Survey RTK Parameters 3 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey e Next opens the Base Recvr screen Figure 3 6 on page 3 7 For Network RTK Network DGPS and Real Time DGPS except User Based mode without the post processing option the Rover Receiver screen displays see Figure 3 20 on page 3 22 If a PP Static survey type is selected the Static Recyr screen opens see Figure 3 8 on page 3 9 Base Receiver The Base Receiver screen contains Base settings For RTK and RT DGPS with a User Base surveys the Base Recyr screen contains the following parameters for configuring a Base receiver and antenna Figure 3 6 Ar E RecYr Cancel Ar E Recyr Cancel y Ext Receiver nal Bluetooth Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Receiver Model Elevation Mask 10 deg Elevation Mask fio deg RTK Format CMR v DGPS Format Ful RTCM L313 w Antenn HiPer Lite fLiti Ww T Antenna Map Ant B om T a d Ant Ht 0 000 m Ant Ht poo 000 Slant w slant v Figure 3 6 Base Receiver TopSURV 7 2 on the GMS 2 allows the selection of E gt an external receiver with connection mode cable external or internal Bluetooth Module Figure 3 6 Receiver Model the model of the Topc
397. the point types for import either Design Points Control Points Cogo Points Base Station Topo Points Offset Topo Points Auto Topo Points Sideshot Offset Remote Reflectorless BackSight Stake Points Stake Line Check Points Manually Typed or Tape Dimension e Check Uncheck toggles the highlighted item s on or off depending on the button being pressed To select more than one item press Ctrl while making a selection 5 4 Ar E Type s To Cancel Point Types Design Points t Control Points cogo Points Base Station Topo Points Offset Topo Points Auto Topo Points w B Check Uncheck i Next gt gt Figure 5 4 Select Point Type s to Import TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From Job Back returns to the previous screen Next if available opens the next screen to select objects once the button becomes grayed out tap Finish Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the export process Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Select Points to Import The Points to Import screen filters imported points Figure 5 5 on page 5 6 Filter by Codes 1f enabled all points with the selected codes are imported Select opens the Code screen see Figure 5 6 on page 5 7 for code selection Filter by Range select the points to import These can be set by range or can be used as a range separator or by enumeration
398. the port for file interchange with another controller Com Port Figure 5 11 Select Port e Com Port select the Communication port either COM COM2 IR Port or Ethernet Communication via Bluetooth is also available e Next opens the Select Directory screen Figure 5 12 on page 5 12 P N 7010 0492 5 11 Importing Data File Import Directory On the Select Directory screen Figure 5 12 select the destination directory for data import ArH neang OK Figure 5 12 Select Directory e OK opens the Import File screen reflecting import status to the selected directory Figure 5 13 e Cancel returns to the main screen Import file File name File size Waiting Figure 5 13 Import File A successful completion of the import file operation returns to the main screen 5 12 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From a File Importing From a File To import data from a file tap the From File icon Figure 5 14 On the From File screen Figure 5 14 you can import points roads cross section templates and localization from files of either pre defined or custom formats For a description of these formats see Appendix A Section Sets Format sss Cross Section Set rd aa Figure 5 14 Import From File e Data select the data type to import from the file either Points Lines Point Lists Code Library Horizontal Alignments Vertical Alignments X Section Sets
399. the selected job e Uncheck deselects the highlighted point list e Check selects the highlighted entries e Back returns to the previous screen e Next available if other data is chosen to import in the From Job screen Opens the next screen to select other objects horizontal alignments vertical alignments roads or x section sets which are similar to the Point List to Import screen Once the button becomes grayed out tap the Finish button Finish opens the Import Status screen and starts the import process P N 7010 0492 5 7 Importing Data Ari List to Imp Cancel Paint Lists PointList1 check Uncheck Figure 5 7 Select Point List to Import Import Status The Import Status screen Figure 5 8 reflects the import process and contains a progress bar and a comments window The progress bar displays the percentage of the data being imported Tap Close to return to the main screen Ar import Status Ar import Status Ho points imported 1 point list imported Import successfully finished Cancel Close Figure 5 8 Import Status 5 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Importing From Job Duplicate Objects If the existing job contains objects with the same names as the job they are imported from the Duplicate lt Objects gt screen displays Figure 5 9 FAbupicate Codes Close Warning Code already exists Overwrite Start 2 Suffix Prefix o 7 5 Figure 5 9 Du
400. the station along the line The two arrows to the right decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Sta Interval shown in the next field es E left right arrows decreases increases the distance by the station interval e uses the right left arrow keys of the keyboard to increase or decrease the station Sta Interval the station interval calculated Right Offset Left Offset the right or left offset of the calculated point with respect to the line at the station shown on the Station field above e Up Down the Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the line at the station e COGO Point sets the starting name for the points calculated e Code the code of the point e Back returns to the previous screen e Calc calculates the points along the line A successful message displays COGO Line amp Offset point saved Figure 14 53 Successful Message P N 7010 0492 14 41 COGO Calculations Curve Offset To calculate the coordinates of points along a curve tap the Curve Offset icon The Curv amp Offset screen Figure 14 54 displays P gcur amp Offset PC Point 10006 PT Point 10007 i 150 000 m Num Subs lo Turn Right v ss m O 0 00 000 Mm Figure 14 54 Curve amp Offset PC Point the Point of Curve the starting point of the arc either enter manually or select from the map or from the list of points PT Po
401. the user base RTCM 2 1 RTCM 2 2 or RTCM 2 3 or from a Beacon station in addition RTCM 3 0 can be selected This field disappears when any other differential service is chosen on the Survey screen P N 7010 0492 9 99 Configuring a Job e Next depending on the differential service selected on the Survey screen Figure 3 4 on page 3 6 this button opens one of the following screens Config Rover Radio Figure 3 27 on page 3 29 Config Beacon Figure 3 34 on page 3 35 Config SBAS Figure 3 37 on page 3 37 CDGPS Radio Figure 3 38 on page 3 38 Config OmniSTAR screen Figure 3 39 on page 3 39 e Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used For Network RTK and Network DGPS surveys the screen contains contains the same parameter fields as for RTK survey type except for the RTK Format field In addition the Protocol field is turned on by default Figure 3 22 e Protocol selects the protocol to receive the corrections NTRIP from a NTRIP Caster TCP IP through the Internet CSD Data through a cellular phone used as a modem Ar a RecYrT Cancel Receiver Model Topcon Generic w Elevation Mask 10 deg Protocol NTRIP vw Antenn HiPer LitefLitt anp Ant Ht 2 000 m H vertica v Peripherals Figure 3 22 Rover Receiver Options for Network RTK and Network DGPS 9 94 TopSURV Refer
402. this mode is a calculated value The value not equal to 1 depends on the height of the origin point Compute Rotation The Compute Rotation screen Figure 3 78 on page 3 82 computes azimuth rotation using ground and grid azimuths e Azimuth sets the azimuths in the ground and grid systems e Compute opens the Compute Azimuth screen to compute azimuths in the ground and grid systems respectively P N 7010 0492 3 81 Configuring a Job e Rotation shows the azimuth rotation after pressing OK e OK saves the results and returns to the Grid to Ground Parameters screen e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings PA comoute rot CAM En Azimuth dms Ground 152 4658 eid es Rotation 355 0000 dms Figure 3 78 Compute Rotation Compute Azimuth The Compute Azimuth screen Figure 3 79 on page 3 83 computes the azimuth of the direction using two points e From sets the start point for the direction e To sets the end point for the direction e Add to Azimuth adds an additional value to the azimuth e Azimuth displays the result after pressing the OK button for the first time e OK saves the results and returns to the Compute Rotation screen Figure 3 78 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 3 99 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters FA compute Azim o Cancel To 104 Add to Azimuth 5 0000 dms Azim
403. tical offset starts at the centerline Segment the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the segment the vertical offset starts at the centerline Surface the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the segment the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset switches on off the arrow keys on the keyboard The upper button stands for the station increment decrement the lower button stands for the current segment point location Only one button can be enabled at a time e Back returns to the first Stakeout Road screen e Stakeout opens the Initial Point Name screen e Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 e Close saves the settings and closes the screen GPS Stakeout The Stakeout screen Figure 13 52 displays the relative position of the antenna and the target The panel on the right displays the parameters of the target FAstare close I E H vY g ini 2 201 3 200 2 00 000 k Hz Dist RAN 6161615 429 m Left 16 286 m Back 160 384 m Fill 3 000 m Ellipsoidal ht 150 014 m Azimuth 183 4900 dms Figure 13 52 Stakeout P N 7010 0492 13 51 Staking out fi fq advances the station by the specified Station Interval for staking out points at the Next station e Store saves the location Check the parameters of the stored point in th
404. tings On the Code Style screen Figure 4 23 on page 4 21 select or create a desired format for information on every point to arrange it on one line in the exported file e Style selects a defined format style The pre defined styles are Topcon Carlson and Eagle Point e Using the arrows move items from the Available column to the Order column and arrange in the preferred order e Separators opens the Separators screen to display separators for a selected style e Close returns to the previous screen without changes made 4 90 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting to File e Delete deletes the selected style from the list e Save saves the custom report format and a new entry appears in the Style drop down menu FA code Style Close Style ropcon v Available wa Order 5 Code String Separator String Control Code Separator we Figure 4 23 Code Style On the Separators screen Figure 4 24 you can enter Code String Control Code and Note separators for a new style Style Topcon Code Separator String Separator Control Code Separator je Hote Separator f Figure 4 24 Separators P N 7010 0492 4 21 Exporting Data Topcon Text Custom QC The procedure of exporting points and point lists to the Topcon Text Custom QC format is the same as for the Topcon Text Custom format For details see Topcon Text Custom on page 4 14 The only difference is that thi
405. tion if needed select an Earth curvature refraction value from 0 14 and 0 2 Job to store the results the New button opens the New Job screen to create a new job to store the adjusted traverse stations e Next opens the next Adjustment screen to perform adjustment Ww raga Adjustment gt start Point 1000 2 End Point 1000 wW Adjust Elevations W Adjust Sideshots Curvature refraction 0 14 Y Job to store the results URY PC Jobs TraverseAdjustment tsj Next gt gt Figure 14 66 Adjustment Settings 14 54 TopSURV Reference Manual Adjusting Points Adjustment The next Adjustment screen Figure 14 67 selects the method of traverse adjustment to use and a technique to close the traverse if it is unclosed raa Adjustment Wo Apply Compass Rule W Apply Angle Balance Closing Angle 90 0005 dms lt lt Back Adjust Figure 14 67 Adjustment e Apply Compass Rule check mark and enable this box to adjust the traverse by the compass rule e Apply Angle Balance check mark and enable this box to adjust the traverse by the angle balance e Closing Angle shows the closing angle for the traverse adjustment e Adjust press to adjust the traverse The Adjustment Results screen opens to display results The traverse points adjusted will be saved in the new job as calculated points P N 7010 0492 14 55 COGO Calculations Traverse This function
406. tion on the selected point e Select Points displays a floating menu of four items Select one of the following methods of adding points to the beginning of the line By Code select the codes with which the points are added to the line By Code String select the codes and strings with which the points are added to the line From Map select the points by tapping them on the map points that are sequentially tapped are connected with a line From List select the points from the drop down list The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items e Edit Points displays the Points screen For details see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files P N 7010 0492 6 29 Editing Job Data Layer Style On the Edit Line screen Figure 6 35 tap the Layer Style tab to set a type and a color to display the line in the selected Linework on the map Points in Line Layer Style Layer Style Layer ES Point Style lt By Code w Line Style lt By Code w Color Width lt By Code gt v lt By Code gt v na Figure 6 35 Edit Line Layer e Layer selects the layer for the line from the drop down list e Line Style selects the form and width of the line from the drop down lists and shows the result e Color opens the Select Color screen see On the Select Color on page 6 11 to choose the color for the line
407. to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 51 on page 3 51 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used P N 7010 0492 9 57 Configuring a Job Eae Fos oor Cable Comm Settings Baud Parity Even x Data Stop Default ih Figure 3 58 Cable Radio The Radio screen sets the parameters of the modem connected to the total station see Figure 3 59 on page 3 59 Type the type of modem either Satel Pacific Crest or Generic Radio Comm Settings sets radio communication parameters parity number of data bits baud rate and the number of stop bits Configure Radio opens the Radio Parameters screen for a Satel or Pacific Crest radio Figure 3 17 on page 3 19 and Figure 3 18 on page 3 20 Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the Search Track screen see Search Track on page 3 60 Finish saves the changes and returns to the Select Survey Config screen Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used 2 58 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Radio Comm Settings Baud Parity None Data Jd Stop Configure Radio Figure 3 59 TS Radio Mode The Mode screen contains the parameters defining the turning ability of conventional total stations This mode is available only for motorized instruments in Conventional and Reflectorless modes of operation Figure 3 60 on page 3 60 Table 3 3 lists Motorized total
408. truction manual for RC 2 P N 7010 0492 10 19 Setting up TS Survey Help accesses the Help files The Map tab shows all points in a graphic mode For details on map properties and customizing see Viewing Map on page 15 1 When the Robotic total station operates in Remote Control Mode some of the screens change their appearance The remote control tools display on the Measurement tab Figure 10 20 of the Resection screen Paree See KE 16 Meas Data Map Set Point iB J OSes 4 EG Code fi HR 2 000 m HA 33 2511 V4 91 0543 50 19 070 X Measure Foresight Direct Figure 10 20 Sample Screen for Remote Control Mode Rotate The Rotate screen Figure 10 21 on page 10 21 contains settings for rotation of the remote total station e Rotation Angles sets the values of the horizontal and vertical rotation angles Turn sends the data to the total station The corresponding icon shows the rotation process e Rotate to Point selects a point by typing its name selecting it from the map or a list or inserting the HR value height of rod or target Press the Turn button e Plunge TS press to plunge the instrument rotate the telescope and the body by 180 degrees 10 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Remote Control Ao ee Close Rotation Angles Hz 245 1622 dms j Vert 91 0657 dms Turn Rotate to Point Point fi HR 2 000 m cits Plunge TS Figur
409. ts for various instruments and situations low power memory limited loosing gaining radio link or fixed solution with GPS receiver or tracking with Robotic Total Station Back returns to the previous screen Finish saves the settings and returns to the main screen Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 2 9 Working with a Job Opening a Job To open a job tap the Open Job icon The Open Job screen Figure 2 9 displays Select a job from the list or create a new one J F Open Job Created 09 30 2007 22 33 Modified 09 30 2007 22133 1 LTPS TopSurR Y Jobs Figure 2 9 Open Job The Job List field contains the names of all existing jobs created opened using TopSURV Initially the Job List contains only a Default job created upon TopSURV installation The icon indicates a TopSURV job When a job is selected from the list the Created and Modified fields shows the date that the job was created and when it was last modified The path below the Job List shows the directory where the selected job is located Figure 2 10 on page 2 11 e Open opens a new job and returns to the main screen i Browse displays the screen to browse directories to select a job to open Use the standard navigation buttons to move up or down to the directory where the desired file resides Highlight the file and press OK Make sure you select the appropriate Instrument Type to correctly sho
410. ts with the selected codes Select opens the Code screen Figure 4 6 on page 4 6 Filter by Range selects a range of points to export These can be 66 99 66 99 66 99 set by range or can be used as range separators or by enumeration Name Separator selects a parameter to use as a name separator Use for Range Separator shows the separator used as a range separator Back returns to the previous screen Next opens the next screen to select data The button is available until all data of chosen types is selected and the Finish button appears to open the Export Status screen Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings P N 7010 0492 4 5 Exporting Data Select Code The Code screen Figure 4 6 contains a list of available codes All codes that have been check marked are imported Ro ore Select Codes PLAT SUMTERAL SUMTER 42 IRF6819 T s F2 FO FS FO WPP lt Figure 4 6 Select Code e Uncheck removes the mark from the highlighted code e Check marks the highlighted codes e Select or OK returns to the Points to Export screen with the codes selected e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 4 6 TopSURV Reference Manual Exporting To a Job Select Point List to Export The Pt List To Export screen Figure 4 7 selects the point lists to export along with the data chosen Fp ust vo e
411. tutes XVI TopSURV Reference Manual Terms and Conditions acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreement to abide by these Terms and Conditions The user is granted a personal non exclusive non transferable license to use such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single Product or single computer You may make one 1 backup copy of the Software Otherwise the Software may not be copied or reproduced You may not assign or transfer the Software or this license without the express written consent of TPS This license is effective until terminated You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and Manual TPS may terminate the license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions You agree to destroy the Software and manual upon termination of your use of the Product All ownership copyright and other intellectual property rights in and to the Software belong to TPS If these license terms are not acceptable return any unused Software and the Manual CONFIDENTIALITY This Manual its contents and the Software collectively the Confidential Information are the confidential and proprietary information of TPS You agree to treat TPS Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringent than the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict you from disclosing
412. ulated point Hz Dist the Horizontal Distance along the azimuth line Vert Dist the Vertical Distance along the azimuth line To Point the name of the calculated point The photo note icon opens the Add Photo Notes screen to enter a photo note for the point Code the code associated with the calculated point BS Point displays the BS Point screen for entering the Backsight Point or Backsight Azimuth Figure 14 70 on page 14 58 If a BS point has not been entered an Azimuth is required In this case if an angle value is entered as Angle Right Angle Left or Deflection this value is considered to be azimuth SideShot if pressed the coordinates of the To Point are calculated based on the entered values for Azimuth Angle Right Angle Left Deflection Horizontal and Vertical distances The From Point parameter does not change and the To Point parameter is incremented to the next new Point in the database Traverse if pressed the coordinates of the To Point are calculated based on the entered values for Azimuth Angle Right Angle Left Deflection Horizontal and Vertical distances The From Point changes to the To Point and the To Point changes to the next new name in the database The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files P N
413. ult values OK returns to the Rover Radio screen Figure 3 27 on page 3 29 P N 7010 0492 3 31 Configuring a Job Connect Type Receiver connect Port Setup Port E Parity None Data w wt Baud 38400 Stop pose E Defaults Figure 3 30 Using RE S1 as Repeater e Next opens the next RE S1 FH915 Repeater screen to choose the location protocol and operating channel for the RE S1 radio Figure 3 31 Ar RILE J o Cancel Location JERE V Protocol FHS 15 w Channel 1 w Figure 3 31 Configure RE S1 Repeater After enabling the usage of the RE S1 as a repeater the Config RE S1 option becomes available for selection from the Help Icon menu in the Status Start Base and Topo screens RE S1 FH915 Repeater on page 3 31 2 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Configuring the Survey Output Radio If NMEA Ports mode is selected see Figure 3 22 on page 3 24 depending on the number of output ports set there can be several Output Radio screens to configure radios for NMEA data output Figure 3 32 The Output Radio screen contains parameters for the radio modem connected to the Rover Figure 3 32 on page 3 33 For details see Rover Radio on page 3 29 e Next opens the Config Output NMEA screen If needed the Rover Radio Param screen displays first Povo nado REN CEE Radio Modern Receiver Port Connected to Radio Port ee Baud 28400 v Data g Parity None Sto
414. ur or more orientation points have been established click to display the orientation results Figure 11 37 on page 11 37 11 36 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning aJalale Ps Tap on Orientation Pt Meas lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 11 36 Calculate Image Orientation Orientation Results The Orientation Results screen displays the results of the image orientation Figure 11 37 The results for each orientation point is displayed as dX and dY in image pixels 3 MAX dX 2 5 d 0 5 GOOD RMS dX 2 5 dY 0 4 BAD Figure 11 37 Orientation Results e Delete removes the selected point to adjust the orientation calculation If four points still remain the new results are displayed If less than four orientation points display the Orientation Results screen closes automatically to continue the orientation procedure P N 7010 0492 11 37 Total Station Survey e Back continues to the Scan screen Figure 11 38 to select areas for scanning Selecting Scan Area Use one of the following methods to select one or more areas for scanning Select Area Method 1 Draw a rectangle by pressing the stylus on the screen for the start point and dragging to the end point When the stylus is lifted the area is set Figure 11 38 Select Area Method 2 Draw a polygon by pressing the stylus down at each vertex Lines will be drawn connecting each vertex to the previous one Press the stylus near the first vertex
415. uring a Job PA coora system SAM EEE Projection lt none gt wt nod Use Grid to Ground Datum wese4 nd so Geoid lt none gt v aan Figure 3 70 Coordinate System Projections The Projections screen contains a list of cataloged projections to select for the job Figure 3 71 on page 3 75 e Pre Defined contains a tree of available projections divided by regions e Custom opens the Custom Projections screen to add edit user defined projections Figure 3 72 on page 3 75 e Active contains a list of selected projections corresponds to the drop down list in the Projections field of the Coordinate System screen The first time the screen is opened it is empty Figure 3 71 on page 3 75 selects the chosen projection in the Pre Defined panel and inserts it into the Active panel deletes the highlighted projection from the Active panel e OK saves the changes and returns to the Coord System screen Figure 3 70 e Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings 9 74 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters fa Africa H Asia a Australia and New Zealand a Canada ce Furane Active UTMNorth 7one_3 36E to 42E Figure 3 71 Projections Custom Projections The Custom Projections screen Figure 3 72 contains a list of custom projections grid systems Initially this list is empty e Delete press to delete the sele
416. urn causes the instrument only for motorized surveys to search for the prism after turning to the design point when enabled Back returns to the previous screen Next opens another Stk Parms screen Figure 3 67 on page 3 68 Finish saves the changes and returns to the Survey Style screen Figure 3 51 on page 3 51 Settings are transmitted only when the configuration is used Cancel closes the screen without saving the settings Hz Dist Tolerance 0 0500 m Reference Direction Instrument Reference v Turn TS to Design Pt HA only aa Search After Turn Figure 3 66 Stakeout Parameters First Screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu containing two items e Display opens the Staked Point Icon screen to set an icon for the staked point as in GPS configurations see Staked Point Icon on page 3 47 Help accesses the Help files The second additional Stk Parms screen Figure 3 67 on page 3 68 sets parameters to save staked points P N 7010 0492 3 67 Configuring a Job Fasem EN Store Staked Point As Point Design Pt Suffix a stk Note Design Point b Figure 3 67 Stakeout Parameters Second Screen Store Staked Point As sets the rules for naming staked points The only field needed for a Level survey Point sets the rule for defining names for the staked out points either design point name next point na
417. urve eat 3 Point Dsan HA 27 1836dms Right of Curve 1 916 m Away From TS 1 993 m Dist Along Curve 0 573 m Fill 0 000 m Turn Right 73 2100 dms Figure 13 45 Stakeout e EDM selects distance measurement mode either Coarse Fine or Coarse Tracking e Stop instructs the Robotic Total Station to stop tracking and go into Stand By mode e Search instructs the Robotic Total Station to start searching for the prism e Cur Pos causes a measurement to be made and displays the result on the screen e Store takes a measurement and opens the Store Point screen to store the current position as a point see Store Point on page 13 9 e Close saves the changes and closes the screen The Help Icon in the upper left corner displays the pop up menu that contains the same options as in the Offsets stakeout P N 7010 0492 13 45 Staking out Real Time Road To start the road stakeout in real time select the Real Time Rd icon Figure 13 46 The Stakeout Road screen displays The Stk Road screen Figure 13 46 selects a road for stakeout and displays the plan of the chosen road The Help Icon in the upper left hand corner displays the same pop up menu as the Line amp Ofst screen AS Road close gt oo m Ess b o0o 000 D ay m lio m o 0o00 ogg Figure 13 46 Stakeout Road Road H Alnt HV Alnt the road horizontal alignment and horizontal vertical alignment
418. urvey mode To open this screen select the mmGPS Options item from the Help Icon menu in the upper left corner of the Status screen Ar E Opts oK Cancel mmGPS is DISABLED Turn mmGPsS ON ka Use weighted height computations Height Difference Limit 0 300 m Figure 8 37 mmGPS Options e Select Turn mmGPS ON to enable mmGPS height computation Use weighted height computations check and enable to combine mmGPS elevations and GPS elevations When selected this option forces the receiver sensor to always consider the angle and distance when determining the elevation then combines the two elevations accordingly This option works well at large 300m distances and steep angles e Height Difference Limit sets the threshold for the difference between GPS and mmGPS height measurements 8 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Known Point Initialization Known Point Initialization To set up a survey with known points tap the Known Point Init icon The Known Point Init screen Figure 8 38 initializes the receiver using known coordinates for the Rover station This screen is used with single frequency receivers and for quality control on dual frequency receivers f l Point 101 nown Pt Ini z i E WG564 m Lat 55 3206876 15 Lon 27 3639600 14 Ell ht 150 015 Ant Ht 2 000 m Vertic v Figure 8 38 Known Point Rover Point sets the name of the point select from either the list icon or
419. us Point For this set of points the distance between the RP and PC should be equal to the distance between the RP and PT The radius and the PC PT points define two curves one with delta less than or equal tol80 small curve the other with delta greater than or equal to 180 large curve The value of Small or Large can be selected from the Curve drop down box to indicate which of these two curves should be used for staking SS the starting station chainage of the line Next opens the Station and Offset screen see Station amp Offsets on page 13 19 Settings opens the Stakeout Parameters screen see Stake Parameters on page 3 44 The Help Icon in the upper left hand corner displays the same pop up menu as for the Line amp Offset screen see Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 GPS and TS stakeouts are performed in the same way described in Line amp Offsets on page 13 17 13 28 TopSURV Reference Manual Offsets Curves amp Offsets To stakeout Curves amp Offsets select the Curve icon Figure 13 30 The Curv amp Ofst screen Figure 13 30 function performs a stakeout of a curve section of an arc at a specified horizontal and vertical offset from the curve K Ce gt PC Point 10006 a J E Lrve PT Point 10007 150 000 m _ Num Subs o Turn Right v ss m Oo o 00 000 mM Figure 13 30 Stakeout Curve amp Offset PC Point the Point of Curve
420. uth 157 4658 dms Figure 3 79 Compute Azimuth Custom Datums The Custom Datums screen Figure 3 80 contains a list of custom datums Initially the list is empty e Delete deletes the selected custom datum e Edit opens the Custom Datum screen to edit parameters of the selected custom datum e Add opens the Custom Datum screen to enter parameters for a new custom datum Figure 3 81 on page 3 84 Ar custom Datums Close Figure 3 80 Custom Datums P N 7010 0492 9 93 Configuring a Job To set parameters for a new custom datum press the Add button Figure 3 80 on page 3 83 The Custom Datum screen Figure 3 81 displays to enter or select parameters for a new custom datum e Name sets the name of the new datum e Fllipsoid selects the ellipsoid for the datum from the list of available types e Note any additional information about the datum e Next opens another Custom Datum Figure 3 81 screen to set offsets rotations and scale for the new datum Ar custom BE Finish Cancel Ar custom Berta Finish Cancel Offsets m Name aw dX 0 000000 Ellipsoid wese4 i dY 0 000000 Note dz 0 000000 Rotations secs rX 0 00000000 ry o c0000000 rZ 0 00000000 Scale 0 000000 ppm Figure 3 81 Custom Datum e Back returns to the previous Custom Datum screen e Finish creates the custom datum and returns to the Custom Datums screen with the new datum added
421. utomatically change the station number The application suggests that the survey on the next station uses the same codes in the opposite order F E D cl C B A The line is created along the points with the cl code 11 26 TopSURV Reference Manual Find Station For a detailed description of the survey process see Topo on page 11 2 The only difference lies in the presence of the Cur Stn Cur Chn button Similar to the Meas button it makes the measurement but does not store the point to the data set Find Station To start working select the Find Station icon The Meas tab Figure 11 25 on the Find Station screen identifies the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the projection of the station to the road and the offset of the station from the center line of the road Ar DE SA Settings 4 Meas Results Map a Point ME EY code fi ur f200m ORS Measure Foresight Direct Figure 11 25 Find Station Measurement Tab Road enter the name of the road or select it from the list e Point select the name of the point from the map or the list Code enter either manually or select from the drop down list e the Attributes List icon opens a list of available attributes for details see On the Point Attributes on page 6 7 ga shows the battery and memory status for the controller e The menu icon next to the Attributes List icon displays
422. value Az to Pt sets another known point to which the direction is calculated and input as azimuth Start Stn the starting station of the reference line Store PTL Point store the point as PTL point see PTL Mode on page 11 6 Calc calculates the inverse and displays the results on the Results tab The Help Icon in the upper left corner of the screen displays a pop up menu containing two items Edit Points opens the Points screen to edit the points see Points on page 6 2 Help accesses the Help files The Results tab Figure 14 9 shows the initial data and the results of the calculation Station Offset and Height parameters Ar OEE Point to Line Results Map lt gt From Point 100 Line Start Point 101 Azimuth 120 0000 Start Sta 0 00 000 Sta 0 01 686 Offset 3 062 m Height 0 000 m Figure 14 9 Inverse Point to Line Results Tab 14 8 TopSURV Reference Manual Inverse The Map tab Figure 14 10 shows the results graphically Ar inverse Point to Line Close Results Map KE 101 Figure 14 10 Inverse Point to Line Map Tab Point to Points List To calculate the inverse for all the points in the Points list with respect to a known point tap the Point to List icon The Inverse Point to Point List screen displays Figure 14 11 The Inverse Pt to Pt List tab illustrates the point inverse operation Ar inverse Pt to Pt List EA Inverse P
423. w the name of the opened job in the title bar Use the Switch Mode Icon to select 9 10 TopSURV Reference Manual Deleting a Job FAoren Job OK Cancel Type Job Files tsj aa BJ Storage Card TPS 7 EGEERS Name Sroad tsj Figure 2 10 Browse Jobs The job files created in TopSURV have the tsjob extension TopSURYV select the Ts6 Job Files tsv or All To see the job files created in an earlier version of 7 Files type Deleting a Job To delete a job tap the Delete Job icon Once deleted from the Job List the file is deleted from the controller Figure 2 11 on page 2 12 When a job is selected from the list the Created and Modified fields reflect when the job was created and last modified e The path under the Job List displays the directory where the selected job was created e Browse if a job is not listed in the job list browse through the directories to select the job you want to delete e Delete deletes the job e Close closes the screen P N 7010 0492 9 11 Working with a Job Ar ES Job Close Current Job SITE_1 Created 10 15 2007 23 35 Modified 10 15 2007 23 35 1 LTPS TopSurR Jobs Figure 2 11 Delete Job When a job is deleted the job history file images etc are also deleted Viewing Job Information To view job information tap the Job Info icon The Job Info screen contains information about the current job Figure
424. where R is the Radius the Length is Length R x Delta C External the piece of PI RP section from PI to the curve If the External is defined then assuming that Delta _ R External cos lt lt 2 R where R is the Radius the Length is Length R x Delta Sector the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine Segment the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off Fillet the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc The Map tab Figure 14 26 on page 14 22 shows graphically the results of the calculation P N 7010 0492 14 21 COGO Calculations Ar curve Solution Curve Solution Results Figure 14 26 Curve Solution Map Tab Three Points Curve To define the curve using three points PC point any curve point and PT point or the RP PC and PT points tap the Three Pt Curve icon The Three Pt Curve screen displays Figure 14 27 The screen display changes depending upon the first point selected The Three Points Curve tab displays the initial data ia Ar three Pt Curve Ar three Pt Curve Close SPT Curve Bi Three Ponts curve renia E Three Points curve resi aIr 6 f e e Curve Point 2 e PC Point 2 PT Poit B PTPoint 5 RP Point 10013 Curve Small na Ee Code ji f Figure 14 27 Three Pt Curve Either enter manually or select from the list or from the m
425. width 2 gt lt Params gt lt Layer gt A 20 TopSURV Reference Manual Code Libraries lt Layer name lay2 active 1 plot 1 notes second gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 153 colorG Value 98 colorB Value 156 dashStyle 2 width 3 gt lt Params gt lt Layer gt lt Layer name 0 active 1 plot 1 gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 128 colorG Value 128 colorB Value 128 dashStyle 0 width 1 gt lt Params gt lt Layer gt lt Layers gt lt Code name codel layer 0 gt lt Params type Point gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 markStyle 1 gt lt Params gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 dashStyle 1 width 1 gt lt Params gt lt Attributes gt lt Code gt lt Code name code2 layer 0 gt lt Params type Point gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 markStyle 1 gt lt Params gt lt Params type Line gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 dashStyle 1 width 1 gt lt Params gt lt Attributes gt lt Code gt lt Code name code3 layer 0 gt P N 7010 0492 A 21 File Formats lt Params type Point gt lt DrawParams colorRValue 255 colorG Value 255 colorB Value 255 markSty
426. wing Line s mark combines from three characters Road s badge alternative s badge line s badge KEYWORD is on every line and after that the parameters Parameters are c text inf integer f decimal number with coordinates 4 decimals Parameters are separated with spaces P N 7010 0492 A 33 File Formats ROAD Road s badge TIE badge c10 ROAD ALTERNATIVE Alternative s badge TIEVE badge c10 LINE Line s badge description code survey line road s side etc start sta LINJA badge description start sta c10 int f ELEMENT Element s informations are Element s number description code for drawing if different than line s description code if not then 0 geometry 1 straight 2 circle 3 circular arch 13 circular arch over half circle 4 clothoid start radius end radius clothoid s parameter a ELEM number description geometry rl 12 a int int int f f f ELEMENT P1 Element s start sta information Element s number start sta x1 y1 ELEMPI number start sta xl yl int f f f ELEMENT P2 Element s end sta information Element s number end sta x1 y1 ELEMP2 number endsta xl yl int f f f ELEMENT CP Circle s centre point s information Element s number x y ELEMCP number x y int f f A 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Roads Formats Vertical Elements ROAD Road s badge TIE badge c10 ROAD ALTERNATIVE Alternative s badge TIEVE badge c10 LINEZ CL s badge horiz line badge stations
427. xists in the Job the Camera data is selected automatically Otherwise select 11 32 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning a previous Camera or browse for a new one Cameras are stored as text files with the cmr extension ArH Scan Cancel Session First_sesslon a Image Camera min_focal cmr Figure 11 30 Enter Scan Session Information e View when available opens the View Scan screen e Back returns to the previous screen e Next click to open the Orient screen Figure 11 32 on page 11 34 to complete View Scan The View Scan screen when available displays the image along with orientation and scanned points for completed scan sessions P N 7010 0492 11 33 Total Station Survey AJAA Tap on Orientation Pt Meas e Back Next gt gt Figure 11 31 View Scan Orientation The Orient screen Figure 11 32 associates a position on the image x y with known NEZ coordinates ENG Tap on Orientation Pt Figure 11 32 Orientation K zooms in the image Sy zooms out the image displays the whole image 11 34 TopSURV Reference Manual Scanning D enables disables a pan drag control of the image When the Pan button is disabled tap on the image to choose the orientation point The image zooms to this point and displays a crosshair The position of the crosshair can be adjusted Figure 11 33 QEA res Select or meas Orient Pt Meas
428. y grid distance units correspond to one distance unit on the ellipsoid Az Rotation sets the angle between the axes of the grid and the ground coordinate systems This angle defines the reference direction for ground azimuths e Offsets enter offset values of the origin along the North and East axes to reduce ground coordinates to manageable values For Origin Point the Grid to Ground Params screen displays the parameters to set the origin of the ground coordinates Figure 3 77 on page 3 81 9 30 TopSURV Reference Manual Setting Coordinate System Parameters Parameters Origin Pt aa Direction Grid to Ground Combined SF 0 9 9695 149 Az Rotation 255 000 ams Orig Pt 102 E r E La J Ground Pt m Morth 1000 000 East 1000 000 Figure 3 77 Grid to Ground Origin Point Direction always show the Grid to Ground coordinate transformation type Combined SF shows the combined scale factor opens the Compute Rotation screen Figure 3 78 on page 3 82 to compute the Azimuth Rotation value For details see Figure 3 79 on page 3 83 e Orig Point sets a desired grid point from the job as a ground origin can be selected from a map a list or entered manually Ground Pt sets the ground coordinates for the origin point e OK calculates all needed transformation parameters offsets scale factor rotation and returns to the Coord System screen The scale factor for
429. y 9 9 P Pattern 3 60 Point guide 3 64 Points 6 2 Post processing kinematic 3 5 static 3 5 Prism constant 3 64 Projection 2 5 3 72 3 74 Raw data 6 36 Receiver base receiver 3 7 3 21 Reference direction 3 45 Road 7 2 Rover known point 8 34 RTK 3 4 S Scan range 3 62 Sensitivity 3 61 Sideshot 11 4 Signal to noise ratio 8 21 Slope 7 27 Stakeout angle sequence 3 63 line GPS 13 14 meas method 3 62 point amp direction 13 35 Index point GPS 13 2 road 13 49 slope 13 46 13 53 Stakeout parameters for GPS 3 45 for Total Station 3 66 Survey auto topo 9 18 backsight survey 10 2 topo 9 2 Survey parameters for GPS 3 41 for Total Station 3 62 T Tape dimension 11 29 reference line 11 29 Tolerances 3 63 Total Station models 3 54 Track speed 3 61 Units angle units 2 7 distance units 2 6 pressure 2 7 temperature 2 7 V VAL 7 24 elements 7 17 long section 7 17 vertical grade 7 22 X X section 7 29 11 25 cut and fill 7 27 template 7 26 TopSURV Reference Manual y PVY TOPCON Topcon Positioning Systems Inc 7400 National Drive Livermore CA 94550 800 443 4567 www topcon com ISO 9001 2000 FM 68448 TOOPSURV Reference Manual P N 7010 0492 RevK 11 08 2008 Topcon Corporation All rights reserved No unauthorized duplication

TopSURV Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents